Simodrive PDF

SIMODRIVE 611 analog
Start–Up Guide 10.2000 Edition
Transistor PWM Inverters for

AC Feed Drives and
AC Main Spindle Drives
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Overview of Documentation for SIMODRIVE 611 analog
General Documentation
SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK SIROTEC
SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE
Accessories
Catalog Catalog
Order Document NC 60 Accessories and
Equipment for Special–
Purpose Machines
Order Document NC Z
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIROTEC SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE
611 611–A 611–A
Planning Guide Planning Guide EMC Guidelines Description Start–up Guide

Motors Transistor PWM for SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE 611 analog SIMODRIVE 611 analog
Inverters for AC Feed and SIROTEC
AC Motors for Controls Start–up Software for Transistor PWM
Feed and Main Drives and AC Main Main Spindle and Inverters for AC Feed
Spindle Drives Spindle Drives Induction Motor Modules Drives and AC Main
Spindle Drives
Electronic Documentation
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
DOC ON CD
840D/810D/ The SINUMERIK System
FM–NC/611/
Motors
Foreword
General Information AL
Supply Infeed NE
Feed Modules VS
Feed Modules,
Resolver Control VR
Transistor PWM Inverters
for AC Feed Drives Main Spindle Modules HS
and AC Main Spindle
Drives Induction Motor Modules AM
Start–Up Guide Spare Parts ES
Attachment A
Short reference NE/VS
Short reference VR
Short reference HS
Short reference AM
Overall Index
Valid for
Equipment series 6SN11–
10.00 Edition
SIMODRIVE documentation
3
Edition coding
Brief details of the Edition and previous editions are listed below.
IThe status of each Edition is shown by the code in the “Remarks” column.
Status code in the “Remarks” column”:
A . . . . . New documentation.
B . . . . . Unrevised reprint with new Order No.
C . . . . . Revised edition with new status.
If factual changes have been made on the page since the last edition,
this is indicated by a new Edition coding in the header on that page.
Edition Order No. Remarks

07.94 6SN1197–0AA60–0BP0 A
10.94 6SN1197–0AA60–0BP1 C
12.94 6SN1197–0AA60–0BP2 C
03.96 6SN1197–0AA60–0BP3 C
04.97 6SN1197–0AA60–0BP4 C
10.00 6SN1197–0AA60–0BP5 C
This Manual is also included in the documentation on CD–ROM (DOCONCD)

Edition Order No. Remarks
10.00 6FC5298–6CA00–0BG0 C
Trademarks
SIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI, SIMATIC NET, SIROTEC, SINUMERIK and SIMODRIVE are registered
trademarks of Siemens. Other names in this publication might be trademarks whose use by a third party for
his own purposes may violate the rights of the registered holder.
You will find additional information in the Internet under:

http://www.ad.siemens.de/simodrive Functions may be executable in the control but are not described in
this documentation. No claims can be made on these functions if
This document was generated with Interleaf V 7 included with a new shipment or when involved with service.
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that they
contents is not permitted without express written authority. coincide with the described hardware and software. The information
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights in this document is regularly checked and necessary corrections are
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, included in reprints.
are reserved. We are thankful for any recommendations for improvement.
 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved. Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No. 6SN1197–0AA60–0BP5 Siemens–Aktiengesellschaft

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
Foreword
This document is part of the documentation developed for SIMODRIVE. All do-
cuments are available individually.
The documentation list, which includes all advertising Brochures, Catalogs,
Overviews, Short Descriptions, User Manuals and Technical Descriptions can
be obtained from your local Siemens office with Order No., location and price.
This Manual does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor
to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installa-
tion, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise, which
are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be
referred to the local Siemens sales office.
The contents of this Guide shall not become part of nor modify any prior or exi-
sting agreement, commitment or relationship.
The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. Any statements
contained herein neither create new warranties nor modify the existing warranty.
 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition i
10.00
07.94
1.2 bbbbbbbbbb
Definitions
Qualified personnel
For the purpose of this documentation and product labels, a “qualified person” is
someone who is familiar with the installation, mounting, start–up and operation
of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she must have the following
qualifications:
Trained and authorized to energize, de–energize, clear, ground and tag cir-
cuits and equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance

with established safety procedures.
Trained in rendering first aid
Danger
! This symbol indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property
damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
! This symbol indicates that death, severe personal injury or property damage
can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
! This warning (with warning triangle) indicates that minor personal injury can
result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
This warning (without warning triangle) indicates that material damage can
result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
This warning indicates that an undesirable situation or condition can occur if
the appropriate instructions/information are not observed.

ii SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
07.94
Important
! This symbol appears in the documentation if a particular issue is significant.
Note
For the purpose of this documentation, “Note” indicates information about the
product or the respective part of the document which is essential to highlight.
Warning
! Operational electrical equipment has parts and components which are at ha-
zardous voltage levels.
Incorrect handling of these units, i.e. not observing the warning information, can
therefore lead to death, severe bodily injury or significant material damage.
Only appropriately qualified personnel may commission/start–up this equip-
ment.
This personnel must have in–depth knowledge regarding all of the warning
information and service measures according to this Guide.
Perfect, safe and reliable operation of this equipment assumes that it has been
professionally transported, stored, mounted and installed as well as careful
operator control and service.
Hazardous axis motion can occur when working with the equipment.
Note
When handling cables, observe the following
they must not be damaged,

they must not be strained and
they must not come into contact with rotating components.

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition iii
10.00
07.94
Note
It is not permissible to connect SIMODRIVE equipment to a supply system with
ELCBs (this restriction is permitted acc. to DIN VDE 0160 / 05.88, Section 6.5).
When operational, protection against direct contact is provided in a form to al-
low the unit to be used in enclosed electrical equipment rooms
(DIN VDE 0558 Part 1 / 07.87, Section 5.4.3.2.4)
In compliance with DIN VDE 0160 / 05.88, all SIMODRIVE units are subject to
a high–voltage test at the time of routine testing. If the electrical equipment of
industrial tools is subject to a high–voltage test, all connections must be
disconnected so that sensitive electronic components in the SIMODRIVE
converter are not damaged (permissible acc. to DIN VDE 0113 / 06.93, Part 1,
Section 20.4).
Warning
! Start–up/commissioning is absolutely prohibited until it has been ensured that
the machine in which the components described here are to be installed, fulfills
the regulations/specifications of the Directive 89/392/EWG.
Warning
! The information and instructions in all of the documentation supplied and any
other instructions must always be observed to eliminate hazardous situations
and damage.
For special versions of the machines and equipment, the information in the
associated catalogs and quotations applies.
Further, all of the relevant national, local and plant/system–specific regula-

tions and specifications must be taken into account.
All work should be undertaken with the system in a no–voltage condition!
Warning
! Before commissioning SIMODRIVE 611 analog it should be checked that the
encoder cable does not have a ground fault.
If ground faults occur for loads which extert a force on the drive (e.g. hanging,
vertical axes), uncontrolled movement could occurr.
This no longer occurs for 6SN1118–0D2–0AA0, Version B.

iv SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
07.94
ESDS information Electro–static discharge sensitive devices
Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge are individual

components, integrated circuits, or boards, which when handled, tested or
transported, could be destroyed by electrostatic fields or electrostatic
discharge. These components are designated as ESDS (ElectroStatic
Discharge Sensitive Devices).
Handling ESDS boards:
The human body, working area and packing should be well grounded when
handling ESDS components!
Electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary.

Components may only be touched, if
– you are continuously grounded through an ESDS bracelet,
– you are wearing ESDS shoes or ESDS shoe grounding strips in
conjunction with an ESDS floor surface.
Boards may only be placed on conductive surfaces (desk with ESDS

surface, conductive ESDS foam rubber, ESDS packing bag, ESDS
transport containers).
Boards may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or television

sets (a minimum of 10 cm should be kept between the board and the
screen).
Boards may not be brought into contact with materials which can be
charged–up and which are highly insulating, e.g. plastic foils, insulating
desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from man–made fibers.
Measuring work may only be carried out on the boards, if

– the measuring equipment is grounded (e.g. via the protective conductor)
or
– for floating measuring equipment, the probe is briefly discharged before
making measurements (e.g. a bare control housing is touched).
Only touch the control boards at the front panel
Note
Start–up software is available for starting–up/commissioning the main spindle
and induction motor modules.
Start–up software Order No.: 6SN1153–2AX10–AB
Documentation Order No.: 6SN1197–0AA30–0P

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition v
10.00
07.94
SINUMERIK and SIMODRIVE

Enhanced productivity as a result of fast, reliable commissioing
Handling Sophisticated industrial electronics, as are involved here, have to be handled

especially carefully. We regularly evaluate and investigate equipment which is
returned, and in so doing, we have identified some of the main fault causes,
which in some cases results from incorrect handling during commissioning and
troubleshooting.
Check list The following check list should help you to simply commission the components
we have supplied and guarantee a high availability when used in conjunction
with your product or equipment.
Observe all of the ESD measures when handling components.

Tighten–up all bolts and screws to the specified torque. Pay special
attention to the DC link bolt connections (1.8 Nm tightening torque).
Correctly insert all connectors and lock/screw into place.
Screw the control components into the power module.
Observe the power–on sequence in the Planning Guide.
If the unit is frequently powered–down and up, the DC link charge circuit is
locked–out. The DC link can only be charged again after it has cooled down
for several minutes with the supply off.
Are there line supply/motor contactors connected to the drive converter?

These are only switched in a no–current condition.
Ground all components and connect all of the shields. Connection X131 is
grounded.
Observe the load capability of the central power supply.
Only discharge the unit at the DC link buses through a minimum of 10 Ω.
In operation, units with hard disks may only be stressed with a max. of 1 g
read/write error; defective).
Are OEM components (ISA–/PCMCIA card) used? Their current drain must
lie within the specified values.
CRT monitors may not be subject to magnetic fields (e.g. power supply unit
coils).
When commissioning and fault finding, always proceed in a modular step–
by–step fashion. This means: First commission the central controller and
line supply module, then connect–up and commission the components one
after another.

vi SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
07.94
The units are designed for the specified mechanical, climatic and electrical
ambient conditions. None of the limit values may be exceeded, neither in
operation nor during transport. Please pay specific attention to the following:
– line supply conditions
– pollutants
– damaging gases
– climatic ambient conditions
– storage/transport
– shock stressing
– vibration stressing
– ambient temperature
Further Further detailed information is provided in the Planning Guides and Installation
information Start–up Guides associated with our products.


SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition vii
10.00
07.94
Space for notes

viii SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
AL
General Information (AL)
1 Permissible Combination of Power Modules and Control Boards . . . . . . . AL/1-3

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition AL–i
10.00
07.94
AL
Space for notes

AL–ii SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
07.94 General Information (AL)
1 Permissible Combination of Power Modules and Control Boards
AL
Permissible Combination of Power
Modules and Control Boards 1
Table 1-1 Selection list to set the current controller referred to the resulting power module currents
Fixed setpoints, motorized pot
Dir. meas. system, TTL signal
SIMODRIVE 611
1–axis, user–friendly interface
Anal. speed f. setp. mot. pot.

No direct measuring system
components
FD resolver control, analog

1–axis, standard interface

6SN1121–0BA13–0AA0
6SN1122–0BA11–0AA0
6SN1121–0BA12–0AA0
6SN1121–0BA11–0AA0
6SN1118–0BK11–0AA0
6SN1122–0BA12–0AA0
6SN1121–0BA11–0AA1
6SN1122–0BA11–0AA1
6SN1118–0BJ11–0AA0
6SN1118–0AE11–0AA
6SN1118–0AA11–0AA
6SN1118–0AD11–0AA
MSD control, analog

MSD control, analog
MSD control, analog
MSD control, analog

Ext. position output
IM control, analog
FD control, analog
IM control, analog
IM control, analog
FD control, analog
FD control, analog
Parameter board
FD analog user–friendly Required _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____
6SN1114–0AA01–0AA0
HS option FD analog
user–friendly Possible _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____
6SN1114–0AA02–0AA
Power module, 8A
FD: FD: _____ FD–R: _____ _____ _____ _____ IM: IM: _____ IM:
4/8A 4/8A 3/6A 3/3/3 A 3/3/3 A 3/3/3 A
6SN112–1AA0–0HA
Power module, 15A
FD: FD: _____ FD–R: _____ _____ _____ _____ IM: IM: _____ IM:
7.5/15A 7.5/15A 5/10A 5/5/8 A 5/5/8 A 5/5/8 A
6SN112–1AA0–0AA
Power module, 25A
FD: FD: _____ FD–R: _____ _____ _____ _____ IM: IM: _____ IM:
12.5/25A 12.5/25A 9/18A 8/10/16A 8/10/16A 8/10/16A
6SN112–1AA0–0BA
Power module, 50A
FD: FD: _____ FD–R: _____ MSD: MSD: MSD: IM: IM: MSD: IM:
25/50A 25/50A 18/36A 24/32/32A 24/32/32A 24/32/32A 24/32/32A 24/32/32A 24/32/32A 24/32/32A
6SN112–1AA0–0CA
Power module, 80A
FD: FD: _____ FD–R: _____ MSD: MSD: MSD: IM: IM: MSD: IM:
40/80A 40/80A 28/56A 30/40/51A 30/40/51A 30/40/51A 30/40/51A 30/40/51A 30/40/51A 30/40/51A
6SN112–1AA0–0DA
Power module, 120A
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ MSD: MSD: MSD: IM: IM: MSD: IM:
45/60/76A 45/60/76A 45/60/76A 45/60/76A 45/60/76A 45/60/76A 45/60/76A
6SN112–1AA0–0GA
Power module, 108A
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ MSD: MSD: MSD: IM: IM: MSD: IM:
45/60/76A 45/60/76A 45/60/76A 45/60/76A 45/60/76A 45/60/76A 45/60/76A
6SN112–1AA0–0LA
Power module, 160A
FD: FD: _____ _____ _____ MSD: MSD: MSD: IM: IM: MSD: IM:
80/160A 80/160A 60/80/ 60/80/ 60/80/ 60/80/ 60/80/ 60/80/ 60/80/
6SN112–1AA0–0EA 102A 102A 102A 102A 102A 102A 102A
Power module, 200A
FD: FD: _____ _____ _____ MSD: MSD: MSD: IM: IM: MSD: IM:
100/200A 100/200A 85/110/ 85/110/ 85/110/ 85/110/ 85/110/ 85/110/ 85/110/
6SN112–1AA0–0FA 127A 127A 127A 127A 127A 127A 127A
Power module, 200A
pipe connection FD: FD: _____ _____ _____ MSD: MSD: MSD: IM: IM: IM: IM:
100/200A 100/200A 85/110/12 85/110/12 85/110/12 85/110/12 85/110/12 85/110/12 85/110/12
7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A
6SN112–1AA0–0FA
SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition AL/1-3
General Information (AL) 07.94
AL
Table 1-1 Selection list to set the current controller referred to the resulting power module currents
Dir. meas. system, TTL signals
Fixed setpoints, motorized pot.
SIMODRIVE 611
1–axis, user–friendly interface
Anal. speed f. setp. mot. pot.

No direct measuring system
components


6SN1121–0BA13–0AA0
6SN1122–0BA11–0AA0
6SN1121–0BA12–0AA0
6SN1121–0BA11–0AA0
6SN1118–0BK11–0AA0
6SN1122–0BA12–0AA0
6SN1121–0BA11–0AA1
6SN1122–0BA11–0AA1
6SN1118–0BJ11–0AA0
6SN1118–0AE11–0AA
6SN1118–0AA11–0AA
6SN1118–0AD11–0AA
MSD control, analog

MSD control, analog
MSD control, analog
MSD control, analog

Ext. position output
IM control, analog
FD control, analog
IM control, analog
IM control, analog
FD control, analog
FD control, analog
Power module, 300A

_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ MSD: MSD: MSD: IM: IM: IM: IM:
120/150/ 120/150/ 120/150/ 120/150/ 120/150/ 120/150/ 120/150/
6SN112–1AA0–0JA 193A 193A 193A 193A 193A 193A 193A
Power module, 400A
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ MSD: MSD: MSD: IM: IM: IM: IM:
200/250/ 200/250/ 200/250/ 200/250/ 200/250/ 200/250/ 200/250/
6SN112–1AA0–0KA0 257A 257A 257A 257A 257A 257A 257A
Power module, 2x8A
_____ _____ FD: _____ FD–R: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____
2x4/8A 2x3/6A
6SN112–1AB0–0HA0
Power module, 2x15A
_____ _____ FD: _____ FD–R: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____
2x7.5/15A 2x5/10A
6SN112–1AB0–0AA0
Power module, 2x25A
_____ _____ FD: _____ FD–R: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____
2x12.5/ 2x9/18A
6SN112–1AB0–0BA 25A
Power module, 2x50A
_____ _____ FD: _____ FD–R: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____
2x25/50A 2x18/36A
6SN112–1AB0–0CA
This Start–Up Guide appropriately applies to the following drive modules:
6SN1130–1AA11–0A0 FD module, 1–axis, user–friendly interface
6SN1130–1AA12–0A0 FD module, 1–axis, user–friendly with
MSD option
6SN1130–1AD11–0A0 FD module, 1–axis, standard interface
6SN1130–1AE11–0A0 FD module, 2–axis, standard interface
6SN1135–1BA1–0A0 MSD module
6SN1140–1BA1–0A0 IM module
AL/1-4 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
07.94 General Information (AL)
AL
Note
This document describes the steps which are necessary to start–up
(commission) an installed SIMODRIVE drive group. Please refer to the
associated Planning Guides for additional technical information, e.g. regarding
ambient conditions
recommended circuits
connection diagrams
dimension sheets/dimension drawings
SIMODRIVE 611
Transistor PWM Inverters for AC Feed Drives and AC Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1197–0AA00–0P
SIMODRIVE
AC Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1197–0AA20–0P

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition AL/1-5
General Information (AL) 10.00
07.94
AL
Space for notes

AL/1-6 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
Supply Infeed (NE)
NE
1 Standard Settings, NE Modules (UE and I/R Modules), Monitoring and Pulsed
Resistor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NE/1-3
2 Service and Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NE/2-7
2.1 Terminals and relay functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NE/2-8
3 Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NE/3-13
3.1 Terminals, NE, monitoring and pulsed resistor modules . . . . . . . . . . . NE/3-14
3.2 Terminals, UE module 5/10 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NE/3-16

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition NE–i
10.00
07.94
Space for notes
NE

NE–ii SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
07.94 Supply Infeed (NE)
1 Standard Settings NE Modules, Monitoring and Pulsed Resistor Modules
Standard Settings, NE Modules (UE and NE

I/R Modules), Monitoring and Pulsed
Resistor Modules 1
Important
! Observe the information/instructions regarding closed–loop sinusoidal current
control for I/R modules!
If you do not observe the difference between sinusoidal/squarewave current
control, the equipment could be destroyed!
There is a switch S1 on the upper side of the NE and monitoring module which
is used to select the following functions:
ON: S1 OFF:
Vsupply=415V10% VDC link= 625 V1) 1 Vsupply=400V10% VDC link = 600 V1)
Fault signal 2 Ready signal
Regenerative feedback off 1) 3 Regenerative feedback on
Vsupply =480V+6%–10%; S1.1 inactive 4 S1.1 active
Controlled infeed off 5 Controlled infeed
Sinusoidal current control 6
Squarewave current control
Standard setting
Fig. 1-1 DIL switch S1
Important
! For I/R modules. Order No. 6SN114–10–01 the basic setting is
closed–loop sinusoidal control . Observe the information on NE/1–5!
Important
! Before the system is powered–up/down using the main switch or a line
contactor, terminal 63 (pulse enable) and/or terminal 48 (start terminal,
contactor control), must be de–energized or disconnected!
1) only possible for I/R module, monitoring thresholds are increased for all NE modules

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition NE/1-3
Supply Infeed (NE) 07.94
Switch S 1.1 : OFF: I/R moduleVsupply =400V10%;

VDC link=600V (DC link voltage)
UE module Vsupply =400V10%; VDC link=1.35*Vsupply
Monitoring thresholds: (I/R, UE, monitoring modules)
Pulsed resistor on =644V (pulsed res. switch–on threshold);
Pulsed resistor off =618V (pulsed res. switch–off threshold)
NE VDC link>> =710V (DC link overvoltage threshold);
ON: I/R module Vsupply =415V10%; VDC link=625V
UE module Vsupply =415V10%; VDC link=1.35*Vsupply
Pulsed resistor on =670V; Pulsed resistor off =640V
VDC link>> =740V;
Comment: Only active, if S1.4 OFF
Switch S 1.2 : OFF: Ready signal (X111: Ready relay)

ON: Fault signal (X111: Ready relay )
refer to NE/Section 2.1
Switch S 1.3 : OFF: Standard setting, regenerative feedback active

I/R modules are capable of regenerating into the line supply
UE module: The pulsed resistor in the module is effective
ON: Regenerative feedback is disabled
I/R module: Regenerative feedback operation is inhibited
UE module: The pulsed resistor in the module is not effective
Comment: The function is only effective for UE 10kW from

Order No.[MLFB]: 6SN1146–1AC00–0AA1 onwards
(not for UE 28kW)
Switch S 1.4 : OFF: S1.1 active

ON: Vsupply = 480V+6%–10%; VDC link=1.35*Vsupply in the
regenerative feedback direction
Pulsed resistor on = 744V; Pulsed resistor off =718V
VDC link>> = 795V
Comment: Uncontrolled operation in the regenerative feedback direction.
(valid for Order No. [MLFB] 6SN114–10–01)
Note
Only in conjunction with power modules, Order No. [MLFB]
(6SN114–10–01).
For motors with shaft heights < 100 mm: Utilized up to max. the 60 K values.
Please observe the Planning Guide, Motors.
S1.4 ON overwrites the functions of S1.5 and S1.1.

NE/1-4 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
Switch S 1.5 : This function is only available in conjunction with I/R modules
Order No.: 6SN114–10–01
OFF: Standard setting, controlled infeed active.
ON: Uncontrolled operation in the regenerative feedback direction
VDC link=1.35*Vsupply .
Regenerative feedback starts at VDC link=600 or 625V, NE
depending on the setting of S1.1.
Switch S 1.6 : OFF: Closed–loop squarewave current control (current square

waveform is drawn from the line supply)
ON: (Standard) This function is only available in conjunction with
I/R modules 6SN114–10–01
closed–loop sinusoidal current control (sinusoidal current is
drawn from the line supply)
Sinusoidal current is only permissible if the following secondary

conditions are fulfilled:
I/R I/R I/R I/R I/R

16 kW 36 kW 55 kW 80 kW 120 kW
6SN114– 6SN114– 6SN114– 6SN114– 6SN114–
1B01–0BA1 1B02–0CA1 1B0–0DA1 1BB00–0EA1 1BB01–0FA1
HF reactor HF reactor 36 kW HF reactor 55 kW HF reactor 80kW HF reactor 120kW
16 kW
6SN1111– 6SN1111– 6SN1111– 6SN1111– 6SN1111–
0AA00–0BA0 0AA00–0CA0 0AA00–0DA0 0AA00–1EA0 0AA00–1FA0
Line filter Line filter for Line filter for Line filter for Line filter for
sinusoidal current 1) sinusoidal current 1) sinusoidal current 1) sinusoidal current 1) sinusoidal current 1)
16 kW 36 kW 55 kW 80 kW 120 kW
6SN1111– 6SN1111– 6SN1111– 6SN1111– 6SN1111–
0AA01–2BA0 0AA01–2CA0 0AA01–2DA0 0AA01–2EA0 0AA01–2FA0
Important
! For all combinations which are not listed, only closed–loop squarewave
current control is permissible .
1) In the sinusoidal line filters, contrary to the squarewave current filter modules, there are no HF commutating reactors.
The HF commutating reactor must be separately mounted.
The specified line filter types are also suitable for the squarewave current mode.


07.94
Space for notes
NE

10.00
2 Service and Diagnostics
Service and Diagnostics 2 NE
Display elements on the monitoring and NE modules
1 2
3 4
5 6
1 LED red – Electronics power supply 15 V faulted
2 LED red – 5 V voltage level faulted

3 LED green –Ext. enable signal not available (terminal 63 and/or 64 missing)
4 LED yellow – DC link charged
5 LED red – Line supply fault (single or multi–phase line supply failure at
terminals U1, V1, W1) 1)
– No commutating reactor, incorrectly installed
or incorrectly selected
– Fault level of the line supply or transformer too low
6 LED red – DC link overvoltage
Possible causes: Regenerative feedback off, setting–up operation,
line supply fault, for UE, pulsed resistor not operational or too small,
line supply voltage too high, dynamic overload, line supply filter
installed between the I/R and commutating reactor
Effects:
1 LED red bright: Pulses are deleted for the complete drive group
4 LED yellow dark: Pulses are deleted for the complete drive group
5 LED red bright: Only the I/O module pulses are deleted (regenerative feed
back no longer possible. Axes initially continue to run,
ready relay drops–out)
1) Line supply fault recognition time, approx. 30 ms

Line supply fault is recognized when the three–phase voltage is < 280 V.
For a single–phase power failure, the drive axis pulses are deleted after approx. 1 min
(saved signal) valid for Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1114–10–01

07.94
2.1 Terminals and relay functions

X111 Ready relay
NE – terminals 72 – 73.1 NO contacts closed for “ready”

– terminals 73.2 – 74 NC contacts open for “ready”
Switch S1.2 OFF, the relay pulls–in, if:

– internal main contactor CLOSED (terminals NS1 – NS2 connected, terminal 48
energized)
– terminal 63, 64 = ON
– it is not permissible that a fault is present
(this is also true for FD 611A Standard, 611D drives or MCU)
– FD with standard interface or resolver for the “ready” setting must be enabled
(terminals 663, 65)
– NCU must have run–up (SINUMERIK 840D, SINUMERIK 810D)
– the MCU must have run–up
Switch S1.2 ON, relay pulls–in, if:

– internal main contactor CLOSED (terminal NS1 – NS2 connected, terminal 48
energized)
– it is not permissible that a fault is present
(this is also true for FD 611A Standard, or 611D drives or MCU)
– FD with standard interface or resolver for the “ready” setting must be enabled
(terminals 663, 65)
– NCU must have run–up (SINUMERIK 840D, SINUMERIK 810D)
– the MCU must have run–up
X121 I2t pre–alarm and motor overtemperture
Terminals 5.1 – 5.2 NO contacts open for “no fault”

Terminals 5.1 – 5.3 NC contacts closed for “no fault“
This relay switches, if:

– at the I/R ––> the heatsink temperature monitoring responds
– at FD 611D ––> the motor temperature monitoring responds
––> heatsink temperature monitoring responds
– at FD 611A user–friendly
––> motor–temperature monitoring responds
(for resolvers: this is not saved, no shutdown!!)
––> I2t pre–alarm responds (this is not saved)
– at FD611A Standard
––> motor–temperature monitoring responds
––> I2t temperature monitoring responds
X171 terminals NS1 – NS2
(coil circuit of the internal line supply and pre–charging contactor)
– is used to provide electrical isolation from the line supply

(signaling contact, terminals 111 – 213 must be interrogated)
– may only be switched when terminal 48 is open–circuit
(without any restrictions from
Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1145–101–0 for 10, 16 and 55 kW
Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1145–102–0 for 36 kW, all 80 and 120 kW)

10.00
Terminal 48 Start
– has the highest priority

– sequence:
pre–charging ON – interrogate VDC link 300V and VDC link √2 Vsupply
– 50 V.
If yes, then NE
500 ms pre–charging contactor OPEN, interrogate whether actually
OPEN, main contactor CLOSE
1 s internal enable signal (for I/R and module group)
– is saved during pre–charging
Terminal 63 Pulse enable
– has the highest priority for enabling the pulses for all of the modules
– acts instantaneously
Terminal 64 Drive enable
– acts instantaneously on all modules

– when the signal is withdrawn, nset is set to 0 for all drives, and
– For MSD / IM 611A, after a selectable speed has fallen below,

the pulses are cancelled. The drive is braked along a ramp.
– For VSA 611A, all of the controllers and pulses are inhibited after
a selected time has expired (setting when supplied: 240 ms).
The drive is braked along the current limit.
– For 611D drives, the pulses are deleted after a selectable speed has
been fallen below or after a selectable time has expired. The drive is
braked at the selected limit! (for spindles, the ramp can only be
achieved along the regenerative limit [kW]!)
Terminal 112 open–circuit Setting–up operation
– The VDC link control is inhibited

– Regenerative feedback is not possible,
i.e. when braking, VDC link can be > 600 V !
– This function can be interrogated using the start inhibit signal,
terminals AS1 – AS2.
Caution
! Induction motors can reach high speeds even at low VDC link!
Terminals AS1 – AS2 Start inhibit signal
– Terminals AS1 – AS2 closed means “start inhibit is effective”

(i.e. terminal 48 = open–circuit, setting–up operation)
Terminals 111, 113, 213 Signaling contacts, internal line contactor
– Terminals 111 – 113 NO contacts

– Terminals 111 – 213 NC contacts (for I/R 16 kW and UE 10 kW,
only from
Order No.[MLFB] 6SN1145–101–0)

07.94
Terminal 19 FR–
– Reference ground, enable voltage

– Floating (connected with the general reference ground terminal 15 via10 kΩ)
– Terminal 19 may not be connected to terminal 15
(connect to PE rail, or to X131 )
NE
Terminal 9 FR+
– Enable voltage : +24 V

– Maximum load capacity of the power supply (power supply): 500 mA
(corr. to 8 EP;1 optocoupler input required 12 mA, for UE = 5 kW ––> 1A)
X 141 Electronic voltages
– Term. 7 P24 +20.4 to 28.8 V / 50 mA

– Term. 45 P15 +15 V / 10 mA
– Term. 44 N15 –15 V / 10 mA
– Term. 10 N24 –20.4 to –28.8 V / 50 mA
– Term. 15 M 0V
– Terminal 15 may not be connected to PE (ground loop)
– Terminal 15 may not be connected to terminal 19
(short–circuit via reactor, which internally connects terminal 15 to X131)
Terminals L1 – L2 for 80 kW and 120 kW I/R
– Is used to supply the coil circuit of the internal line contactor

– directly supplied with 2–ph. 400 V AC at the line supply
(not between I/R and reactor)
– Fuse: IN 4 A, version gL
Fan connection for 80 and 120 kW I/R
– 3–ph. 360 to 510 V AC, 45 – 65 Hz directly from the line supply

(not between I/R and reactor)
– Observe the direction of rotation!
– Fuse: IN 1.5 A (motor protection circuit–breaker)
6–wire connection
with additional power supply connection at the DC link:
– For this mode, terminals 2U1, 2V1 and 2W1 of the power supply
must be supplied with the line supply voltage between the series reactor and
I/R, as otherwise the power supply will be destroyed. The also applies to the
montioring modules!
Note
This is guaranteed by the jumpers inserted in the factory at connector X181.
Monitoring module with connection to the line supply and additional power
supply connection at the DC link :
– For this mode, terminals 2U1, 2V1 and 2W1 of the power supply
must be supplied with the line supply voltage between the series reactor and
I/R, as otherwise, the power supply will be destroyed!
– Terminal 63 may only be energized (enabled) after the NE module has run–up
(ready). (Interrogation “ready” or terminal 111 – 113 – 213).

10.00
Diagnostics The overvoltage limiting module must be checked if a line supply fault is
displayed or the yellow LED is dark.
Procedure:
1. Power–down the unit so that it is in a no–voltage condition
2. Remove the overvoltage limiting module and insert connector X181 on the NE
NE module. If the NE module functions, then the overvoltage limiting module
is defective and must be replaced. Otherwise, check the line supply and if
necessary check the NE module/group.
Note
In this way, continued operation is possible, without overvoltage protection.
3. Insert the overvoltage limiting module 566018.9415.00 up to its end stop,

and insert connector X181 on the overvoltage limiting module.
Note
Operation without overvoltage limiting module is not in conformance with UL!

07.94
Space for notes
NE

3.1 Terminals, NE, monitoring and pulsed resistor modules
Attachment 3 NE
Note
When using non PELV circuits at terminals AS1, AS2, terminal 111, terminal
113 and terminal 213, connector coding must be used to prevent connectors
being interchanged.
––> refer to EN 60204–1, Section 6.4.
Order No. for the coding connector ––> refer to Catalog NC 60.1.
Only PELV circuits may be connected to terminal 19.

07.94
Table 3-1 Terminal functions

NE Term.
Desig. Function
Type
Typ. voltage/limit values
Max. Terminals
No. 1) cross–section available in 3)
U1 Line supply I 3–ph. 400 V/480 V AC Refer to the
V1 Planning Guide I/R, UE
W1
L1 Line supply I 2–ph. 400 V AC, directly at 16mm2/10mm2 4) I/R 80/104 kW,
L2 for contactor I the line supply 16mm2/10mm2 4) 120/156 kW
PE Protective conductor I 0V Bolt
P600 DC link I/O +300 V Busbar I/R, UE, MM, PR
M600 DC link I/O –300 V Busbar
Grounding bar 5) I/O –300 V Busbar I/R, UE
P600 DC link I +300 V 16mm2/10mm2 4)

MM
M600 DC link I –300 V 16mm2/10mm2 4)
1R, Connection, internal/ I/O 300 V 16mm2/10mm2 4)
2R, external resistor PR
3R
X131 Electronics M I/O 0V 16mm2/10mm2 4) I/R, UE, MM
X351 Equipment bus I/O Various Ribbon cable I/R, UE, MM, PR
M500 X181 DC link power supply I 600 V/680 V DC 1.5 mm2
P500 X181 DC link power supply I 600 V/680 V DC 1.5 mm2
1U1 X181 Output L1 O 3–ph. 400 V/480 V AC 1.5 mm2

I/R, UE, MM
2U1 X181 Input L1 I 3–ph. 400 V/480 V AC 1.5 mm2
1V1 X181 Output L2 O 3–ph. 400 V/480 V AC 1.5 mm2
2V1 X181 Input L2 I 3–ph. 400 V/480 V AC 1.5 mm2
1W1 X181 Output L3 O 3–ph. 400 V/480 V AC 1.5 mm2
2W1 X181 Input L3 I 3–ph. 400 V/480 V AC 1.5 mm2
7 X141 P24 O +20.4...28.8 V/50 mA 1.5 mm2
45 X141 P15 O +15 V/10 mA 1.5 mm2
44 X141 N15 O –15 V/10 mA 1.5 mm2
I/R, UE, MM
10 X141 N24 O –20.4...28.8 V/50 mA 1.5 mm2
15 X141 M O 0V 1.5 mm2
R X141 RESET6) I Term.15/RE = 10 kΩ 1.5 mm2
5.3 X121 Relay contact NC 50 V DC/0.5 A/12 VA max 1.5 mm2
5.2 X121 Group signal NO 5 V DC/3 mA min 1.5 mm2
5.1 X121 I2t/motor temp. I 1.5 mm2
63 X121 Pulse enable 2) I +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 kΩ 1.5 mm2
9 X121 Enable voltage 2)8) O +24 V 1.5 mm2 I/R, UE, MM
9 X121 Enable voltage 2)8) O +24 V 1.5 mm2
64 X121 Drive enable 2) I +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 kΩ 1.5 mm2
19 Enable voltage, ref. 0V 1.5 mm2
potential
74 X111 NC 1.5 mm2
nc X111 1.5 mm2
73.2 X111 Relay contact I 1.5 mm2
1–ph. 250V AC/50V DC/2A
73.1 X111 Ready signal I 1.5 mm2 I/R, UE, MM
max
nc X111 5V DC/3mA min 1.5 mm2
72 X111 NO 1.5 mm2

10.00
Term. Type Max. Terminals

Desig. Function 1) Typ. voltage/limit values
No. cross–section available in 3)
9 X161 Enable voltage 2)8) O +24 V 1.5 mm2
112 X161 Setting–up operation/ I +21 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 kΩ 1.5 mm2 I/R, UE, MM
Normal operation2) NE
48 X161 Contactor control 2) I +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 kΩ 1.5 mm2
111 X161X Signaling contact I +30 V/1 A (111–113) 1.5 mm2
213 161 Line contactor NC 1–ph. 250 VAC/50 V DC/ 1.5 mm2
7) I/R, UE
2 A max
113 X161 17 V DC/3 mA min 1.5 mm2
NO
AS1 X172 Signaling contact I 250V AC/1A/50V DC/2A max 1.5 mm2
I/R
AS2 X172 Start inhibit (term.112) NC 5 V DC/10 mA min 1.5 mm2
NS1 X171 Coil contact for line O +24 V 1.5 mm2
NS2 X171 supply, pre–charging I 1.5 mm2 I/R, UE
contactor
19 X221 Enable voltage ref. po- O 0V 1.5 mm2
tential
PR
50 X221 Control contact for fast I 0V 1.5 mm2
discharge
Notes:
1) I = Input, O = Output, NC = NC contact, NO = NO contact (for signal: closed = high, open = low)
2) Terminal19 is the reference ground (this is connected inside the module to general reference ground X131/terminal 15
with 10 k). Terminal 15 may not be connected to PE or to terminal 19. Do not connect external voltage sources to
terminal 15! Terminal 19 can be connected to X131 .
3) I/R = Infeed/regenerative feedback module;
UE = Uncontrolled infeed;
MM= Monitoring module;
PR = Pulsed resistor module
4) The 1st data is valid with cable lug. The 2nd data is valid for finely–stranded conductor without end sleeve.
5) The grounding bar is used to ground the DC link M bus via 100 kΩ (this should be preferably inserted, for non–grounded
line supplies, always insert).
6) RESET = Reset the fault memory, edge–triggered for the complete drive group (terminal R→ terminal15 = RESET)
7) Terminals 111–213, positive opening NC contact (for I/R 16 kW and UE 10kW only from Order No.[MLFB]
6SN114–101–0).
Terminals 111–113, NC contact, not positively driven
8) Max. current load, terminal 9 – terminal 19: 0.5 A

07.94
3.2 Terminals, UE module 5/10 kW
3.2 Terminals, UE module 5/10 kW
Term. Desig– Type

NE No. nation
Function 1) Typ. voltage limiting values Max. cross–section
U1 X1 Line supply I 3–ph. 400 VAC/480 V 4 mm2 finely stranded

V1 without end sleeve
W1 6 mm2 with cable lug
PE1 – Protective conductor I 0V Thread M5
PE2
X131 Electronics M I 0V Thread M4
X351 Equipment bus I/O Various 34 core ribbon cable
Grounding bar3) I/O –300 V Busbar
P600 DC link I/O +300 V Busbar

M500 X181 DC link power supply I –300 V 1.5 mm2
P500 X181 DC link power supply I +300 V 1.5 mm2
1U1 X181 Output L1 O 3–ph. 400 V AC/480 V 1.5 mm2
2U1 X181 Input L1 I 3–ph. 400 V AC/480 V 1.5 mm2
1V1 X181 Output L2 O 3–ph. 400 V AC/480 V 1.5 mm2
2V1 X181 Input L2 I 3–ph. 400 V AC/480 V 1.5 mm2
1W1 X181 Output L3 O 3–ph. 400 V AC/480 V 1.5 mm2
2W1 X181 Input L3 I 3–ph. 400 V AC/480 V 1.5 mm2
5.3 X121A Relay contact NC 1–ph. 50 V DC/0.5 A/12 VA 1.5 mm2
5.2 X121A Group signal NO max 1.5 mm2
5.1 X121A I2t/motor temp. I 1–ph. 5 V DC/3 mA min 1.5 mm2
nc X121A 1.5 mm2
74 X121B NC 1–ph. 250 V AC/50 V DC/2 A 1.5 mm2
Relay signal
73.2 X121B I max 1.5 mm2
Ready/
73.1 X121B I 1.5 mm2
Fault
72 X121B NO 1–ph. 5 V DC/3 mA min 1.5 mm2
63 X141A Pulse enable 2) I +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 kΩ 1.5 mm2

9 X141A FR+ 2)4) O +24 V 1.5 mm2
9 X141A FR+ 2)4) O +24 V 1.5 mm2
64 X141A Drive enable 2) I +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 kΩ 1.5 mm2
R X141A RESET 2) I 0/+24 V 1.5 mm2
19 X141A FR–, reference ground, enable si- O 0V 1.5 mm2
gnal voltage
111 X161 Signaling contact I 1–ph. 250 V AC/50 V DC/2 A 1.5 mm2
213 X161 Line contactor NC 1–ph. 17 V DC/3 mA min 1.5 mm2
9 X141B FR+ 2)4) O +24 V 1.5 mm2

112 X141B Setting–up/standard operation 2) I +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 kΩ 1.5 mm2
48 X141B Contactor control 2) I +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 kΩ 1.5 mm2
NS1 X141B Coil contact for line, O +24 V 1.5 mm2
NS2 X141B pre–charging contactor I 0/+24 V 1.5 mm2
15 X141B M O 0V 1.5 mm2
Notes:
1) I = Input, O = Output, NC = NC contact, NO = NO contact (for signal: closed = high, open= low)
2) Terminal 19 is the reference terminal (this is connected inside the module to general reference ground X131 with 10 k) .
3) The grounding bar is used to ground the DC link M busbar through 100 kΩ (this should be preferably inserted; always
insert for non–grounded line supplies).
4) Max. current load, terminal 9 – terminal 19: 1 A

Feed Modules(VS)
1 Short Commissioning, Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/1-3

1.1 Tachometer adaptation for motors with tachometer voltages 3 16.5 V
at rated speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/1-4
1.2 Current controller settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/1-4 VS
2 Speed Controller Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/2-17
2.1 Tachometer calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/2-18
2.2 Setting the proportional gain Kp without adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/2-19
2.3 Setting the integral action time TN without adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/2-20
2.4 Integral action time with adaptation (if required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/2-21
2.5 P gain with adaptation (only user–friendly interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/2-22
2.6 Setting the adaptation range (generally not required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/2-23
2.7 I–component speed controller limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/2-23
2.8 Drift compensation (offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/2-23
3 Supplementary Commissioning Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/3-25
3.1 Setting elements with the standard interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/3-25
3.1.1 Dimensioning the setting elements (Standard interface) . . . . . . . . . . . VS/3-27
3.2 Setting elements with user–friendly interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/3-29
4 Setpoint Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/4-33
5 Commissioning with the MSD Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/5-35
5.1 Pre–settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/5-35
5.1.1 Settings with the control board withdrawn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/5-35
5.1.2 Settings in operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/5-39
5.2 Analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/5-41
6 Free for Expansions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/6-43
7 Powering–Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/7-45
8 Service and Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/8-47
8.1 Test sockets and display elements of the feed modules . . . . . . . . . . . VS/8-47
8.1.1 User–friendly interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/8-47
8.1.2 Standard interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/8-49
8.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/8-50

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition VS–i
10.00
07.94
9 Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/9-51
9.1 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/9-51
9.2 Layout diagram MSD option board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/9-53
9.3 Layout diagram, parameter board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/9-54
9.4 Layout diagram, standard interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS/9-55
9.5 Layout diagram, speed control loop (user–friendly interface) . . . . . . . VS/9-56
9.6 Motor encoder, assignment of X311/X313 (1st/2nd axis) . . . . . . . . . . VS/9-57
VS

VS–ii SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
07.94 Feed Modules (VS)
1 Short Commissioning, Standard Settings
Short Commissioning, Standard Settings 1

The setting elements for the user–friendly interface are provided on the
parameter board, and for the standard interface on the control (refer to
Section 9 Attachment). For a standard commissioning procedure, the
tachometer adaptation, current normalization and current controller gain
parameters should be set.
VS
Commissioning Commissioning is sub–divided into various stages; after the standard settings
stages of the FD have been made, an additional commissioning stage can follow, or the unit can
modules with the be powered–up.
user–friendly and
standard interface
Short commissioning, Sec. 1

standard settings
Speed controller Sec. 2

optimization
Supplementary Sec. 3
functions
Sec. 4
Setpoint interfaces
Commissioning with Sec. 5

MSD option
Powering–up, Sec. 7
Service and diagnostics Sec. 8
Attachment Sec. 9

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition VS/1-3
Feed Modules (VS) 10.00
07.94
1.2 Current controller settings
1.1 Tachometer adaptation for motors with tachometer

voltages ≤ 16.5 V at rated speed
Only involves motors 1FT503–AF71 and 1FT504–AF71
User–friendly and All three contacts of switch S1 (S4 for a 2nd axis standard interface) = ON
standard interface In addition, discrete resistors can be used for calibration, refer to Sections
3.1 - 3.2.
VS
The settings for the current limit and current controller gain Kp(I) can be taken
from the adaptation tables, Table 1-3 up to Table1-9. The values can be deter-
mined according to the formulas if the required feed module/motor combination
cannot be found.
User–friendly Parameter board, switch S2

interface
Standard interface Control board, switch S2 (S5 for a 2nd axis)
Note
The following setting values apply for both control versions unless specific
differences are referred to in individual cases.
Actual value
normalization Imax (set maximum current)
Current limit = 100 [%]
Ilimit (peak power module current)
Table 1-1 Current limit
S2.x – 2 3 2 4 2 3 2 5 2 3 2 4 2 3 2
or 3 4 4 3 5 5 3 5 4 4 3
S5.x 4 5 5 5 4
to ON 5
(%) 100 85 68 61 50 46 41 39 36 34 30 29 26 25 24 23
The current limit must be at least reduced to the peak value permitted for the
particular motor. This may have to be further reduced depending on the
mechanical system.

VS/1-4 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
Current controller
gain Kp(I) Imax LA
Kp(I) <
40
Imax = selected max. current of the axis in A
LD = rotating field inductance of the motor in mH
(refer to the Planning Guide, AC Motors for Feed and Main Spindle
Drives)
Table 1-2 Current controller gain
S2.x – 6 7 6 8 6 7 9 6 7 6 8 7 6
or 7 8 8 9 9 7 9 8 7
S5.x 9 9 8 VS
to ON 9
Kp(I) 0.5 1 2 2.5 4 4.5 5.5 6 6.5 7.5 8 9.5 11 11.5
User–friendly The current controller gain setting range can be additionally increased using
interface R15 on the parameter board.
The following formula is valid for S2.6 to S2.9 closed (ON):
Kp(I) 11.5 1230

R15
Adaptation tables
Table 1-3 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1A00–0HA1 4/8 A power module
Servomotor Current limit 1) Current controller gain

Contacts Contacts
1FT... Mo [Nm]
[ ] Io [A]
[ ] nrated [RPM]
[ ] Imax [[A]] Kp(I)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5034–AK71 0.5 0.93 6000 x o x o 3.68 o x o o 2.0
5036–AK71 0.75 1.4 6000 o x o o 5.44 o x o o 2.0
5042–AF71 0.66 0.75 3000 x o o x 2.72 x x o o 2.5
5042–AK71 0.66 1.2 6000 x x o o 4.88 x x o o 2.5
5044–AF71 1.3 1.5 3000 o x o o 5.44 x x o o 2.5
5044–AK71 1.3 2.3 6000 o o o o 8.0 x o o o 1.0
5046–AF71 2.6 3.0 3000 o o o o 8.0 o x o o 2.0
5062–AC71 2.2 1.3 2000 o x o o 5.44 x x x x 11.5
5062–AF71 2.2 2.0 3000 o o o o 8.0 o x o x 7.5
5062–AG71 2.2 2.7 4000 o o o o 8.0 o o x o 4.0
5062–AK71 2.2 3.9 6000 o o o o 8.0 x o o o 1.0
5064–AC71 4.5 2.7 2000 o o o o 8.0 o x o x 7.5
5066–AC71 6.5 3.9 2000 o o o o 8.0 x o x o 4.5
5070–AC71 3.0 1.8 2000 o o o o 8.0 x x x x 11.5
5070–AF71 3.0 2.6 3000 o o o o 8.0 o x o x 7.5
5070–AG71 3.0 3.6 4000 o o o o 8.0 x o x o 4.5
5071–AC71 4.5 2.9 2000 o o o o 8.0 x x o x 8.0
Definition: o = Contact in the basic OFF setting

x = Contact in the ON setting
1) The specified value is the maximum permissible current of the particular power module/motor combination. It may be
necessary to reduce the specified value depending on the driven mechanical systems.

07.94
Table 1-4 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1A00–0AA1 7.5/15 A power modules

Contacts Contacts
1FT... Mo [Nm]
[ ] Io [A]
[ ] nrated [RPM]
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5034–AK71 0.5 0.93 6000 o x x x 3.68 o x o o 2.0
5036–AK71 0.75 1.4 6000 o o o x 5.44 o x o o 2.0
5042–AF71 0.66 0.75 3000 x x x x 3.45 o o x o 4.0
5042–AK71 0.66 1.2 6000 x x o x 4.5 o x o o 2.0
5044–AF71 1.3 1.5 3000 x x x o 5.85 o o x o 4.0
5044–AK71 1.3 2.3 6000 x x o o 9.15 o x o o 2.0
VS 5046–AF71 2.6 3.0 3000 x o o o 12.7 o o x o 4.0
5046–AK71 2.6 4.7 6000 o o o o 15.0 x o o o 1.0
5062–AC71 2.2 1.3 2000 x o o x 5.1 o x x x 11.0
5062–AF71 2.2 2.0 3000 o o x o 7.5 x o o x 6.5
5062–AG71 2.2 2.7 4000 o x o o 10.2 o x x o 5.5
5062–AK71 2.2 3.9 6000 o o o o 15.0 x x o o 2.5
5064–AC71 4.5 2.7 2000 o x o o 10.2 o o x x 9.5
5064–AF71 4.5 4.1 3000 o o o o 15.0 x o o x 6.5
5064–AG71 4.5 5.5 4000 o o o o 15.0 x x o o 2.5
5066–AC71 6.5 3.9 2000 o o o o 15.0 o o x x 9.5
5066–AF71 6.5 6.0 3000 o o o o 15.0 o o x o 4.0
5070–AC71 3.0 1.8 2000 o o x o 7.5 x x x x 11.5
5070–AF71 3.0 2.6 3000 o x o o 10.2 o o x x 9.5
5070–AG71 3.0 3.6 4000 o o o o 15.0 x x o x 8.0
5070–AK71 3.0 5.3 6000 o o o o 15.0 o o x o 4.0
5071–AC71 4.5 2.9 2000 x o o o 12.7 x x x x 11.5
5071–AF71 4.5 4.3 3000 o o o o 15.0 x o o x 6.5
5071–AG71 4.5 5.2 4000 o o o o 15.0 x o x o 4.5
5072–AC71 10.0 6.1 2000 o o o o 15.0 x x o x 8.0
5073–AC71 7.0 4.3 2000 o o o o 15.0 o o x x 9.5
5073–AF71 7.0 6.4 3000 o o o o 15.0 o o x o 4.0
5100–AC71 10.0 6.2 2000 o o o o 15.0 o x x o 5.5


10.00
Table 1-5 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1A00–0BA1 12.5/25 A power modules

Contacts Contacts
1FT... Mo [Nm]
[ ] Io [A]
[ ] nrated [RPM]
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5036–AK71 0.75 1.4 6000 x x x x 5.75 o x o o 2.0
5044–AF71 1.3 1.5 3000 o x x x 6.0 o o x o 4.0
5044–AK71 1.3 2.3 6000 o o o x 9.0 o x o o 2.0
5046–AF71 2.6 3.0 3000 o o x o 12.5 o o x o 4.0
5046–AK71 2.6 4.7 6000 o x o o 17.0 o x o o 2.0
5062–AC71 2.2 1.3 2000 x x x x 5.75 x x x x 11.5
5062–AF71 2.2 2.0 3000 x o o x 8.5 x x o x 8.0 VS
5062–AG71 2.2 2.7 4000 x o x o 10.25 o x x o 5.5
5062–AK71 2.2 3.9 6000 x x o o 15.75 x x o o 2.5
5064–AC71 4.5 2.7 2000 x o x o 10.25 x x x x 11.5
5064–AF71 4.5 4.1 3000 o x o o 17.0 x o o x 6.5
5064–AG71 4.5 5.5 4000 o o o o 25.0 o x x o 5.5
5064–AK71 4.5 8.0 6000 o o o o 25.0 x x o o 2.5
5066–AC71 6.5 3.9 2000 o x o o 17.0 o o x x 9.5
5066–AF71 6.5 6.0 3000 o o o o 25.0 x o o x 6.5
5066–AG71 6.5 7.9 4000 o o o o 25.0 x x o o 2.5
5066–AK71 6.5 11.6 6000 o o o o 25.0 o x o o 2.0
5070–AC71 3.0 1.8 2000 o x o x 7.5 x x x x 11.5
5070–AF71 3.0 2.6 3000 x o x o 11.5 o x x x 11.0
5070–AG71 3.0 3.6 4000 o x o o 17.0 o o x x 9.5
5070–AK71 3.0 5.3 6000 o o o o 25.0 x o o x 6.5
5071–AC71 4.5 2.9 2000 o o x o 12.5 x x x x 11.5
5071–AF71 4.5 4.3 3000 o x o o 17.0 x x o x 8.0
5071–AG71 4.5 5.2 4000 o o o o 25.0 x x o x 8.0
5071–AK71 4.5 7.9 6000 o o o o 25.0 x x o o 2.5
5072–AC71 10.0 6.1 2000 o o o o 25.0 x x x x 11.5
5072–AF71 10.0 9.1 3000 o o o o 25.0 o o o x 6.0
5072–AG71 10.0 12.0 4000 o o o o 25.0 x x o o 2.5
5073–AC71 7.0 4.3 2000 o x o o 17.0 o o x x 9.5
5073–AF71 7.0 6.4 3000 o o o o 25.0 x o o x 6.5
5073–AG71 7.0 8.1 4000 o o o o 25.0 x o x o 4.5
5073–AK71 7.0 12.5 6000 o o o o 25.0 x o o o 1.0
5074–AC71 14.0 8.5 2000 o o o o 25.0 x x o x 8.0
5076–AC71 18.0 11.5 2000 o o o o 25.0 o x x o 5.5
5100–AC71 10.0 6.2 2000 o o o o 25.0 o o x x 9.5
5100–AF71 10.0 9.2 3000 o o o o 25.0 o o x o 4.0
5100–AG71 10.0 12.5 4000 o o o o 25.0 x x o o 2.5
5101–AC71 15.0 9.4 2000 o o o o 25.0 o x x o 5.5
5102–AA71 27.0 9.9 1200 o o o o 25.0 x x o x 8.0
5103–AC71 19.0 12.0 2000 o o o o 25.0 o o x o 4.0


07.94
Table 1-6 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1A00–0CA1 25/50 A power modules

Contacts Contacts
1FT... Mo [Nm]
[ ] Io [A]
[ ] nrated [RPM]
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5044–AK71 1.3 2.3 6000 o o x x 13.0 x x o o 2.5
5046–AF71 2.6 3.0 3000 o x o x 15.0 o o x o 4.0
5046–AK71 2.6 4.7 6000 o o x o 25.0 x x o o 2.5
5062–AG71 2.2 2.7 4000 x o x x 13.0 x o o x 6.5
5062–AK71 2.2 3.9 6000 o x x o 19.5 x o x o 4.5
5064–AC71 4.5 2.7 2000 o o x x 13.0 x x x x 11.5
VS 5064–AF71 4.5 4.1 3000 x x x o 19.5 x x o x 8.0
5064–AG71 4.5 5.5 4000 o o x o 25.0 o x x o 5.5
5064–AK71 4.5 8.0 6000 o x o o 34.0 x x o o 2.5
5066–AC71 6.5 3.9 2000 x x x o 19.5 x x x x 11.5
5066–AF71 6.5 6.0 3000 x x o o 30.5 x x o x 8.0
5066–AG71 6.5 7.9 4000 o x o o 34.0 x o x o 4.5
5066–AK71 6.5 11.6 6000 o o o o 50.0 o o x o 4.0
5070–AF71 3.0 2.6 3000 o x x x 12.0 x x x x 11.5
5070–AG71 3.0 3.6 4000 x o o x 17.0 o o x x 9.5
5070–AK71 3.0 5.3 6000 o o x o 25.0 x o o x 6.5
5071–AC71 4.5 2.9 2000 o o x x 13.0 x x x x 11.5
5071–AF71 4.5 4.3 3000 o x x o 20.5 o o x x 9.5
5071–AG71 4.5 5.2 4000 o o x o 25.0 x x o x 8.0
5071–AK71 4.5 7.9 6000 o x o o 34.0 o o x o 4.0
5072–AC71 10.0 6.1 2000 o o x o 25.0 x x x x 11.5
5072–AF71 10.0 9.1 3000 x o o o 42.5 o o x x 9.5
5072–AG71 10.0 12.0 4000 o o o o 50.0 x o o x 6.5
5072–AK71 10.0 17.5 6000 o o o o 50.0 x x o o 2.5
5073–AC71 7.0 4.3 2000 o x x o 20.5 x x x x 11.5
5073–AF71 7.0 6.4 3000 x x o o 30.5 x x o x 8.0
5073–AG71 7.0 8.1 4000 x o o o 42.5 o x o x 7.5
5073–AK71 7.0 12.5 6000 o o o o 50.0 x x o o 2.5
5074–AC71 14.0 8.5 2000 x o o o 42.5 x x x x 11.5
5074–AF71 14.0 13.0 3000 o o o o 50.0 x o o x 6.5
5074–AG71 14.0 16.5 4000 o o o o 50.0 x o x o 4.5
5074–AK71 14.0 25.0 6000 o o o o 50.0 x o o o 1.0
5076–AC71 18.0 11.5 2000 o o o o 50.0 o x x x 11.0
5076–AF71 18.0 16.5 3000 o o o o 50.0 x o x o 4.5
5076–AG71 18.0 21.5 4000 o o o o 50.0 x x o o 2.5
5100–AC71 10.0 6.2 2000 x x o o 30.5 x x x x 11.5
5100–AF71 10.0 9.2 3000 x o o o 42.5 x o o x 6.5
5100–AG71 10.0 12.5 4000 o o o o 50.0 x o x o 4.5
5100–AK71 10.0 18.0 6000 o o o o 50.0 x x o o 2.5
5101–AC71 15.0 9.4 2000 x o o o 42.5 o o x x 9.5
5101–AF71 15.0 14.5 3000 o o o o 50.0 x o x o 4.5
5101–AG71 15.0 17.5 4000 o o o o 50.0 x x o o 2.5
5102–AA71 27.0 9.9 1200 x o o o 42.5 x x x x 11.5
5102–AC71 27.0 16.5 2000 o o o o 50.0 x o o x 6.5
5102–AF71 27.0 25.0 3000 o o o o 50.0 x x o o 2.5


10.00
Table 1-6 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1AA00–0CA1 25/50 A power modules, continued

Contacts Contacts
1FT... Mo [Nm]
[ ] Io [A]
[ ] nrated [RPM]
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5103–AC71 19.0 12.0 2000 o o o o 50.0 x x o o 8.0
5103–AF71 19.0 17.5 3000 o o o o 50.0 x x o o 2.5
5103–AG71 19.0 23.0 4000 o o o o 50.0 o x o x 2.0
5104–AA71 37.0 14.0 1200 o o o o 50.0 x x x x 11.5
5104–AC71 37.0 22.5 2000 o o o o 50.0 o o x o 4.0
5106–AA71 45.0 17.0 1200 o o o o 50.0 x x o x 8.0
5108–AA71 55.0 20.5 1200 o o o o 50.0 x o o x 6.5 VS
5132–AA71 60.0 22.5 1200 o o o o 50.0 o x o x 7.5


07.94
Table 1-7 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1AA00–0DA1 40/80 A power modules

Contacts Contacts
1FT Mo [Nm]
[ ] Io [A]
[ ] nrated [RPM]
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4101–SK71 20.0 33.0 6000 o o o o 80.0 o x o o 2.0
4101–SN71 20.0 39.0 8000 o o o o 80.0 x o o o 1.0
4102–SG71 33.0 35.0 4000 o o o o 80.0 o o x o 4.0
5046–AK71 2.6 4.7 6000 o x o x 24.0 x x o o 2.5
5062–AK71 2.2 3.9 6000 o x x x 19.2 o o x o 4.0
5064–AF71 4.5 4.1 3000 o x x x 19.2 x x o x 8.0
5064–AG71 4.5 5.5 4000 o o o x 28.8 x o o x 6.5
5064–AK71 4.5 8.0 6000 o o x o 40.0 o o x o 4.0
5066–AC71 6.5 3.9 2000 o x x x 19.2 x x x x 11.5
5066–AF71 6.5 6.0 3000 o o o x 28.2 x x o x 8.0
5066–AG71 6.5 7.9 4000 o o x o 40.0 o o o x 6.0
5066–AK71 6.5 11.6 6000 o x o o 54.4 x o x o 4.5
5070–AK71 3.0 5.3 6000 o x o x 24.0 x o o x 6.5
5071–AF71 4.5 4.3 3000 o o x x 20.8 o o x x 9.5
5071–AG71 4.5 5.2 4000 x o o x 27.2 x x o x 8.0
5071–AK71 4.5 7.9 6000 o o x o 40.0 x o x o 4.5
5072–AC71 10.0 6.1 2000 o o o x 28.8 x x x x 11.5
5072–AF71 10.0 9.1 3000 o o x o 40.0 o o x x 9.5
5072–AG71 10.0 12.0 4000 o x o o 54.4 o x o x 7.5
5072–AK71 10.0 17.5 6000 o o o o 80.0 o x x o 5.5
5073–AC71 7.0 4.3 2000 o o x x 20.8 x x x x 11.5
5073–AF71 7.0 6.4 3000 x x x o 31.2 x x o x 8.0
5073–AG71 7.0 8.1 4000 o o x o 40.0 x o o x 6.5
5073–AK71 7.0 12.5 6000 o x o o 54.4 x x o o 2.5
5074–AC71 14.0 8.5 2000 o o x o 40.0 x x x x 11.5
5074–AF71 14.0 13.0 3000 o x o o 54.4 o x o x 7.5
5074–AG71 14.0 16.5 4000 o o o o 80.0 x o o x 6.5
5074–AK71 14.0 25.0 6000 o o o o 80.0 x x o o 2.5
5074–SG71 16.0 19.0 4000 o o o o 80.0 o o o x 6.0
5074–SK71 16.0 28.0 6000 o o o o 80.0 x x o o 2.5
5076–AC71 18.0 11.5 2000 x x o o 48.8 o x x x 11.0
5076–AF71 18.0 16.5 3000 x o o o 68.0 x o o x 6.5
5076–AG71 18.0 21.5 4000 o o o o 80.0 x o x o 4.5
5076–AK71 18.0 32.0 6000 o o o o 80.0 o x o o 2.0
5076–SG71 20.5 24.5 4000 o o o o 80.0 o o x o 4.0
5100–AC71 10.0 6.2 2000 x x x o 31.2 x x x x 11.5
5100–AF71 10.0 9.2 3000 o o x o 40.0 x o o x 6.5
5100–AG71 10.0 12.5 4000 o x o o 54.4 o x x o 5.5
5100–AK71 10.0 18.0 6000 o o o o 80.0 o o x o 4.0
5101–AC71 15.0 9.4 2000 o o x o 40.0 x x o x 8.0
5101–AF71 15.0 14.5 3000 o x o o 54.4 o x x o 5.5
5101–AG71 15.0 17.5 4000 o o o o 80.0 x o x o 4.5
5101–AK71 15.0 26.5 6000 o o o o 80.0 o x o o 2.0

1) he specified value is the maximum permissible current of the particular power module/motor combination. It may be

10.00
Table 1-7 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1AA00–0DA1 40/80 A power modules, continued

Contacts Contacts
1FT Mo [Nm]
[ ] Io [A]
[ ] nrated [RPM]
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5102–AA71 27.0 9.9 1200 o o x o 40.0 x x x x 11.5
5102–AC71 27.0 16.5 2000 o o o o 80.0 o o x x 9.5
5102–AF71 27.0 25.0 3000 o o o o 80.0 o o x o 4.0
5102–AG71 27.0 31.5 4000 o o o o 80.0 x x o o 2.5
5103–AC71 19.0 12.0 2000 o x o o 54.4 x x o x 8.0
5103–AF71 19.0 17.5 3000 o o o o 80.0 o o o x 6.0
5103–AG71 19.0 23.0 4000 o o o o 80.0 x x o o 2.5
5104–AA71 37.0 14.0 1200 o x o o 54.4 x x x x 11.5
VS
5104–AC71 37.0 22.5 2000 o o o o 80.0 x o o x 6.5
5104–AF71 37.0 34.0 3000 o o o o 80.0 x x o o 2.5
5106–AA71 45.0 17.0 1200 o o o o 80.0 x x x x 11.5
5106–AC71 45.0 26.8 2000 o o o o 80.0 o x x o 5.5
5108–AA71 55.0 20.5 1200 o o o o 80.0 x x x x 11.5
5108–AC71 55.0 32.5 2000 o o o o 80.0 x o x o 4.5
5132–AA71 60.0 22.5 1200 o o o o 80.0 x x x x 11.5
5132–AC71 60.0 35.5 2000 o o o o 80.0 x o x o 4.5
5132–SA71 70.0 26.0 1200 o o o o 80.0 x x x x 11.5
5134–AA71 75.0 28.0 1200 o o o o 80.0 o o x x 9.5
5134–SA71 90.0 34.0 1200 o o o o 80.0 o o x x 9.5
5136–AA71 85.0 31.5 1200 o o o o 80.0 o x o x 7.5
5138–AA71 105.0 39.0 1200 o o o o 80.0 o o o x 6.0


07.94
Table 1-8 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1AA00–0EA1 80/160 A power modules

Contacts Contacts
1FT Mo [Nm]
[ ] Io [A]
[ ] nrated [RPM]
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4101–SK71 20.0 33.0 6000 o o o o 160.0 x o x o 4.5
4101–SN71 20.0 39.0 8000 o o o o 160.0 x x o o 2.5
4102–SG71 33.0 35.0 4000 o o o o 160.0 x x o x 8.0
4102–SK71 33.0 47.0 6000 o o o o 160.0 x o x o 4.5
4104–SG71 45.0 46.0 4000 o o o o 160.0 o x x o 5.5
4104–SK71 45.0 60.0 6000 o o o o 160.0 x x o o 2.5
VS 4106–SG71 59.0 56.0 4000 o o o o 160.0 x o x o 4.5
5064–AK71 4.5 8.0 6000 o o x x 41.6 x o x o 4.5
5066–AG71 6.5 7.9 4000 o x x x 38.4 o o o x 6.0
5066–AK71 6.5 11.6 6000 o o o x 57.6 x o x o 4.5
5071–AK71 4.5 7.9 6000 o x x x 38.4 x o x o 4.5
5072–AF71 10.0 9.1 3000 o o x x 41.6 o o x x 9.5
5072–AG71 10.0 12.0 4000 o o o x 57.6 x x o x 8.0
5072–AK71 10.0 17.5 6000 o o x o 80.0 o x x o 5.5
5073–AG71 7.0 8.1 4000 o o x x 41.6 x o o x 6.5
5073–AK71 7.0 12.5 6000 o x x o 65.5 o o x o 4.0
5074–AC71 14.0 8.5 2000 o o x x 41.6 x x x x 11.5
5074–AF71 14.0 13.0 3000 o x x o 65.6 x x o x 8.0
5074–AG71 14.0 16.5 4000 o o x o 80.0 x o o x 6.5
5074–AK71 14.0 25.0 6000 x x o o 97.6 x x o o 2.5
5074–SG71 16.0 19.0 4000 o o x o 80.0 o x x o 5.5
5074–SK71 16.0 28.0 6000 x x o o 97.0 x x o o 2.5
5076–AC71 18.0 11.5 2000 o x o x 48.0 o o x x 9.5
5076–AF71 18.0 16.5 3000 x o x o 73.6 o x o x 7.5
5076–AG71 18.0 21.5 4000 o x o o 108.8 x o o x 6.5
5076–AK71 18.0 32.0 6000 o o o o 160.0 o o x o 4.0
5076–SG71 20.5 24.5 4000 o x o o 108.8 o x x o 5.5
5076–SK71 20.5 36.0 6000 o o o o 160.0 o o x o 4.0
5100–AF71 10.0 9.2 3000 x x o x 46.4 x x o x 8.0
5100–AG71 10.0 12.5 4000 x x x o 62.4 x o o x 6.5
5100–AK71 10.0 18.0 6000 o o x o 80.0 o o x o 4.0
5101–AC71 15.0 9.4 2000 o o x x 41.6 o o x x 9.5
5101–AF71 15.0 14.5 3000 o x x o 65.6 x o o x 6.5
5101–AG71 15.0 17.5 4000 o o x o 80.0 x o x o 4.5
5101–AK71 15.0 26.5 6000 x o o o 136.0 o o x o 4.0
5102–AA71 27.0 9.9 1200 x x o x 46.4 x x x x 11.5
5102–AC71 27.0 16.5 2000 o o x o 80.0 o o x x 9.5
5102–AF71 27.0 25.0 3000 o x o o 108.8 o x x o 5.5
5102–AG71 27.0 31.5 4000 o o o o 160.0 o x x o 5.5
5102–SF71 34.0 31.5 3000 o x o o 108.8 x o x o 4.5
5102–SG71 34.0 39.5 4000 o o o o 160.0 x o x o 4.5
5103–AC71 19.0 12.0 2000 o o o x 57.6 x x o x 8.0
5103–AF71 19.0 17.5 3000 o o x o 80.0 o o o x 6.0
5103–AG71 19.0 23.0 4000 o x o o 108.8 x o x o 4.5


10.00
Table 1-8 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1AA00–0EA1 80/160 A power modules, continued

Contacts Contacts
1FT Mo [Nm]
[ ] Io [A]
[ ] nrated [RPM]
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5104–AA71 37.0 14.0 1200 x x x o 62.4 x x x x 11.5
5104–AC71 37.0 22.5 2000 o x o o 108.8 o o x x 9.5
5104–AF71 37.0 34.0 3000 o o o o 160.0 x o o x 6.5
5104–SF71 48.0 44.0 3000 o o o o 160.0 o x x o 5.5
5106–AA71 45.0 17.0 1200 o o x o 80.0 x x x x 11.5
5106–AC71 45.0 26.8 2000 o x o o 108.0 o x o x 7.5
5106–AF71 45.0 42.5 3000 o o o o 160.0 x o x o 4.5
5106–SF71 57.0 54.0 3000 o o o o 160.0 o o x o 4.0 VS
5108–AA71 55.0 20.5 1200 o o x o 80.0 x x x x 11.5
5108–AC71 55.0 32.5 2000 o o o o 160.0 o o x x 9.5
5108–AF71 55.0 50.5 3000 o o o o 160.0 o o x o 4.0
5132–AA71 60.0 22.5 1200 o x o o 108.8 x x x x 11.5
5132–AC71 60.0 35.5 2000 o o o o 160.0 x x o x 8.0
5132–AF71 60.0 47.5 3000 o o o o 160.0 o x x o 5.5
5132–SA71 70.0 26.0 1200 o x o o 108.8 x x x x 11.5
5132–SC71 70.0 41.0 2000 o o o o 160.0 x x o x 8.0
5132–SF71 70.0 55.5 3000 o o o o 160.0 x x x o 5.5
5134–AA71 75.0 28.0 1200 o x o o 108.8 x x x x 11.5
5134–AC71 75.0 47.0 2000 o o o o 160.0 x o o o 6.5
5134–SA71 90.0 34.0 1200 o x o o 108.8 x x x x 11.5
5134–SC71 90.0 56.0 2000 o o o o 160.0 x o o x 6.5
5136–AA71 85.0 31.5 1200 x o o o 136.0 x x x x 11.5
5136–AC71 85.0 47.5 2000 o o o o 160.0 x o o x 6.5
5136–SA71 110.0 41.0 1200 x o o o 136.0 x x x x 11.5
5136–SC71 110.0 61.5 2000 o o o o 160.0 x o o o 6.5
5138–AA71 105.0 39.0 1200 o o o o 160.0 x x x x 11.5
5138–SA71 140.0 52.0 1200 o o o o 160.0 x x x x 11.5


07.94
Table 1-9 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1AA00–0FA1 100/200 A power modules

Contacts Contacts
1FT Mo [Nm]
[ ] Io [A]
[ ] nrated [RPM]
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4101–SK71 20.0 33.0 6000 o x o o 136.0 x x o o 2.5
4101–SN71 20.0 39.0 8000 x o o o 170.0 x x o o 2.0
4102–SG71 33.0 35.0 4000 x o o o 170.0 o o x x 9.5
4102–SK71 33.0 47.0 6000 o o o o 200.0 o x x o 5.5
4104–SG71 45.0 46.0 4000 o o o o 200.0 x o o x 6.5
4104–SK71 45.0 60.0 6000 o o o o 200.0 x x o o 2.5
VS 4106–SG71 59.0 56.0 4000 o o o o 200.0 o x x o 5.5
5066–AK71 6.5 11.6 6000 o x o x 60.0 x o x o 4.5
5072–AG71 10.0 12.0 4000 o x o x 60.0 x x o x 8.0
5072–AK71 10.0 17.5 6000 o x x o 82.0 o x x o 5.5
5073–AK71 7.0 12.5 6000 o x o x 60.0 o o x o 4.0
5074–AF71 14.0 13.0 3000 o x o x 60.0 x x o x 8.0
5074–AG71 14.0 16.5 4000 o x x o 82.0 x o o x 6.5
5074–AK71 14.0 25.0 6000 o o x o 100.0 x x o o 2.5
5074–SG71 16.0 19.0 4000 o x x o 82.0 o o o x 6.0
5074–SK71 16.0 28.0 6000 o o x o 100.0 x x o o 2.5
5076–AC71 18.0 11.5 2000 o o x x 52.0 x x x x 11.5
5076–AF71 18.0 16.5 3000 x x x o 78.0 x x o x 8.0
5076–AG71 18.0 21.5 4000 o o x o 100.0 o x x o 5.5
5076–AK71 18.0 32.0 6000 o x o o 136.0 x x o o 2.5
5076–SG71 20.5 24.5 4000 o o x o 100.0 x o x o 4.5
5076–SK71 20.5 36.0 6000 o x o o 136.0 x x o o 2.5
5100–AF71 10.0 9.2 3000 x x x x 46.0 x x o x 8.0
5100–AG71 10.0 12.5 4000 o x o x 60.0 o o o x 6.0
5100–AK71 10.0 18.0 6000 x o x o 92.0 x o x o 4.5
5101–AC71 15.0 9.4 2000 x x x x 46.0 o o x x 9.5
5101–AF71 15.0 14.5 3000 o x o x 60.0 o o o x 6.0
5101–AG71 15.0 17.5 4000 x o x o 92.0 o o o x 6.0
5101–AK71 15.0 26.5 6000 o x o o 136.0 o o x o 4.0
5102–AA71 27.0 9.9 1200 x x x x 46.0 x x x x 11.5
5102–AC71 27.0 16.5 2000 x x x o 78.0 o o x x 9.5
5102–AF71 27.0 25.0 3000 o o x o 100.0 x o x o 4.5
5102–AG71 27.0 31.5 4000 o x o o 136.0 x o x o 4.5
5102–SF71 34.0 31.5 3000 x x o o 122.0 o x x o 5.5
5102–SG71 34.0 39.5 4000 o x o o 136.0 o o x o 4.0
5103–AC71 19.0 12.0 2000 o x o x 60.0 o o x x 9.5
5103–AF71 19.0 17.5 3000 x o x o 92.0 x o o x 6.5
5103–AG71 19.0 23.0 4000 x x o o 122.0 o x x o 5.5
5104–AA71 37.0 14.0 1200 o x o x 60.0 x x x x 11.5
5104–AC71 37.0 22.5 2000 o o x o 100.0 x x o x 8.0
5104–AF71 37.0 34.0 3000 o x o o 136.0 o x x o 5.5
5104–SF71 48.0 44.0 3000 o x o o 136.0 x o x o 4.5
5106–AA71 45.0 17.0 1200 x x x o 78.0 x x x x 11.5
5106–AC71 45.0 26.8 2000 x x o o 122.0 x x o x 8.0
5106–AF71 45.0 42.5 3000 o o o o 200.0 o x x o 5.5
5106–SF71 57.0 54.0 3000 o o o o 200.0 x o x o 4.5


10.00
Table 1-9 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1AA00–0FA1 100/200 A power modules, continued

Contacts Contacts
1FT Mo [Nm]
[ ] Io [A]
[ ] nrated [RPM]
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5108–AA71 55.0 20.5 1200 x o x o 92.0 x x x x 11.5
5108–AC71 55.0 32.5 2000 o x o o 136.0 x x o x 8.0
5108–AF71 55.0 50.5 3000 o o o o 200.0 x o x o 4.5
5132–AA71 60.0 22.5 1200 o o x o 100.0 x x x x 11.5
5132–AC71 60.0 35.5 2000 x o o o 170.0 o o x x 9.5
5132–AF71 60.0 47.5 3000 o o o o 200.0 x o o x 6.5
5132–SA71 70.0 26.0 1200 o o x o 100.0 x x x x 11.5
5132–SC71 70.0 41.0 2000 x o o o 170.0 o o x x 9.5 VS
5132–SF71 70.0 55.5 3000 o o o o 200.0 x o o x 6.5
5134–AA71 75.0 28.0 1200 x x o o 122.0 x x x x 11.5
5134–AC71 75.0 47.0 2000 o o o o 200.0 x x o x 8.0
5134–SA71 90.0 34.0 1200 x x o o 122.0 x x x x 11.5
5134–SC71 90.0 56.0 2000 o o o o 200.0 x x o x 8.0
5136–AA71 85.0 31.5 1200 o x o o 136.0 x x x x 11.5
5136–AC71 85.0 47.5 2000 o o o o 200.0 x x o x 8.0
5136–SA71 110.0 41.0 1200 o x o o 136.0 x x x x 11.5
5136–SC71 110.0 61.5 2000 o o o o 200.0 x x o x 8.0
5138–AA71 105.0 39.0 1200 x o o o 170.0 x x x x 11.5
5138–SA71 140.0 52.0 1200 x o o o 170.0 x x x x 11.5


07.94
Space for notes
VS

2 Speed Controller Optimization
Speed Controller Optimization 2

The additional smoothing functions in the controller loop (to dampen mechanical
resonance points) are described in Section 3. Proceed as follows when
optimizing the speed:
1. Tachometer calibration VS
2. Gain Kp
3. Integral action time TN
4. Adaptation TN (if necessary)
5. I component limiting (if necessary)
6. Drif compensation (offset)
The unit must be powered–up to optimize the speed controller, regarding
Sections 2.1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.8. Therefore observe Section 7 “Powering–up”.
The potentiometer scaling is defined as follows (in the setting tables):
8 99/ The setting shown in the diagram

7 8 10 corresponds to 7 scale sections.
7
6 10
6
55
44 0
3
3 2 0/1
2 1

07.94
2.1 Tachometer calibration

For motors with a tachometer voltage ≤ 16.5 V, proceed as described in
Section 1.1.
Potentiometer Setting range

0.7 nrated nact N 2.2 nrated
T
VS nact N/ nact 2.2
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
0.8
0.6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Tachometer potentiometer (scaling)
Fig. 2-1 Tachometer calibration
Extended setting range using R3 and R10 (only for the user–friendly
interface).
Function Component Value

nact N > 0.7 nrated Increase R3 0 Ω (as supplied)
nact N < 2.2 nrated Insert R10 Open–circuit (as supplied)

10.00
2.2 Setting the proportional gain Kp without adaptation
2.2 Setting the proportional gain Kp without adaptation

The proportional gain Kp of the speed controller can be set using potentiometer
Kp. The range can be extended, if required using a fixed resistor R50 (only
user–friendly interface; R50 = 68 kΩ (when supplied)). The gain, set using the
Kp potentiometer is additionally influenced by the setting of the TN potentio-
meter.
Kp
170 Potentio-
160
meter TN
VS
140 Right–
hand end
120 stop
100
Center
80
Left–hand
60 end stop
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Setting, potentiometer Kp
Fig. 2-2 Proportional gain Kp as a function of the Kp potentiometer and TN potent.

07.94
2.3 Setting the integral action time TN without adaptation
2.3 Setting the integral action time TN without adaptation

Speed controller integral action time is set using potentiometer TN, the range
can be extended, when required, using C2 (only for the user–friendly interface).
TN in ms
45
40
30
VS 20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Setting, potentiometer TN
Fig. 2-3 Integral action time TN as a function of potentiometer TN

10.00
2.4 Integral action time with adaptation (if required)
2.4 Integral action time with adaptation (if required)

Resistor R34 (only for the user–friendly interface) or switch S3.5 (S6.5 for the
2nd axis) for the standard interface is used to activate and pre–set the adap-
tation.
R34 = open Adaptation inactive (as supplied)

R34 = inserted Adaptation operates according to the following
diagrams
VS
TN
R34 + pot. ADAPT
Pot. TN
TNadapt
nx2 nx1 nx
Adaptation Transition Adaptation
fully range ineffective
effective
Fig. 2-4 Adaptation of the integral action time
nx = nset + nact
TNadapt/TN
0.9
R34 = 10 k
0.7 R34 = 0
or standard
interface
0.5
0.3
0.1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Potentiometer setting ADAPT
Fig. 2-5 Inter–dependency of adaptation TN

07.94
2.5 P gain with adaptation (only user–friendly interface)
2.5 P gain with adaptation (only user–friendly interface)
Important
! Offsets can occur in the transition range.
R38 is used to activate and pre–set adaptation (if required):
R38 = open Adaptation inactive (as supplied)

R38 = inserted Adaptation operates according to the following
VS diagrams
Kp
Kpadapt
R38
Kp
R50 + pot. Kp
nx2 nx1 nx
Adaptation Transition Adaptation
fully range ineffective
effective
Fig. 2-6 Proportional gain Kp as a function of the speed
nx = nset + nist
Kpadapt/Kp
35
25
15
5
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
Fixed resistor R38 in
Fig. 2-7 Adaptation Kp as a function of R38 in the “adaptation fully effective” range

10.00
2.8 Drift compensation (offset)
2.6 Setting the adaptation range (generally not required)

The adaptation range can be set via the following resistors:
R40 User–friendly interface
R543 Standard interface 1st axis (Order No.[MLFB[ 6SN1118–0AD11–0AA1)
R544 Standard interface 2nd axis (Order No.[MLFB] 6SN1118–0AE11–0AA1)
R = open Max. adaptation range (as supplied)

R = inserted Adaptation, reduced acc. to the following diagram
R40 in k
VS
150
130
Adap- Transition range Adapta-
110
tation tion in-
fully effec-
90 effective
tive
70
50
30
10
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
nx in mV
Fig. 2-8 Adaptation range
nx = nset + nact
2.7 I–component speed controller limiting

R52 User–friendly interface
R547 Standard interface, 1st axis (from Order No. 6SN1118–0AD11–0AA1)
R550 Standard interface, 2nd axis (from Order No. 6SN1118–0AE11–0AA1)
R = open–circuit I–component fully effective (as supplied)

R = 0 Ω I–component, not effective
As limit for the speed controller I component, between 100 kΩ and 2 MΩ can be
set for R52, e.g. for slip–stick effects.

This is calibrated using a potentiometer for nset = 0 (terminal 56 and terminal14
short–circuited)
Potentiometer drift Control range 30 mV

07.94
Space for notes
VS

12.94
04.97
3.1 Setting elements with the standard interface
Supplementary Commissioning Functions 3

VS
Setting elements, switches S2 and S3 or S5 and S6 for the 2nd axis
Contacts, S2/S5 OFF ON

10 x DIL
1 Motor, clockwise direction of Motor, counter–clockwise di-
rotation for a positive speed set- rection rotation for a positive
point (motor shaft drive end) at speed setpoint (motor shaft drive
terminal 56/14 end) at terminal 56/14
2...5 Current normalization Current normalization
(Imax=100 %)1) (Imax=23 %)
6...9 Current controller gain (0.5)1) Current controller gain (11.5)
10 Closed–loop speed controlled Closed–loop current controlled
operation1) operation
Contacts S3/S6 Function OFF ON

8 x DIL
1 Speed setpt. smoothing W/out smoothing1) with T= 2.2 ms
2 Speed actual value W/out smoothing1) with T= 280 µs
smoothing
3 Speed contr. smoothing W/out smoothing1) with T= 370 µs
4 Current setpt. smoothing W/out smoothing1) with T= 110 µs
5 Speed contr. adaptation OFF 1) ON T
6 Ready/fault2) Ready signal1) Fault signal
7 Master/slave3)4) Master1) Slave4)
8 Current–contr. operation With I component W/out I
component1)
1) Status as supplied
2) Important!
This acts on the BB relay of the NE/monitoring module. If the user–friendly and standard interface are operated
together, or the standard interface alone, then if the enable is not present or there is a fault of the standard axes, the
BB relay of the NE module drops–out.
3) Function only for a 2–axis version
4) Slave axis must be operated in the closed–loop current controlled mode with enabled I component.

07.94
The following supplementary functions can be set by mounting wired compo-

nents on the basic board (from Order No.[MLFB] 6SN1118–0AD11–0AA1 (1
axis) or from Order No.[MLFB] 6SN1118–0AE11–0AA1 (2 axes).
Function BKZ axis1 BKZ axis 2 Value range

Smoothing, speed controller C231 C235 0 ... 100nF
Smoothing, nset C232 C236 0 ... 2.2 F
Smoothing, nact C233 C237 0 ... 100nF
Smoothing Iset C234 C238 0 ... 100nF
Timer stage ”speed controller at its end- C239 C240 0 ... 2.2 F
stop”
VS
Tachometer adaptation R539, R540, R541 R536, R537. R538 0 ... k, 0.1%, 25ppm/K
Clock cycle frequency, PBM R542 R542 62 k ...
Adaptation range R543 R544 0 ... k
Speed setpoint adaptation R545 R546 0 ... k
Limit, speed controller I–component R547 R550 100 k ... 2 M
Electr. weight equalization pos./neg. R548/R549 R551/R552 20 k ...
Response threshold I2t monitoring R553 R554 0 ... k
Axial metal film resistors, packaging type 0204 (RM 7.62 mm) or radial MKT
capacitors (RM 5.08 mm) should be mounted at the mounting locations provi-
ded. When adapting the tachometer, it should be noted that the (3) resistors
have a relative accuracy of 0.1% with respect to one another and a Tk of
< 25 ppm/K.
Note The board can be damaged if incorrect materials are used.
Important Only trained personnel may carry–out any soldering work on the board (maintai-
ning the ESD Guidelines).

04.97
3.1.1 Dimensioning the setting elements (Standard interface)

a) Smoothing functions
Speed controller: T=C231(C235) 78 k
nset: T=C232(C236) 10 k
nact: T=C233(C236) 10 k (dep. on the tacho. pot. setting)
Iset: T=C234(C238) 5 k
b) Timer, ”speed controller at its endstop”
The monitoring time is, as standard 230 ms, and when required can be increa-
sed by mounting C239 (C240). In this case, the following relationship exists:
TZst= 1.15 + ( C239 (C240)
F
) 200 ms
c) Tachometer adaptation
VS
The following equivalent circuit diagram is valid for the individual tachometer
voltages:
The tachometer voltage VTach is generally 40 V at
rated speed, which provides a voltage VTachX of 10
V. Different values can be used corresponding to
VTach R this criteria for a rated motor speed which deviates
x
significantly from the useful speed. The following
formula applies:
VTachX
4 k 20 k
8 k
Rx=
[5k (VTach
VTachX ) –7.5 k]
1– 1 4 (V
Tach
)
VTachX
d) Clock cycle frequency PBM
If noise problems develop (a motor which whistles), the clock cycle frequency of
the PWM inverter can be adapted for both axes together (Fig. 3–1).
However, it must be taken into account that the available current ( In, Imax)
is reduced when the clock cycle freq. is increased (ref. to PJU Section 4.1).
The I2t limiting is designed for a factory–set pulse frequency of 3.3 kHz and a
max. ambient temperature of 40C. If these values are exceeded (pulse fre-
quency and/or ambient temperature), the response threshold must be adapted
(refer to Fig. 3-2).
8.0
7.5
7.0
6.5
Frequency [kHz]
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
0
10 100 1000 10000
R542 [k]
Frequency
Typ. value, series
Fig. 3-1 Clock–cycle frequency of the PWM inverter

07.94
e) Speed setpoint adaptation

If the adjustment range of the tachometer potentiometer (for low speed ranges)
is not sufficient, then the speed setpoint can be adapted using the setpoint vol-
tage divider. The following circuit diagram applies:
Nset N controller
20 k 20 k virt. M
Rx
The following relationship is obtained for R545 (R546):

VS Rx=10k
nrequired
nrated – nrequired
f) Limiting, I component, speed controller (refer to 2.7)

The maximum I component of the speed controller can be limited by inserting
R547 (R550).
g) Electronic weight equalization
The value to be set for the electronic weight equalization is obtained from the
current setpoint IsetGwa, which can be measured at test socket T with the axis
enbled at standstill (Nset=0):
R= 10V 10k Caution: IsetGwa 5V R 20 k!

IsetGwa
After the resistor has been inserted, the value, with the axis inhibited, must be
able to be measured at test socket T with the same sign (polarity).
h) Response threshold I2t monitoring
The I2t monitoring limits the current setpoint to the thermally permissible value.
The response threshold is 55% of the peak power module current, and can be
reduced, corresponding to the following characteristic by inserting R553 (R554):
Response threshold I2t monitoring

60
50
Response threshold [% I_limit]
40
30
20
10
0
1 10 100 1000
R553 (R554) [k]
Fig. 3-2 Response threshold I2t monitoring

04.97
3.2 Setting elements with user–friendly interface

Setting elements on the parameter board;
Terminal = H → connected to terminal 9, terminal = L →open–circuit.
Function Component(s) Effect

Ready/fault R33 = 0 Ω (as supplied) Ready signal
relay terminal 672/673/674 R33 = open Fault signal
Speed/current control (permanently set S2: 10 = OFF (as supplied) Speed–controlled
via switch) S2: 10 = ON Current–controlled
Speed/current controlled (selected via R14 = 0 Ω1); Term.22 = L Speed–controlled VS
terminal) R14 = 0 Ω; Term.22 = H Current–controlled
R17 (as supplied = open)2) Voltage divider at 10 V
Supplementary setpoint 1
R16 (as supplied = open) Voltage divider at –10 V
via terminal 22 = H
R18 (as supplied = open) Voltage divider at the reference point
R21 (as supplied = open)2) Voltage divider at 10 V
Supplementary setpoint 2
R19 (as supplied = open) Voltage divider at –10 V
via terminal 23 = H
R22 (as supplied = open) Voltage divider at the reference point
Current–controlled operation with/wi- R1 = 0 Ω (as supplied) I component inhibited P
thout I component R1 = open I component active PI
Controller and pulse inhibit via term. 65 R13 = open (as supplied) Delayed
R13 = 0 Ω Instantaneous
Master-/slave oper.: master operation R42 + R44 = 0 Ω, S2: 10 = OFF Master operation, term. 258 = output
slave operation R44 = 0 Ω, R1 + R42 = open, Slave operation, term. 258 = input
S2: 10 = ON
R54 = 360 kΩ (as supplied) t = 230 ms
Timer, speed controller at its endstop R54, as selected t [ms]
R54 [kΩ] = – 47
0.56
Monitoring, speed controller at its end- R32 = 0 Ω (as supplied) Monitoring active
stop R32 = open Monitoring inactive
S2: 1 = ON (as supplied) Motor counter–clockwise rotation,
Direction of rotation reversal
motor drive shaft end
(direction of rotation for a positive
S2: 1 = OFF Motor clockwise direction of rotation,
setpoint at terminal 56/14)
motor drive shaft end
Speed controller smoothing C3 (as supplied = open) τ = C3 68 kΩ
Speed setpoint smoothing C4 (as supplied = open) τ = C4 10 kΩ
Speed actual value smoothing C5 (as supplied = open) τ = C5 5 kΩ
Current setpoint smoothing C6 (as supplied = open) τ = C6 1 kΩ
Speed setpoint adaptation 2)
R5 = 20 kΩ (as supplied) |100% nACT N|=11 ... 5V
(only terminal 56/14)
Current setpoint adaptation R42 (as supplied = 0 Ω)2) Iset 10 V
Travel to fixed endstop (fixed setting via R12 acc. to Fig. 3–3 Limiting according to Fig. 3–3
R12) Condition: term. 96 connected to speed controller monitoring inactive
terminal 44
1) As supplied: R14 = open
2) R=
Nset
10 V
(
Nrated
Nmax – 0.5 ) 40k

07.94

Travel to fixed endstop (variable R12 = open (as supplied) Limiting acc. to Fig. 3-4,
via term. 96) Volt. at term. 96 acc. to Fig. 3-4 Speed controller monitoring inactive
Setting–up operation (central R12 acc. to Fig. 3-3 Limiting acc. to Fig. 3-3,
via term. 112 on the NE modu- KL112 = open Speed controller monitoring inactive
le) (as supplied term. 112 connec-
ted to terminal 9)
Current reduction after the ti- R2 acc. to Fig. 3-5 Reduction, acc. to Fig. 3-5
mer, speed controller at end- R32 = open speed controller monitoring disabled
stop, has expired
Current reduction after the I2t R2 = open (as supplied) S1 duty = 1.1 Irated
timer has expired R32 = open
VS Response threshold I2t R9 = 30 kΩ (as supplied) S1 duty = 1.1 Irated
R9 acc. to Fig. 3-6 Limiting, acc. to 3-6
Electronic weight equalization R46 + R48 = open (as supplied) No weight equalization
R46 for neg. I–set at socket T Supplementary I set according to Fig. 3-7
R48 for pos. I–set at socket T Supplementary I set according to Fig. 3-7
Tachometer adaptation 1) R6, R7, R8 tolerance 0.1%
[5 k (V Tach
UTachX ) ]
–7.5 k
( )
Rx=
VTach
1– 1 VTachX
4
Clock cycle frequency R542 Refer to Fig. 3-1
Iset [%]
Imax
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10 Limit
value
0
1%
0.1 1.0 10.0 100.0 1000.0
R12 [k]
Fig. 3-3 Current setpoint limiting as a function of R12, 30 V terminal 96 12 V
1) refer to VS/Section 3.1.1

04.97
Iset
[%]
Imax
100
90
80
70
60
50
40 VS
30
20
10 Final
value
0 1%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Vterm.96 [V]
Fig. 3-4 Current setpoint limiting as a function of the voltage at 96 (R12 = open)
Iset
Imax [%]
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Initial 0
value
1.0 10.0 100.0
1%
R2 [kΩ]
Fig. 3-5 Current setpoint limiting as a function of R2

07.94
Icont.
[%]
Irated Inadmissible range
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
VS 40
30
20
10
0
10.0 100.0 1000.0
R9 [kΩ]
Fig. 3-6 Response threshold, I2t monitoring as a function of R9
IWeightequal./Imax
1.0 Inadmissible range

0.8
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.03
0.02 R46 or
R48 [k]
0.01
5 6.8 10 15 22 27 39 56 100 150 220 390 680 1000
5.6 47 68 470
Fig. 3-7 Supplementary current setpoint for electronic weight equalization
Inverter clock cycle frequency PBM

When noise problems develop (the motor makes a whistling sound), the clock
cycle frequency of the PWM inverter can be changed by inserting R369 on the
basic board.
However, it should be noted, that the available current (In, Imax) is reduced
when the clock cycle frequency is increased (refer to PJU Section 4.1)
The I2t limiting is designed for a factory–set pulse frequency of 3.3 kHz and a
max. ambient temperature of 40 C. If this value is exceeded (pulse frequency
and/or ambient temperature), the response threshold must be changed (refer to
Fig. 3-2). The characteristic according to Fig. 3-1 applies.


12.94
4 Setpoint Interfaces
Setpoint Interfaces 4
Definitions:
VS
X Optimum, taking into account the properties of the setpoint input
Possible
Not permitted, also in some cases not possible
Table 4-1 Main setpoint – supplementary setpoints
Int. Int.
Operating mode Setpoint Terminal Terminal setpoint setpoint Socket Terminal
56/14 24/20 term. 22 term. 23 NZ 258
Main setpoint X
Speed controlled
Suppl. setpoint X X X X
Main setpoint X
Current controlled
Suppl. setpoint X
Slave I controlled Main setpoint X
current setpoint input
Suppl. setpoint
MSD option Main setpoint X
MSD operation
Suppl. setpoint
MSD option Main setpoint X
C axis
Suppl. setpoint X X
Table 4-2 Motor direction of rotation for a positive setpoint and S2.1 = ON
Mode Term. 56/14 Term. 24/20 Term. 22 Term. 23 Socket NZ Master/slave

Term. 258
R16/18 right R19/22 right
Speed–controlled Left Right Left
R17/18 left R21/22 left
R16/18 right R19/22 right Right
Current–controlled Right
R17/18 left R21/22 left (slave)
When viewing the motor shaft drive end


07.94
4 Setpoint Interfaces
Space for notes
VS

04.97
5.1 Pre–settings
Commissioning with the MSD Option 5

Control parameter settings for C–axis operation on the parameter board, control
parameters for MSD operation on the option board.
The components which can be modified for the MSD option are mounted on
solder pins (layout, refer to Section 9). VS
The scale divisions of the potentiometers (in the setting tables) are defined as
follows:
10 0
9/ The setting shown in the diagram
9 10 0/1 1 corresponds to 7 scale units.
88 2 2
77 3
3
6 5 4
6 5 4
5.1 Pre–settings
Warning
! Changes on the parameter board: Remove R4, R5 and R54, if required, C4
(not mounted when supplied).
Undesirable axis motion can occur if this information is not observed!
5.1.1 Settings with the control board withdrawn
Ramp–up time
Table 5-1 Ramp–up time from 0 V to 10 V in s via terminal 56/14, setting via potentiometer
R20 and terminal 102
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Terminal 102 open 0.01 0.11 0.21 0.31 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.11
Terminal 102 at 0.1 1.08 2.07 3.06 4.04 5.03 6.02 7.01 8.01 9.04 11.05
terminal 9
The ramp–up time range via R20 can be changed by modifying R27/R60.

07.94
5.1 Pre–settings
Torque limiting
“Constant power”
I/Imax range
R76
100
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
R213
VS
13 ÎÎÎÎÎÎ R225
23 70 100 n/nrated in %
R214
Fig. 5-1 Torque limiting
Table 5-2 Suitable start of the “constant power” range referred to

nmax = 10 V in % via R214
Potentiometer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
R214
Start of the
70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 26 22
range in %
Table 5-3 Deviations of the selected power to the constant power at the point
nmax in % via R213
Potentiometer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
R213
Start of the
+20 0 –20
range in %
Table 5-4 Constant torque limiting Iset/Imax in % via R76 (solder pins), R76 is open
when the equipment is supplied
R76 in kΩ 3 4.3 6.2 8.2 11 15 18 22 27 36
Iset/Imax in % 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Intermediate values are determined using interpolation
Table 5-5 Speed–dependent torque limiting Iset/Imax in % via R225 (solder pins) for
R226 = 20 kΩ
R225 in kΩ 2.4 4.7 7.5 11 16 22 30 47 70 100

Iset/Imax in % 1 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85
12% Iset/Imax is set as standard. Intermediate values are obtained using

interpolation.

04.97
5.1 Pre–settings
Normalization of
the M/P display
Table 5-6 Normalization via potentiometer R903 (as supplied, factor = 1)
Pot. R903 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Normalization fac-
3 2.8 2.6 2.4 2.2 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1
tor
Relay function, The terminal is selected using 0 Ω resistors

output of two limit VS
value stages
Term.110 Term.108 Term.115 T.114 T.216 Term.214 T.127 Term.126

R1081) R1051) R991)
R98
R170 R1061) R103 R971)
R1711) R107 R1041)

|Iact |> Ix2) |nact |< nmin3) |nact |< nx3) nact = nset3)
Fig. 5-2 Relay functions
1) As supplied
2) Relay drops–out
3) Relay pulss–in if the function is fulfilled.

07.94
5.1 Pre–settings
Table 5-7 Limit value functions
Limit va- Range Settings via fixed values

lue stage
Smoothing for relay bounce = C87
Suppression: nset step 31 mV,
IactIx
4.5 %...100 % R180 = 0 Ω
Pot. R211
hysteresis = 10 mV,
R179 = 2 kΩ
Pot. R211 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ix =in % 100 90 81 71 62 52 43 33 24 14 4.5
VS Smoothing for relay bounce = C68,

nact nmi Hysteresis 400 mV (as supplied),
n 0.3 %...1.7 % nmax Inactive for C axis: R100 = 0 Ω (as
Pot. R10 supplied)
R274 = 300 kΩ corr. to 20 mV hysteresis
Pot. R10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
nmin=in % 0.3 0.44 0.58 0.73 0.87 1.02 1.16 1.31 1.45 1.59 1.74
nact nx Smoothing for relay bounce = C68
3 %...100 % nmax
Pot. R43
Pot. R43 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
nx=in % 3.4 13 23 34 44 54 64 74 84 94 104
Monitoring threshold:
nset – diff 20 mV,
nset =
Only in MSD operation R179 = 2 kΩ
nset*
Hysteresis = 10 mV, R180 = 0 Ω
Extension = 32 ms, C20 = 1 µF
Functions via fixed

values
Table 5-8 Settings via fixed values

Ramp–function generator tracking R270 = 0 Ω (as supplied) Tracking active
R270 = open Tracking inactive
Speed setpoint smoothing C40 τ [ms] = 10 C40 [µF]
Correction setpoint for MSD opera- R900 + R901 = open (as supplied) No correction setpoint
tion (Terminal 65 brakes to the set- R900 + 901 = 40 kΩ Correction setpoint via term. 24/20
point terminal 24)2)
Current actual value/power display R160 = open, R207 = 1 kΩ (as supplied) M/P display
R160 = 1 kΩ, R207 = open Iact display
C axis/MSD operation Terminal 61 = open MSD operation
Setpoint MSD: term. 56/14 Terminal 61 at terminal 9 C axis operation
Setpoint C axis: term.24/20 or Changeover, refer to Fig. 5–3
Fixed setpt. via term. 22 or term. 23
Changeover speed, term. 61 R77/78 1)
R77 . (47000 – R78 . 15)

1) Changeover speed = [%]
R77 . 47 k + R78 . (R77 + 47 k)
2)
! Warning: The pulses are only cancelled after the noff threshold has been fallen below!

04.97
5.1 Pre–settings
Speed MSD oper. Braking range

Term.61=open Term. 61 = H (with respect to term. 9)
n1 Parameter
changeover
point
Changeover
R77 and R78
speed
t
n2
VS
n1 = MSD speed
n2 = C–axis speed
Fig. 5-3 Changeover, terminal 61
Changing–over
parameters for
C–axis operation
Control parameters, drift setting, setpoint input
Adaptation enable
Switch–in 200 ms timer stage
Inhibit several relay functions
Inhibit the noff shutdown
5.1.2 Settings in operation
Setting rule
1. The C axis parameters are set on the parameter board (tachometer, TN, KP,
drift).
C–axis parameters, refer to the speed controller optimization, VS/Section 2
2. MSD parameters are set using potentiometers located at the front of the
option board:
Pot. R44 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pot. R35=left 2 1
Pot. R35=right 15 1
Fig. 5-4 Extending the integral action time using potentiometer R44 and the influence of
potentiometer R35 on the parameter board, TN extended by a factor

07.94
5.1 Pre–settings
Table 5-9 Reducing the proportional gain using potentiometer R45 and the influence of
potentiometer R25 on the parameter board, Kp reduction in %
Pot. R45 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
left 33.1 29.5 26.3 23.3 20.4 17.5 14.6 11.5 8.2 4.5 0.1
Pot. R25 center 90.9 89.4 87.8 85.9 83.7 81 77.5 72.4 64.4 48.7 1.5
right 95.1 94.3 93.3 92.3 90.9 89.3 87 83.7 77.9 65 2.8
VS Table 5-10 Lowest speed before the controller and pulse inhibit (braking to noff for terminal
64/65 → pulse cancellation) via potentiometer R1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
noff as %
0.34 0.47 0.61 0.74 0.88 1.02 1.15 1.29 1.42 1.56 1.69
of nmax
Table 5-11 Drift compensation using potentiometer R96 for nset = 0
Potentiometer R96 Control range 30 mV

04.97
5.2 Analog outputs
5.2 Analog outputs
Function Terminal Limitation

Speed actual value Term. 75 Non–normalized speed actual value such as
test socket ”X”
Power display (utilization) Term. 162 M/P display (as supplied) Fig. 5–5, display
M/P , Table 5–6 , normalization
Current actual value Term. 162 Iact display by changing–over components
(Table 5–8, settings via fixed values)
VS
M display P display nact

[M /P ]
M P
M/P display
max max
Iact = Imax
Fig. 5-5 Display M/P

07.94
5.2 Analog outputs
Space for notes
VS

6 Free for Expansions
Free for Expansions 6

VS

07.94
Space for notes
VS

10.00
7 Powering–Up
Powering–Up 7
Main breaker: OPEN
VS
Adapt the module to the motor,
Standard settings, refer to VS/Section 1
Start–up with battery box
Connect term. 48, 64, 65, 663 to term. 9

Switch (open) between term. 63 + term. 9
Term. 56/14 at the battery box
Main breaker: ON Check the connection, motor/PWM inverter:

L1, L2, L3 cyclically interchanged?
Cable for the power connection
Set the setpoint from the battery box to Cable for the rotor position and tachometer
0V
Main breaker: OPEN

Briefly enable terminal 65 (jog)
Open the connection between

terminal 63 and terminal 9
Does the yes
fault
motor
accelerate?
no
Enter a low setpoint (e.g. 0.1 V)

Briefly enable terminal 65
Does the drive no

fault
run continuously?
yes

7 Powering–Up
Enable terminal 65
Optimize the speed controller or set known

values, Section 2
VS Inhibit terminal 65
Start–up completed
Inhibit (de–energize) terminal 63!
Main breaker: OPEN
Open the connection between term.64, term. 65

and term. 9
Disconnect the battery box from terminal 56/14

03.96
8.1 Test sockets and display elements of the feed modules
Service and Diagnostics 8

VS
8.1.1 User–friendly interface
Test sockets
X R Speed setpoint (output)

W T Current setpoint (output)
M NZ Supplementary speed setpoint/supplementary
current setpoint 2) (input)
Reference ground (output)

Current actual value 10 V corresponds to the
selected Imax (output) 1)
Speed actual value 10 V at the rated speed
(1FT503/4–0AF71: 11 V) (output)
All outputs have a 1 k output resistance
Fig. 8-1 Test sockets, user–friendly interface
Operating display
Par. board inserted no yes yes yes yes yes

Pulse enable 663 – no no yes yes yes
Controller enable 65 – no yes no yes yes
Current controlled no no no no no yes
Closed–loop speed controlled operation (standard operation)
1) Setting value Imax, refer to VS/Section 1.2

2) Closed–loop speed/current controlled depending on the operating mode

07.94
Fault display
Faule
I2t monitoring or
heatsink X X
overtemperature
Rotor position
X
encoder
Speed controller at
X X X
its endstop
VS Tachometer
X
monitoring
Iact = 0 X
Motor
X
overtemperature
5 V undervoltage
X
(5 V level faulted)
Effect: Current Pulse Pulse Pulse can- Pulse Pulse Pulse
limiting cancel– cancel– cellation cancel– cancel– cancel–
lation lation lation lation lation
Signal NE: T. 5.x – T. 5.x – – – – –
Signal FD: T. 291 T. 297+ T. 5.x T. 297+ T. 672/ T. 288+ T. 288+ T. 672/
T. 672/ T. 294 T. 672/ T. 674 T. 672/ T. 672/ T. 6741)
T. 674 T. 674 T. 674 T. 674
Sequence when the temperature or I2t monitoring responds
I2t monitoring:
– min. 250 ms before the limiting becomes active, a pre–alarm is output at terminal 5.x of the NE
module (this is not saved)
– when the limiting becomes active, fault 1 is displayed and a signal is output at term. 291 (saved)
Heatsink overtemperature monitoring:
– when the heatsink shutdown temperature is reached, a pre–alarm is output at terminal 5.x of the
NE module (this is not saved)
– after typ. 4 s, the pulses are inhibited, fault 1 is displayed and a signal is output at terminal 291 +
terminal 672/terminal 674 (this is saved)
Motor overtemperature
The SIMODRIVE 611 feed modules with closed–loop control for 1FT5 servomotors are equipped with an
evaluation circuit for the PTC thermistors integrated in the motor windings.
The monitoring combination is intended to protect the motors against inadmissibly high winding tempera-
tures (trip temperature, 150 C).
As the drive shouldn’t randomly intervene in the machining process, when the response temperature is
reached, this is only output as signal (no trip) at the SIMODRIVE 611 via the single fault signal, terminals
289/294/296 (this is saved) or centrally via terminals 5.1, 5.2 and 5.3 of the infeed module (this is saved).
There is no internal system response to protect the motor. In the adaptation control, the user must ensure
that there is adequate thermal recovery time for the motor immediately after the signal is output The motor
should, if required, be immediately powered–down.
It is not permissible to delay this.
If the motor is not thermally monitored, then the complete drive could be destroyed when an overload
condition develops, or if the drive converter has been overdimensioned.
1) Depending on the operating mode (ready/fault signal)

04.97
03.96
8.1.2 Standard interface
Test sockets and

fault displays Current actual value 10 V at Imax
Current setpoint 10 V at Imax
W T H2/M Red LED: ”Motor encoder fault”

tachometer fault, rotor position
encoder fault
M X H1/A Red LED: ”Axis fault”

Speed controller at its endstop
Heatsink temperature
VS
I2t monitoring
Speed actual value 10 V at the rated speed
(1FT503/4–0AF71: 11 V)
General reference ground

All of the outputs have a 10 k output resistance
Fig. 8-2 Test sockets, standard interface
Sequence when the temperature or I2t monitoring responds
I2t monitoring
– A pre–alarm is output at terminal 5.x of the NE module min. 250 ms before the limiting becomes
active (this is saved)
– Fault H1 is displayed when the limiting becomes active.
Heatsink temperature monitoring:
– When the heatsink shutdown (trip) temperature is reached, a pre–alarm is output at terminal 5.x
of the NE module (this is not saved)
– After typ. 4 s, the pulses are inhibited, fault H1 is displayed and a signal is output at
term. 72/term. 73/term. 74 of the NE module (this is saved)
The SIMODRIVE 611 feed modules with closed–loop control for 1FT5 servomotors are equipped with an
evaluation circuit for the PTC thermistors integrated in the motor windings.
The monitoring combination is intended to protect the motors against inadmissibly high winding tempera-
tures (trip temperature, 150 C).
As the drive shouldn’t randomly intervene in the machining process, when the response temperature is
reached, this is only output as signal (no trip) at the SIMODRIVE 611 or centrally via terminals 5.1, 5.2 and
5.3 of the infeed module (this is saved).
There is no internal system response to protect the motor. In the adaptation control, the user must ensure
that there is adequate thermal recovery time for the motor immediately after the signal is output The motor
should, if required, be immediately powered–down.
It is not permissible to delay this.
If the motor is not thermally monitored, then the complete drive could be destroyed when an overload
condition develops, or if the drive converter has been overdimensioned.

04.97
07.94
8.2 Troubleshooting
8.2 Troubleshooting
Table 8-1 Troubleshooting
Fault, user-friendly Fault, standard Possible fault cause

interface interface
1 H1 RMS torque too high? Ambient temperature 40 C?
2 H2 Actual value cable and shield connection correctly connected?
Encoder in the motor defective?
3 H1 Motor overloaded, RMS torque too high?
VS 4 H2 Refer to F2
5 H1 Axis mechanically locked? RMS torque too high?
6 H1 Motor incorrectly connected? External moment of inertia too high?
RMS torque too high (mechanically locked)?
7 – Motor feeder cable interrupted, motor cable short–circuit/ground fault
(Vce monitoring saved up to POWER–ON)
Fault cannot be removed → replace the module
F – 5V level fault
replace module

04.97
9.1 Terminals
Attachments 9
9.1 Terminals
Table 9-1 User–friendly interface
Term. Designa- Type Max. cross–
Function Type voltage/limit values
No. tion 1) section VS
U2 acc. to the Plan-
V2 Motor connection O 3–ph. 0...450 V AC ning Guide
W2
PE1 Protective conductor I 0V Stud
P600 DC link (DC link) I/O +300 V Busbar
M600 DC link (DC link) I/O –300 V Busbar
X151/351 Equipment bus I/O Ribbon cable
56 X321 Speed setpoint 1 I 0V... ± 10V7) 1.5 mm2
142) X321 Differential input I 1.5 mm2
AS1 X331 Checkb. sig. contact (feedback) NC max. 250VAC/1A, 30 VDC/2A 1.5 mm2
AS2 X331 Relay, start inhibit
663 X331 Pulse enable3) I +21...30 V 1.5 mm2
9 X331 Enable voltage3)5) O +24 V 1.5 mm2
65 X331 Controller enable3) I +13...30 V 1.5 mm2
9 X331 Enable voltage3)5) O +24 V 1.5 mm2
22 X331 Select int. fixed setpoint 13)/ I +13...30 V 1.5 mm2
current–controlled operation
23 X331 Select in. fixed setpoint 23) I +13...30 V 1.5 mm2
202) X331 Speed setpoint 2/current setpoint I 0V...±10 V (340 µs smoothing)7) 1.5 mm2
24 X331 Differential input I 1.5 mm2
966) X331 Current setpoint limiting I 0...±30 V 1.5 mm2
446) X331 Electronics voltage O –15 V/10 mA 1.5 mm2
66) X331 Integrator inhibit, speed controller I +13...30 V 1.5 mm2
2586) X331 Current setpoint (master/slave) I/O 0 V...±10 V 1.5 mm2
166) X331 Norm. current actual value O 0 V...±10 V/Ri=1 kΩ 1.5 mm2
289 X341 I 4) 1.5 mm2
Relay signals, center contact
288 X341 NO max. 30 V/1 A 1.5 mm2
290 X341 Speed controller at its endstop NC max. 30 V/1 A 1.5 mm2
291 X341 NO max. 30 V/1 A 1.5 mm2
293 X341 I2t monitoring NC max. 30 V/1 A 1.5 mm2
294 X341 NO max. 30 V/1 A 1.5 mm2
296 X341 NC max. 30 V/1 A 1.5 mm2
297 X341 NO max. 30 V/1 A 1.5 mm2
Tacho./rotor pos. encoder fault
299 X341 NC max. 30 V/1 A 1.5 mm2
672 X341 NO 30 V/1 A4) 1.5 mm2
673 X341 Ready/fault signal I 30 V/1 A 1.5 mm2
674 X341 NC 30 V/1 A 1.5 mm2
X311 Motor encoder
1) I=Input, O=Output, NC=NC contact, NO=NO contact (for signal: closed=high, open=low)
2) Reference point of the differential input
3) Reference ground, terminal19 (this is not connected with the general reference ground, terminal 15)
4) Voltage refer to PE potential
5) Refer to NE– Section 3.1 ... 3.2
6) Reference ground is terminal 15 on the NE module.
7) The common mode range of the diff. input is 24V with respect to PE potential, and this may never be exceeded.

07.94
9.1 Terminals
Table 9-2 MSD option (only possible for user–friendly interface)
Term. Designa- Max. cross–

Function Type1) Typ. voltage/limit values
No. tion section
1022) X312 TH = 1 : 10 I +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 kΩ 1.5 mm2
612) X312 C–axis operation I +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 kΩ 1.5 mm2
753) X312 nact O 0 V...10 V 1.5 mm2
1623) X312 Pact/Iact5) O 0 V...10 V 1.5 mm2
110 X322 IactIx NO/NC4) 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
108 X322 I 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
115 X322 nact nmin NO/NC4) 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
114 X322 I 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
216 X322 nact nx NO/NC4) 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
VS 214 X322 I 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
127 X322 nset= nset* NO/NC4) 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
126 X322 I 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
Table 9-3 Standard interface
Term. Designa- Type Max. cross–

Function 1) Typ. voltage/limit values
No. tion section
U2 Acc, to the Plan-
V2 Motor connection O 3–ph. 0...450 V AC ning Guide
W2
X151/351 Equipment bus I/O Ribbon cable
AS1 X321 Checkb. sig. contact, relay, NC 250 V AC/1 A, 30 V DC/2A 1.5 mm2
AS2 X321 start inhibit
663 X321 Pulse enable2) I +21 V...30 V 1.5 mm2
96) X321 Enable voltage2) O +24 V 1.5 mm2
56.1 X331 Speed setpoint/current setpoint I 0 V...10 V 1.5 mm2

7)
14.1 X331 (differential input) I 1.5 mm2
65.1 X331 Controller enable2) I +13 V...30 V 1.5 mm2
22.1 X331 Select, I controller2) I +13 V...30 V 1.5 mm2
56.2 X332 Speed setpoint/current setpoint I 0 V...10 V 1.5 mm2
7)
14.2 X332 (differential input) I 1.5 mm2
65.2 X332 Controller enable2) I +13 V...30 V 1.5 mm2
96) X332 Enable voltage2) A +24 V 1.5 mm2
22.2 X332 Select, I controller2) I +13 V...30 V 1.5 mm2
96) X332 Enable voltage2) A +24 V 1.5 mm2
1) I=Input, O=Output, NC=NC contact, NO=NO contact (for signal: closed=high, open=low)
2) Reference ground term.19 (this is not connected to the general reference ground, terminal 15)
3) Reference ground is terminal 15 at the NE module.
4) Can be optionally changed–over using jumpers
5) The power display is set as standard
6) Refer to NE– Section 3.1 ... 3.2
7) The common mode range of the diff. input is 24V with respect to PE potential, and this may never be exceeded.

9.2 Layout diagram MSD option board
9.2 Layout diagram MSD option board
R77
U5 6.23
R124 R125 R78
V9
X312
V29 C59 V30

R76
U4
U7 V10
R226 3 2 1
V31 C61 V32
R170 R80 R85
V14
R225 R214
VS
K4 V21
R171 3 2 1
V22
U6
C64
N8
C39
R105 R213
+
50
49
1 5 R100 V45
X322
R106 K3 V12
R274 V47
R107
N1
U2
C8
V6 V8
C38
3 2 1
R103 1 5
K2 V17 V42 R10 V4 +
V35
R104
N3
3 2 1 3 2 1
V1
U3
C18
R99
C37
R97
1 5
K1
R43 R20
X11
+
R31 R33 N14
R98 V52
U1
X12 C68
C4
X7
R108 1 5
X8 C20
R101
R102
R157
R901
R900
R285
R284
R239 X9
R48
C5
R2 C5
N12
N16
R906
R5 X10
R270
3 2 1
R96
R207 X3 X1
N11
N5
N5
X305
R45
1 R160 X4 C40 X2 C28

1
2
N6
N13
N17
R44
N4
R902
R111
R180
R179
R60
R27
1
R112
R1
N18
N10
1
N7
3 2 1
N8
V20 C22
R903
R164
V19 V18 V43 R161 R92
X5
V39 3 2 1 C41
R16 R93
R211 X6 C87
Fig. 9-1 Layout diagram MSD option board
The capacitors are assigned to the adjacent solder pins.

9.3 Layout diagram, parameter board
9.3 Layout diagram, parameter board
R1 R13 X72 R34
X85
X82
X50 X55 R14 R37
C4
R2 R15 R38
X86
X51 X56 R16 R39
Drift
R3 6 R17 R40
X87
X52 X57 R18 R41
C5
R20
Tach. R4 R19 R42
C1
X88
VS R11
X53 X58
S2 1
R21 R43
X304
R5 R22 R44
Kp(N) R25
X54 X59 R23 R45
1
C2
R9 R24 R46
2
X60 X69 R26 R47
S1
TN R35
R10 R27 R48
X61 X70 R28 R49
C3
R6 R12 R29 R50

Adapt
X62 X71 R30 R51
R36 R7 R31 R52
X83
R32 R53
C8
10
R8 R33 R54
X84
X91
X81
Fig. 9-2 Layout diagram, parameter board

04.97
9.4 Layout diagram, standard interface
9.4 Layout diagram, standard interface
A
9
1
9
1
X311
S4
15
15
8
8
R536
X1
R537
R538
R540
R539
VS
R541
X321
R543
S1
R544
X331
A1
B1
View of the component side (side 2)
with connected components
R476
R478
R547
R545
R549
R548
C231
C233
C232
C239
C234
R479
R472
R482
R481
R483
R484
R550
R546
R552
R551
C235
C237
C236
C240
C238
R473
R542
X37
X34 X36
X35
R556
R555
X301
R553
B
A
R554
2 4
6 8 10 12 14 16
2
1
X351
Fig. 9-3 Layout diagram, standard interface

07.94
9.5 Layout diagram, speed control loop (user–friendly interface)
9.5 Layout diagram, speed control loop (user–friendly interface)
resistors must be inserted for R900 and R901

For the correction setpoint function, 40 kOhm
1) R900 series = open correction setpoint in
MSD operation via terminal 24/20
n.B. = not inserted

VS
OPTION BOARD MSD

PARAMETER BOARD
Fig. 9-4 Layout diagram, speed control loop

04.97
9.6 Motor encoder, assignment of X311/X313 (1st/2nd axis)
PIN assignment
connecting cable
motor feed control
Table 9-4 Pin assignment, connecting cable
Signal Encoder connector Feed control

RLG S 1 13
VS
RLG T 2 5
RLG R 3 6
P15 4 4
Ground 5 2
Tach. M 6 14
Tach. T 7 7
Shield 8 1/9
PTC 9 11
PTC 10 12
Tach. R 11 8
Tach. S 12 15
For terminating connectors for axes which are not used – type Sub Min D
15–pin (socket) connect pin13 to pin 2 and pin 11 to pin 12.


07.94
Space for notes
VS

10.00
Index
Layout diagram, parameter board, VS/9-54

Index Layout diagram, speed control loop, VS/9-56
Layout diagram, standard interface, VS/9-55
Limit value stages, VS/5-37
A
Actual value normalization, VS/1-4 M
Adaptation tables, VS/1-5
Master/slave, VS/3-29
MSD option board, VS/9-53
C
C–axis operation, VS/5-39
Changeover parameter for C–axis operation,
N VS
VS/5-39 Normalization of the M/P display, VS/5-37
Commissioning
Commissioning stages, VS/1-3
Short commissioning, VS/1-3 O
Standard commissioning, VS/1-3
with the MSD option, VS/5-35 Operating display, VS/8-47
Current controller gain, VS/1-5
Current controller settings, VS/1-4
P
Parameter board, VS/9-54
D Pin asignment X311 and X313, VS/9-57
Diagnostics, VS/8-47 Proportional gain Kp with adaptation, VS/2-22
Drift compensation, VS/2-23 Proportional gain kp without adaptation, VS/2-19
E R
Electronic weight equalization, VS/3-30, VS/3-32 Ramp–up time, VS/5-35
F S
Fault display, VS/8-48 Service and diagnostics, VS/8-47
Functions via fixed values, VS/5-38 Setting elements
with standard interface, VS/3-25
with user–friendly interface, VS/3-29
Settings via fixed values, VS/5-38
G Speed control loop, VS/9-56
Gain Kp with adaptation, VS/2-22 Standard commissioning, VS/1-3
Standard interface, VS/1-4, VS/9-55
Standard settings, VS/1-3
Supplementary setpoint, VS/3-29
I
I–component limiting, VS/2-23
Integral action time with adaptation, VS/2-21 T
Tachometer adaptation, VS/1-4
Tachometer calibration, VS/2-18
K Test sockets and display elements
Kp gain without adaptation, VS/2-19 standard interface, VS/8-49
user–friendly interface, VS/8-47
Timer, VS/3-29
Torque limiting, VS/5-36
L Travel to fixed endstop, VS/3-29
Layout diagram MSD option board, VS/9-53 Troubleshooting, VS/8-50

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition VS/i-1
07.94
Index
U
User–friendly interface, VS/1-4
W
Weight equalization, VS/3-30
VS

VS/i-2 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
Feed Modules, Resolver Control (VR)
1 Short Start–Up, Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/1-3

1.1 Pole numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/1-3
1.2 Speed actual value normalization [RPM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/1-4
1.3 Current controller settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/1-5
2 Speed Controller Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/2-11
2.1 Tachometer calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/2-12
2.2 Setting the proportional gain Kp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/2-13 VR
2.3 Setting the integral action time TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/2-14
2.4 Drift compensation (offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/2-14
3 Start–Up, Supplementary Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/3-15
3.1 Position processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/3-15
3.2 Current setpoint limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/3-15
3.3 Other functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/3-16
3.4 Operating feed modules without a connected motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/3-18
4 Setpoint Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/4-19
4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/4-19
4.2 External speed setpoint smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/4-20
5 Free for Expansions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/5-21
6 Free for Expansions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/6-23
7 Powering–Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/7-25
8 Service and Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/8-27
9 Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/9-29
9.1 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/9-29
9.2 Layout diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/9-30
9.2.1 Layout diagram, resolver control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/9-30
9.2.2 Layout diagram, DIL switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/9-32
9.3 Connector assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/9-33
9.3.1 X311/X312, encoder interface axis 1/axis 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/9-33
9.3.2 X391/X392, angular encoder interface, axis 1/axis 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/9-34

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition VR–i
12.94
07.94
Start–up stages of Start–up is divided into various steps. After the standard settings have been
the VSA modules, made, an additional start–up stage can be made before the equipment can be
resolver control powered–up.
Brief Start–up
Standard settings Sect. 1
Speed Controller
Optimization Sect. 2
Supplementary
Sect. 3
Functions
Setpoint Interfaces
Sect. 4
VR
Powering–up, Sect. 7
Service and
Diagnostics Sect. 8
Attachments Sect. 9

VR–ii SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
07.94 Feed Modules, Resolver Control (VR)
1.1 Pole numbers
Short Start–Up, Standard Settings 1

The setting elements (switches) are provided on the board and must be set
when installing the control board into the power module.
1.1 Pole numbers
Important
! The pole pair numbers for the motor and resolver must be set before VR
commissioning the system. Otherwise, the drive will not run.
Axis 1: DIL switch, S1 contacts 1–4

Axis 2: DIL switch, S2 contacts 1–4
Table 1-1 Pole numbers
2p motor 2 4 6 8 2p resolver 2 4 6 8
Axis 1 S1.x ON – 1 2 1+2 S1.x ON – 3 4 3+4
Axis 2 S2.x ON – 1 2 1+2 S2.x ON – 3 4 3+4
The pole (pair) numbers of the motors are dependent on the shaft height.
Table 1-2 Pole numbers of 1FT6 motors
Shaft height 36 48 63 80 100 132

Order No. 1FT6031 1FT6041 1FT6061 1FT6081 1FT6102 1FT6132
[MLFB] 1FT6034 1FT6044 1FT6062 1FT6082 1FT6105 1FT6134
1FT6064 1FT6084 1FT6108 1FT6136
1FT6086
Pole number 2p 4 4 6 8 8 6
Table 1-3 Pole numbers of 1FK6 motors
Shaft heights 36 48 63 80 100

Order No. 1FK6032 1FK6040 1FK6060 1FK6080 1FK6100
[MLFB] 1FK6042 1FK6063 1FK6083 1FK6101
1FK6103
Pole number 2p 6 6 6 6 8
The pole (pair) number of the standard resolver is 2p=2.

The pole pair number of the resolver is specified on the motor rating plate.

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition VR/1-3
Feed Modules, Resolver Control (VR) 10.00
07.94
1.2 Speed actual value normalization [RPM]
1.2 Speed actual value normalization [RPM]

These normalizations are valid for standard resolver pole number 2p=2.
We recommend that the correct normalization is set up to the rated motor
speed. For motors with rated speeds of 4500 RPM, we recommend that that
normaliztion is set, which is the closest to the required system–rated speed.
For motors with rated speed 1500 RPM, the normalization should be set for
2000 RPM.
Axis 1: DIL switch S4 contacts 1–4
Axis 2: DIL switch S4 contacts 5–8
Table 1-4 Speed normalization
nrated 2000 3000 3000 6000

Axis 1 S4.x ON – 1+3 2+4 1+2+3+4
VR Axis 2 S4.x ON – 5+7 6+8 5+6+7+8
alternatively possible
Refer to Section 2.1 for more detailed information about the speed ranges which
can be set.

VR/1-4 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
DIL switch Axis 1: DIL switch S3

Axis 2: DIL switch S6
Current actual va-

lue normalization Imax (selected value)
Current limit = [%]
Ilimit (power module)
Imax must be reduced as a minimum to the peak current permitted for the mo-
tor.
Table 1-5 Current actual value normalization [%]

VR
IMAX/ILIMIT [%] 100 70
Axis 1 S3.x ON – 1+2
Axis 2 S6.x ON – 1+2
Current controller
gain Imax * LA Ilimit * current limit * LA
Kp (I) < =
25 25
Imax = selected maximum current (RMS value) of the axis in A

LA = rotating inductance of the motor in mH (RMS value) (refer to the Plan-
ning Guide, AC Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives). Round–off calcula-
ted values to a selectable value!
Table 1-6 Current controller gain Kp (I)
Kp(I) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7.5 8.5 9.5 10.5 11.5 12.5 13.5 14.5 16
Axis 1 S3.x ON – 3+7 4+8 3+4 5+9 3+5 4+5 3+4+ 3+6 4+6 3+4+ 5+6 3+5+ 4+5+ 3+4+
+ + + 5+7+ + + 6+7+ + 6+7+ 6+8+ 5+6+
7+8 7+9 8+9 8+9 7+10 8+10 8+10 9+10 9+10 9+10 7+8+
9+10
Axis 2 S6.x ON – 3+7 4+8 3+4 5+9 3+5 4+5 3+4+ 3+6 4+6 3+4+ 5+6 3+5+ 4+5+ 3+4+
+ + + 5+7+ + + 6+7+ + 6+7+ 6+8+ 5+6+
7+8 7+9 8+9 8+9 7+10 8+10 8+10 9+10 9+10 9+10 7+8+
9+10
Adaptation tables Definition: o = Contact in the basic OFFsetting


07.94
Table 1-7 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1A00–0HA1 power modules, 3/6 A resolver control
Curr. act. value norm. Current controller gain Kp(I)

Servomotor Axis 1: S3 Axis 1: S3
Axis 2: S6 Axis 2: S6
Mo [Nm] Io [Α] nrated Contact Imax Contacts

1FT Kp(I)
60Κ 60Κ [RPM] 1+2 [%] 3+7 4+8 5+9 6+10
6031–4AK 0.83 1.2 6000 x 70 o o x o 5.0
6034–4AK 1.65 2.15 6000 o 100 x x o o 4.0
6041–4AF 2.15 1.55 3000 o 100 o x o x 10.5
6041–4AK 2.15 2.55 6000 o 100 x x o o 4.0
6044–4AF 4.15 2.50 3000 o 100 o x x o 7.5
6061–6AC 3.30 1.60 2000 o 100 x x x x 16.0
6061–6AF 3.30 2.25 3000 o 100 x x x o 8.5
6062–6AC 5.00 2.30 2000 o 100 x x o x 11.5
VR
1FK Kp(I)
60Κ 60Κ [RPM] 1+2 [%] 3+7 4+8 5+9 6+10
6032–6AK 0.90 1.40 6000 o 100 x x o o 4.0
6040–6AF 1.30 1.10 3000 x 70 x o x o 6.0
6040–6AK 1.3 2.2 6000 0 100 x 0 0 0 2.0
6042–6AF 2.65 2.20 3000 o 100 x x o o 4.0


10.00
Table 1-8 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1A00–0AA1 power modules, 5/10 A resolver control


1FT Kp(I)
60Κ 60Κ [RPM] 1+2 [%] 3+7 4+8 5+9 6+10
6034–4AK 1.65 2.15 6000 x 70 o o x o 5.0
6041–4AF 2.15 1.55 3000 x 70 o x x x 14.5
6041–4AK 2.15 2.55 6000 o 100 o x x o 7.5
6044–4AF 4.15 2.50 3000 o 100 x o x x 13.5
6044–4AK 4.15 4.85 6000 o 100 x x o o 4.0
6061–6AF 3.30 2.25 3000 o 100 x x x x 16.0
6061–6AH 3.30 3.35 4500 o 100 o x x o 7.5
6061–6AK 3.30 4.10 6000 o 100 x x o o 4.0
6062–6AC 5.00 2.30 2000 x 70 x x x x 16.0 VR
6062–6AF 5.00 3.40 3000 o 100 o x o x 10.5
6062–6AH 5.00 4.80 4500 o 100 o o x o 5.0
6062–6AK 5.00 6.40 6000 o 100 o x o o 3.0
6064–6AC 7.90 3.50 2000 o 100 o x x x 14.5
6064–6AF 7.90 5.00 3000 o 100 o x x o 7.5
6081–8AC 6.60 3.40 2000 o 100 x o x x 13.5

1FK Kp(I)
60Κ 60Κ [RPM] 1+2 [%] 3+7 4+8 5+9 6+10
6040–6AK 1.30 2.20 6000 x 70 o x o o 3.0
6042–6AF 2.65 2.20 3000 o 100 o x x o 7.5
6060–6AF 5.00 3.60 3000 o 100 o x x o 7.5
6080–6AF 6.60 4.50 3000 o 100 o x x o 7.5


07.94
Table 1-9 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1A00–0BA1 power modules, 9/18 A resolver control


1FT Kp(I)
60Κ 60Κ [RPM] 1+2 [%] 3+7 4+8 5+9 6+10
6044–4AK 4.15 4.85 6000 o 100 x o x o 6.0
6061–6AF 3.30 2.25 3000 x 70 x x x x 16.0
6061–6AH 3.30 3.25 4500 o 100 x x o x 11.5
6061–6AK 3.30 4.10 6000 o 100 o x x o 7.5
6062–6AF 5.00 3.40 3000 o 100 x x x x 16.0
6062–6AH 5.00 4.80 4500 o 100 x x x o 8.5
6062–6AK 5.00 6.40 6000 o 100 o o x o 5.0
6064–6AC 7.90 3.50 2000 x 70 x x x x 16.0
VR 6064–6AF 7.90 5.00 3000 o 100 o o x x 12.5
6064–6AH 7.90 7.60 4500 o 100 o o x o 5.0
6064–6AK 7.90 9.90 6000 o 100 o x o o 3.0
6081–8AC 6.60 3.40 2000 x 70 x x x x 16.0
6081–8AF 6.60 4.90 3000 o 100 o x o x 10.5
6081–8AH 6.60 7.40 4500 o 100 o o x o 5.0
6081–8AK 6.60 9.40 6000 o 100 o x o o 3.0
6082–8AC 10.40 5.50 2000 o 100 o x x x 14.5
6082–8AF 10.40 8.20 3000 o 100 x o x o 6.0
6084–8AC 16.20 7.55 2000 o 100 o x o x 10.5
6084–8AK 16.20 20.50 6000 o 100 o o o o 1.0
6102–8AB 22.40 7.40 1500 o 100 o o x x 12.5

1FK Kp(I)
60Κ 60Κ [RPM] 1+2 [%] 3+7 4+8 5+9 6+10
6060–6AF 5.00 3.60 3000 x 70 x o o x 9.5
6063–6AF 9.10 6.60 3000 o 100 x o x o 6.0
6080–6AF 6.60 4.50 3000 o 100 o o x x 12.5
6083–6AF 13.30 8.50 3000 o 100 o x x o 7.5
6100–8AF 15.00 10.20 3000 o 100 o x o o 3.0


10.00
Table 1-10 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1A00–0CA1 power modules, 18/36 A resolver control


1FT Kp(I)
60Κ 60Κ [RPM] 1+2 [%] 3+7 4+8 5+9 6+10
6062–6AH 5.00 4.80 4500 x 70 x x o x 11.5
6062–6AK 5.00 6.40 6000 o 100 x o o x 9.5
6064–6AF 7.90 5.00 3000 x 70 x x x x 16.0
6064–6AH 7.90 7.60 4500 o 100 o x o x 10.5
6064–6AK 7.90 9.90 6000 o 100 x o x o 6.0
6081–8AH 6.60 7.40 4500 o 100 o x o x 10.5
6081–8AK 6.60 9.40 6000 o 100 x o x o 6.0
6082–8AF 10.40 8.20 3000 o 100 x o x x 13.5
6082–8AH 10.40 12.20 4500 o 100 x o x o 6.0 VR
6082–8AK 10.40 14.65 6000 o 100 x x o o 4.0
6084–8AC 16.20 7.55 2000 x 70 o x x x 14.5
6084–8AF 16.20 11.30 3000 o 100 x o o x 9.5
6084–8AH 16.20 16.70 4500 o 100 x x o o 4.0
6084–8AK 16.20 20.50 6000 o 100 o x o o 3.0
6086–8AC 22.40 10.00 2000 o 100 x x x x 16.0
6086–8AF 22.40 14.40 3000 o 100 x x x o 8.5
6086–8AH 22.40 20.40 4500 o 100 x x o o 4.0
6102–8AB 22.40 7.40 1500 x 70 x x x x 16.0
6102–8AC 22.40 10.20 2000 o 100 x o x x 13.5
6102–8AF 22.40 14.20 3000 o 100 o x x o 7.5
6102–8AH 22.40 20.60 4500 o 100 o x o o 3.0
6105–8AB 41.50 13.80 1500 o 100 o x x x 14.5
6105–8AC 41.50 18.40 2000 o 100 x x x o 8.5
6084–8SF 22.00 16.30 3000 o 100 x x x o 8.5

1FK Kp(I)
60Κ 60Κ [RPM] 1+2 [%] 3+7 4+8 5+9 6+10
6063–6AF 9.10 6.60 3000 x 70 o x x o 7.5
6083–6AF 13.30 8.50 3000 o 100 x o x x 13.5
6100–8AF 15.00 10.20 3000 o 100 x o x o 6.0
6101–8AF 22.40 14.40 3000 o 100 o o x o 5.0
6103–8AF 30.00 19.00 3000 o 100 o x o o 3.0


07.94
Table 1-11 Adaptation table for 6SN112–1AA00–0DA1 power modules, 28/56 A resolver control
1FT Kp(I)
60Κ 60Κ [RPM] 1+2 [%] 3+7 4+8 5+9 6+10
6062–6AK 5.00 6.40 6000 x 70 x x o x 11.5
6064–6AH 7.90 7.60 4500 X 70 x x o x 11.5
6064–6AK 7.90 9.90 6000 o 100 x o o x 9.5
6081–8AK 6.60 9.40 6000 x 70 x o x o 6.0
6082–8AF 10.40 8.20 3000 x 70 o x x x 14.5
6082–8AH 10.40 12.20 4500 o 100 x x o x 11.5
6082–8AK 10.40 14.65 6000 o 100 x o x o 6.0
6084–8AF 16.20 11.30 3000 o 100 x x x x 16.0
6084–8AH 16.20 16.70 4500 o 100 x o x o 6.0
VR 6084–8AK 16.20 20.50 6000 o 100 o o x o 5.0
6086–8AC 22.40 10.00 2000 x 70 x x x x 16.0
6086–8AF 22.40 14.40 3000 o 100 x o o x 9.5
6086–8AH 22.40 20.40 4500 o 100 x o x o 6.0
6102–8AC 22.40 10.20 2000 x 70 x x x x 16.0
6102–8AF 22.40 14.20 3000 o 100 x x o x 11.5
6102–8AH 22.40 20.60 4500 o 100 o o x o 5.0
6105–8AB 41.50 13.80 1500 x 70 x x x x 16.0
6105–8AC 41.50 18.40 2000 o 100 x o x x 13.5
6105–8AF 41.50 27.70 3000 o 100 x o x o 6.0
6108–8AB 58.00 18.50 1500 o 100 x x x x 16.0
6108–8AC 58.00 24.00 2000 o 100 x o o x 9.5
6132–6AB 62.00 18.50 1500 x 70 x x x x 16.0
6132–6AC 62.00 25.00 2000 o 100 o o x x 12.5
6132–6AF 62.00 37.00 3000 o 100 x o x o 6.0
6134–6AB 79.00 24.00 1500 o 100 x x x x 16.0
6134–6AC 79.00 31.50 2000 o 100 o x x x 14.5
6136–6AB 95.00 28.00 1500 o 100 o x x x 14.5
6084–8SF 22.00 16.30 3000 o 100 o x x x 14.5
6084–8SH 22.00 22.90 4500 o 100 x o x o 6.0
6084–8SK 22.00 31.00 6000 o 100 x x o o 4.0
6086–8SF 29.50 22.30 3000 o 100 x o o x 9.5
6105–8SC 50.00 25.00 2000 o 100 x x o x 11.5

1FK Kp(I)
60Κ 60Κ [RPM] 1+2 [%] 3+7 4+8 5+9 6+10
6083–6AF 13.30 8.50 3000 x 70 o x x x 14.5
6100–8AF 15.00 10.20 3000 x 70 o x x o 7.5
6101–8AF 22.40 14.40 3000 o 100 o x x o 7.5
6103–8AF 30.00 19.00 3000 o 100 o o x o 5.0


2 Speed Controller Optimization
Speed Controller Optimization 2

The additional smoothing functions in the speed controller loop (damping
mechanical resonance points) are described in section 3. Proceed as follows
when optimizing the speed controller :
1. Tachometer calibration
2. Gain Kp
3. Integral action time TN
4. Drift compensation (offset)
To optimize the speed controller, the equipment must be powered–up.
VR
Therefore observe Section 7 ”Powering–up”.
The specification of the potentiometer scale (in the setting table) is defined as
follows:
8 99/ The settings shown in the diagram

7 8 10 corresponds to 7 scale units.
7
6 10
6
55
44 0
3
3 2 0/1
2 1

07.94

The actual drive speed for 10 V speed setpoint can be varied in the following
range by the rated speed, set under Section 1.2:
Potentiometer Setting range

0.6 nrated nact N 1,8 nrated
T
The following setting ranges are obtained for a 10 V speed setpoint according
to the rated speeds, set in Section 1.2:
nrated
VR 2)
3510 RPM to 10800 RPM
2)
nrated
1760 RPM to 5400 RPM
nrated
2)
1170 RPM to 3600 RPM
nmotor N 1) 1500 2000 3000 4500 6000 [RPM]

nmotor N 2) 2000 3000 6000 [RPM]
1) Rated motor speed

2) Rated speeds which can be set using the closed–loop resolver control
Fig. 2-1 Setting ranges for a

10 V speed setpoint
When the speed setpoint is reduced, the setting range is also appropriately
reduced. We recommend that the motors with a rated speed of 6000 RPM are
operated using a 8 V speed setpoint, in order to limit the selectable maximum
speed.
Warning
! Only the specified setting ranges are permissible!
The setting range and the maximum speed setpoint must be defined, so that
the maximum permissible speed of the connected motor is never exceeded.
The maximum permissible motor speeds are specified in the Motor Planning
Guide.

04.97
2.2 Setting the proportional gain Kp
2.2 Setting the proportional gain Kp
The proportional gain Kp of the speed controller can be set using potentiometer
Kp. The gain, set using the Kp potentiometer, is only insignificantly influenced
by the setting of the TN potentiometer.
Kp
170
160
140
120
100
VR
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Setting Kp–Poti
Fig. 2-2 Proportional gain Kp as a function of the Kp potentiometer
If the electronic weight equalization is active (refer to Section 3.3), then this
proportional gain is increased by the following factor:
Kp (with weight equalization) Iweight equalization

= 1+
Kp IMax

07.94
2.3 Setting the integral action time TN

The speed controller integral action time is set using potentiometerTN.
TN in ms
45
40
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VR Setting,TN potentiometer
Fig. 2-3 Integral action time TN as a function of the TN potentiometer

The drift is compensated for nset = 0 using a potentiometer
Potentiometer drift Control range 45 mV

3.2 Current setpoint limiting
Start–Up, Supplementary Functions 3

3.1 Position processing
The angular encoder interface is not influenced by the controller inhibits
(terminal 63, terminal 64, terminal 65, terminal 663) and the central RESET
(terminal R). For encoder errors and for a power–on reset, the output signals
are switched to a high ohmic state.
VR
Switch for axis 1 Switch for axis 2 Effect
Pole (pair) number, motor 1) S1.x S2.x 2p=2, 4, 6, 8 corr. to p=1, 2, 3, 4
Pole (pair) number, S1.x S2.x 2p=2, 4, 6, 8 corr. to p=1, 2, 3, 4
resolver 1) 4)
Phase sequence of S1.6=OFF S2.6=OFF A before B for clockwise rot. 2)
tracks A, B (angular S1.6=ON S2.6=ON B before A for clockwise rot. 2)
encoder interface)
Pulse number, angular S1.7=OFF S2.7=OFF 512 pulses/revolution
encoder interface S1.7=ON S2.7=ON 1024 pulses/revolution
Zero offset 3) S1.8+S11.x=OFF S2.8+S11.x=OFF Shift by 0 mechanical
S1.8=ON S2.8=ON Shift by 5.625 mechanical
S11.3=ON S11.8=ON Shift by 45 mechanical
3.2 Current setpoint limiting
Function Switch for axis 1 Switch for axis 2 Effect

Current setpoint limiting by 1 S12.x=OFF S12.x=OFF Limiting to 100%
Selecting terminal 96 or for S12.4=ON S12.8=ON Limiting to 75%
SETTING–UP operation S12.3=ON S12.7=ON Limiting to 55%
Caution! S12.3+4=ON S12.7+8=ON Limiting to 45%
The same limit is effective S12.2=ON S12.6=ON Limiting to 25%
for both functions. S12.2+3=ON S12.6+7=ON Limiting to 20%
S12.1=ON S12.5=ON Limiting to 5%
1) The pole pair numbers must be set before commissioning (refer to Section 1)
2) When viewing the drive shaft end
3) The resulting zero offset is the sum of all of the selected offsets
4) The number zero marks per mechanical revolution is the same as pole pair number P of the resolver

07.94
3.3 Other functions
3.3 Other functions

Function Switch for Switch for Effect
axis 1 axis 2
Integrator inhibit, speed controller S5.1=OFF/ON S5.3=OFF/ON Enable/inhibit
Integrator inhibit, I controller 1) S5.2=OFF/ON S5.4=OFF/ON Enable/inhibit
Fault message S5.5=OFF/ON S5.5=OFF/ON Changeover, fault/ready signal
Master/slave S5.6=OFF/ON 2nd axis as slave 3)
Timer 2) S5.7=OFF/ON S5.8=OFF/ON 1 s / 300 ms
Function 4) Component for Component for Condition when shipped
axis 1 axis 2
Smoothing functions:
Speed setpoint C1355) C1485) 33 nF corresponds to 220 s
Speed actual value C1435) C1495) –––
Speed controller C1345) C1475) 1 nF corresponds to 160 s
TN limiting in the speed controller R4486) R4546) –––
Weight equalization pos. ISET R3496) R3566) –––
Weight equalization neg. ISET R3486) R3556) –––
VR
Calculating the Speed setpoint tset = C135(C148) 6.67 k
smoothing time Speed actual value tact = C143(C149) 6.67 k
constants Speed actual value tnreg = C134(C147) 160 k
The following components are mounted on the component side (”Page 2”):
C135, C143, C134, R348, R349, R454
The following components are provided on the solder side (”Page 1”):
C148, C149, C147, R355, R356, R448
Dimensioning ext. Refer to Section 4.2.

speed setpoint
smoothing

3.3 Other functions
Parameterizing the Iweight equalization/Imax

electronic weight
equalization Illegal range
1.0
0.8
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.03
0.02
RX [k]
0.01
5 10 20 33 56 100 150 220 390 680
47 68 470
Fig. 3-1 Supplementary current setpoint for electronic weight equalization

VR
Master–slave Closed–loop current controlled operation must always be selected for the slave
operation axis using terminal 22. On the 2–axis control, master and slave can only be
operated with mutually opposite directions of rotation.
When using a 1–axis control as master, the directions of rotation of the master
and slave can either be opposing or the same. This is selected by connecting
the current setpoint output (terminal 258, terminal 15) to the current setpoint
differential input (terminal24, terminal20).
1) This function is only effective in closed–loop current controlled operation; in the closed–loop speed controlled operation,
the current controller integrator is always enabled
2) For terminal 65 and “speed controller at its endstop” monitoring
3) Caution: The master and slave have opposing directions of rotation!

4) Adaptation only for difficult operating conditions.
Adaptation is realized, when required by soldering in SMD components
5) SMD component, packaging type 0805
6) SMD component, packaging type 0204/mini melf; equivalent, can be replaced by packaging type 0805

3.4 Operating feed modules without a connected motor
3.4 Operating feed modules without a connected motor

Two–axis modules can be operated as single–axis module using the subse-
quently described measures.
In order to permit correct operation of the drive group, the monitoring functions
“motor temperature” and “encoder fault” must be suppressed at the axis which
is not connected.
In this case, the following signals on the encoder interface (X311/X312) of the
axis which is not connected, must be connected together using jumpers.
Measure Signal Pin Connect Pin Signal

with
1 TEMP_PLUS 13 25 TEMP_MINUS
2 SIN_PLUS 3 9 RES_POS
3 SIN_MINUS 4 11 RES_NEG
VR
Warning
! If measure one is not implemented, the group signal ”I2t/motor temperature” of
the I/R or UE module will be set to fault (overtemperature).
If measure 2.3 is not implemented, the ready relay of the I/R and UE module
will signal “fault/not ready”.

04.97
4.1 Overview
Setpoint Interfaces 4
4.1 Overview
Definitions:
X Optimum, taking into account the setpoint input properties VR

Possible
Not permitted, also, in some cases, not possible
Table 4-1 Main setpoint – supplementary setpoints
Mode Setpoint Terminal 56/14 Terminal 24/20 Terminal 258/151)

Cl.–loop speed controlled Main setpoint X
Suppl. setpoint X
Cl.–loop current controlled Main setpoint X
Suppl. setpoint
Slave, cl.–loop curr. contr. Main setpoint X
current setpoint input
Suppl. setpoint
Master, cl.–loop speed contr. Main setpoint X
current setpoint output
Suppl. setpoint
1) only for a 1–axis version,

for 2–axis version, is realized using an internal module connection

07.94
4.2 External speed setpoint smoothing
4.2 External speed setpoint smoothing

Locations C135 and C148 are provided on the module for the internal speed
setpoint smoothing (refer to Section 3.3). The locations are intended for SMD
capacitors. Time constants of approx. 1 ms can be achieved. Higher time
constants must be realized by connecting suitable components at the speed
setpoint input outside the module.
We recommend the following circuit configuration:
20k
Rext=2kΩ 20k
–
T. 56
VR Cext
T. 14 +

Rext=2kΩ 20k
20k
External Internal speed

speed setpoint smoothing setpoint input
Fig. 4-1 External setpoint smoothing
The following is valid for the smoothing time constant of the speed setpoint:
tset,total = tset + tset,external
tset = internal speed setpoint smoothing (refer to Section 3.3)
tset,external = Cext 2 Rext = Cext 4 kΩ

03.96

VR

07.94
Space for notes

03.96

VR

07.94
Space for notes

03.96
7 Powering–Up
Powering–Up 7
Main switch: OPEN
Adapt the module to the motor,

standard settings: Section 1
Start–up with the battery box

VR
Connect term. 48, 63, 64, 663 to term. 9
Switch (open) between term.65 and term. 9
Term.56/14 at the battery box
Check the motor/PWM inverter connection:
L1, L2, L3 cyclically interchanged?
Main switch: CLOSE Power connection cable
Encoder cable
Settings of the pole pair numbers for motor
Set the setpoint to 0 V at the battery box and resolver
Main switch: Open

Briefly energize term. 65 (jog)
Open connection between

terminal 63 and terminal 9
Does the yes
fault
motor
accelerate?
no
Enter a low setpoint (e.g. 0.1 V)

Briefly energize term. 65
Does the no → fault

drive run
continuously?
yes

07.94
7 Powering–Up
Energize terminal 65
Optimize the speed controller or set known

values: Section 2
Inhibit terminal 65
When required commission supplementary

funtions: Section 3
VR
Start–up completed
Inhibit terminal 63!
Switch: OFF
Open the connection between terminals 64, 65

and terminal 9
Disconnect the battery box from the terminals
56/14

04.97
Service and Diagnostics 8

Test sockets Terminal 16 = Iact and terminal75 =nact are available for measurements.
Normalization: Term.16: 10 V corresponds to Imax
Term.75: 10 V corresponds to nrated (refer to Section 2.1)
LED display There is an LED on the front panel for fault diagnostics.
Depending on the mode selected, either ready or fault is displayed.
VR
Table 8-1 LED display
LED dark LED bright

Effect in the “ready” mode Both axes of a 2–axis module are A minimum of one axis is inhibited via
enabled. the terminal or due to a fault message.
Effect in the “fault” mode” None of the two axes of a two–axis A minimum of one axis is inhibited
module is inhibited due to a fault due to a fault message.
message.
Table 8-2 Causes of fault messages
Fault Effect
Speed controller at its endstop Saved 1)
Encoder fault Saved 1)
Heat sink overtemperature Pre–alarm at the NE module, saved after 4 s 1)
Motor overtemperature Pre–alarm at the NE module, not saved
1) saved=pulse inhibit

X391/X392 To support diagnostics, the following signals are available at the connector of
the angular encoder interface.2)
Signal level: HCMOS / 5V
Table 8-3 Signals for fault analysis
Signal Name Pin Status L=Low Status H=High

READY Hardware RESET 1 Power supply o.k. Power supply voltage not o.k.:
–run–up after power–on
–P5 defective
ER_IL I2t monitoring 9 No fault Fault: Heatsink temperature too high
ER_TNR Speed controller end stop 10 No fault Fault: Speed controller is already at
its limit since 1s/300ms
EN_WSG Enable angular encoder 11 Angular encoder interface Angular encoder interface enabled
interface signals inhibited Signals A, B, R valid
Signals A, B, R high ohmic
VR state
–hardware RESET active
–encoder fault
Warning
! 2) Internal module signals for fault analysis!
Not intended for use in external modules!

04.97
9.1 Terminals
Attachments 9
9.1 Terminals
Table 9-1 Terminals
Ter. Designa- Type Max. cross–section

Function Typ. voltage/limit value
No. tion 2) 1) which can be connected
56 X321/322 Speed setpoint I 0V...10V 1.5 mm2
14 X321/322 Differential input I 1.5 mm2
24 X321/322 Speed/current setpoint I 0V...10V 1.5 mm2
VR
20 X321/322 Differential input I 1.5 mm2
75 X321/322 Speed actual value O 0V...10V 1.5 mm2
15 X321/322 Reference potential O 0V 1.5 mm2
16 X321/322 Active current actual value O 0V...10V 1.5 mm2
96 X321/322 Power–on Iset limiting I +13V...30V 1.5 mm2
9 X321/322 Enable potential O +24V 1.5 mm2
22 X321/322 Changeover, speed/curr. control I +13V...30V 1.5 mm2
9 X331 Enable potential O 24V 1.5 mm2
663 X331 Pulse enable I +21V...30V 1.5 mm2
AS1 X331 Relay, start inhibit NC max. 250VAC/1A 1.5 mm2
AS2 X331 Floating contact NC 1.5 mm2
9 X332 Enable potential O 30VDC/1A 1.5 mm2
65.1 X332 Controller enable, axis 1 I +13V...30V 1.5 mm2
9 X332 Enable potential 3) O 24V 1.5 mm2
65.2 X332 Controller enable, axis 2 3) I +13V...30V 1.5 mm2
For the 1–axis version, the following assignment is obtained for X332:
Table 9-2 Terminals
Ter. Designa- Type Max. cross–section

Function Typ. voltage/limit value
No. tion 2) 1) which can be connected
9 X332 Enable potential O +24V 1.5 mm2
65.1 X332 Controller enable I +13V...30V 1.5 mm2
15 X332 Reference potential O 0V 1.5 mm2
258 X332 Current setpoint O 0V...10V 1.5 mm2
1) I = Input, O = Output, NC = NC contact, NO = NO contact (for signal: closed= high, open= low)
2) X321=1st axis, X322=2nd axis
3) only for 2–axis version

07.94
9.2 Layout diagrams
9.2 Layout diagrams
9.2.1 Layout diagram, resolver control
X351
X301
S5
VR
S3
S6
X321
View of the component side (side 2)
Smoothing/axis 1
R323
C172
R454
R652
R348
R422 R623
R675
R566 R374
C134
R349 R371
R518
R151
C143
C135
C6
R624
S11
S2
S1
S4
Fig. 9-1 Component side

12.94
9.2 Layout diagrams
View of the solder side (side 1)
VR
SMD components
Smoothing/axis 2
C148 R355
R448
R356
C149
C147
Fig. 9-2 Solder side

07.94
9.2 Layout diagrams
9.2.2 Layout diagram, DIL switch

S1 1
Pole number, motor
2
3
4
Pole number, resolver
5 NC Axis1
6 Phase sequence of tracks A, B (ang. encoder)
7 Pulse number angular encoder interface
8 Zero offset
S2 1
Pole number, motor
2
3
4
Pole number, resolver
5 NC Axis 2
6 Phase sequence of tracks A, B (ang. encoder)
7 Pulse number angular encoder interface
8 Zero offset
S3 1
Current actual value normalization
2
3
4
VR 5
6
Current controller gain (active current)
Axis1
7
8
Current controller gain (reactive current)
9
10
S4 1
2
3
Speed actual value normalization, axis 1
4
5
Axis 1 and 2
6
7
Speed actual value normalization, axis 2
8
S5 1 Integrator inhibit N controller, axis 1

2 Integrator inhibit I controller, axis 1
3 Integrator inhibit N controller, axis 2
4 Integrator inhibit I controller, axis 2
5 Ready/fault message Axis 1 and 2
6 2nd axis as slave; is only valid for 2–axis control
7 Timer stage, axis 1
8 Timer stage, axis 2
S6 1
Current actual value normalization
2
3
4
5
Current controller gain (active current)
6 Axis 2
7
8
9
Current controller gain (reactive current)
10
S11 1
2
3 Zero offset, axis 1
4
5
6
Axis 1 and 2
7
8 Zero offset, axis 2
9
10
S12 1
2
Current setpoint limiting, axis 1
3
4
5
Axis 1 and 2
6
Current setpoint limiting, axis 2
7
8
Fig. 9-3 DIL switch

04.97
9.3 Connector assignment
9.3.1 X311/X312, encoder interface axis 1/axis 2
Resolver control 25–pin subminiature D plug connector, screw locking UNC4–40

Connected via a pre–assembled cable
Table 9-3 Connector assignment X311/X312
Signal Resolver control Motor

SIN_PLUS 3 1
SIN_MINUS 4 2
M 5, 8, 24 –
COS_PLUS 6 11
COS_MINUS 7 12
RES_POS 9 10
VR
RES_NEG 11 7
TEMP_PLUS 13 8
TEMP_MINUS 25 9
Refer to Section 3.4 for axes which are not used.

07.94
9.3.2 X391/X392, angular encoder interface, axis 1/axis 2
Resolver control 15–pin subminiature D plug connector, latch locking

Connected via a pre–assembled cable
Table 9-4 Connector assignment X391/X392
Signal Comment Type Resolver control Numeric FM–NC

M AEI 1) Ref. pin 2 11 –9
A AEI 1) RS422A 3 1 –15
A_INV AEI 1) RS422A 4 9 –14
B AEI 1) RS422A 6 10 –13
B_INV AEI 1) RS422A 7 3 –12
R AEI 1) RS422A 12 4 –10
R_INV AEI 1) RS422A 13 12 –11
only X392 2)
VR READY HCMOS ! 1 NC – NC
ER_IKL Diagnostics 2) HCMOS ! 9 NC – NC
ER_TNL Diagnostics 2) HCMOS ! 10 NC – NC
EN_WSG Diagnostics 2) HCMOS ! 11 NC – NC
1) Standard angular encoder interface (AEI), type: RS422A/driver: 75ALS192
Warning
! 2) The internal module signals for fault analysis!
These are not intended for use in external modules!

10.00
Index
Index M
Master/slave, VR/3-16, VR/3-17
Mode of operation
master speed controlled, VR/3-16, VR/3-18
A slave current controlled, VR/3-16, VR/3-17,
VR/3-18
Adaptation tables, VR/1-5
Motion of operation, Master speed controlled,
VR/3-17
C
Component side, VR/3-16, VR/9-30 P
Connector assignment, VR/9-33
Phase sequence of tracks A, B (WSG), VR/3-15
Current actual value normalization, VR/1-5
Pole numbers, VR/1-3
Current controller gain, VR/1-5
Position processing, VR/3-15
Current controller settings, VR/1-5
Powering–up, VR/7-25
Current setpoint limiting, VR/3-15
Proportional gain Kp, VR/2-13
Pulse number, angular encoder interface,
VR/3-15 VR
D
Diagnostics, VR/8-27
Drift compensation, VR/2-14 S
Service and diagnostics, VR/8-27
Setpoint interfaces, VR/4-19
E Setting elements, with standard interface,
VR/4-19, VR/4-20
Electronic weight equalization, VR/3-17
Setting the integral action time, VR/2-14
Smoothing functions, VR/3-16
Solder side, VR/3-16, VR/9-31
F Speed actual value normalization, VR/1-4
Fault message, VR/3-16 Standard settings, VR/1-3
Standard start–up, VR/1-3
Start–up
short start–up, VR/1-3
G standard start–up, VR/1-3
Gain Kp, VR/2-13
T
I Tachometer calibration, VR/2-12
Integral action time limiting, VR/3-16, VR/3-18 Terminals, VR/9-29
Integral action time/Speed controller, VR/2-14 Test sockets, VR/8-27, VR/8-28
Integrator inhibit, VR/3-16 Timer, VR/3-16
TN (integral action time), VR/2-14
L
Z
Layout diagram, component side, VR/9-30
Layout diagram, solder side, VR/9-31 Zero offset, VR/3-15
LED display, VR/8-27

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition VR/i-1
07.94
Index
Space for notes
VR

VR/i-2 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
Main Spindle Modules (HS)
1 First Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/1-3

1.1 Start–up guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/1-4
1.2 Start–up instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/1-7
1.3 Operator and display elements, control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/1-8
1.4 Overview, setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/1-12
1.5 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/1-13
2 Determining and Setting the System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-15
2.1 Motor and drive converter data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-15
2.1.1 System configuration with standard motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-15
2.1.2 System configuration with special motors (non–catalog motors) . . . . HS/2-17
2.1.3 System configuration with star/delta motors, 2 motors . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-20
2.2 Standard applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-25 HS
2.2.1 Operating display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-25
2.2.2 Firmware version and module version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-26
2.2.3 Setting parameters for standard applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-27
2.3 Additional applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-30
2.3.1 Orientated spindle stop (using NC auxiliary function M19) . . . . . . . . . HS/2-30
2.3.2 C axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-31
2.3.3 Spindle positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-31
2.3.4 Open–loop torque controlled mode (master/slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-44
2.3.5 Monitor function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-48
2.3.6 HPC axis (FW 2.00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-48
2.3.7 Maximum current limiting (I2t limiting, from FW 3.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/2-54
3 Parameterizing the Drive Converter Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/3-55
3.1 Analog speed setpoint interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/3-55
3.2 Input terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/3-58
3.2.1 Permanently–wired terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/3-58
3.2.2 Freely–programmable terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/3-59
3.3 Output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/3-61
3.3.1 Permanently–wired relay functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/3-61
3.3.2 Freely–programmable relay functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/3-61
3.3.3 Variable relay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/3-64
3.3.4 Motor encoder signals for NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/3-65
3.3.5 Analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/3-66
4 Controller Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/4-69
4.1 Speed controller optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/4-69
4.2 Current controller optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/4-75

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition HS–i
10.00
07.94
5 Diagnostics and Fault Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/5-77

5.1 Diagnostic resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/5-77
5.1.1 Measured value displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/5-77
5.1.2 Status displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/5-78
5.1.3 Diagnostic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/5-81
5.1.4 Test sockets X1, X2, IR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/5-82
5.1.5 Minimum/maximum value memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/5-84
5.1.6 Transient recorder function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/5-84
5.1.7 Current/Hz control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/5-86
5.2 Fault analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/5-87
5.2.1 Fault display, fault acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/5-87
5.2.2 Fault message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/5-88
6 Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/6-93
6.1 Flow diagram for short start–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/6-94
6.2 Code numbers for power modules and standard motors . . . . . . . . . . . HS/6-99
6.3 Overview of connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/6-103
6.4 Connector assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/6-108
6.5 Addresses, RAM variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/6-112
HS 6.6 Setting and monitoring data (parameter list) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/6-113

HS–ii SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
04.97
07.94 Main Spindle Modules (HS)
1 First Steps
First Steps 1
Warning
! Perfect and safe operation of this equipment assumes that it is professionally
transported, professional stored, installed and mounted as well as careful ope-
rator control and service.
If this warning information is not observed, this can result in severe bodily injury
or material damage.
The modules contain components which can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge. Please observe the ESDS information in the foreword.
Note HS
The module Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1121–0BA11–0AA1 can only be used
with firmware from 3.00.
The modules, Order No. [MLFB]:
6SN1121–0BA11–0AA0
6SN1121–0BA12–0AA0
6SN1121–0BA13–0AA0
can only be used up to firmware 2.xx.
Note
Start–up software is available to commission the main spindle motor control
with analog setpoint interface.
Ordering data for software:
Refer to Catalog NC 60
Order No.: E86060–K4460–A101–A8
Ordering data for documentation:
Start–up software for main spindle and induction motor modules
Order No. 6SN1197–0AA30–0AP1
Note
Motor definition
Standard motor: The motors are listed in the Siemens Catalog.
Third–party motor: Motors manufactured by companies other than Siemens.
Special motor: Motor manufactured by Siemens to special customer
specifications.

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition HS/1-3
Main Spindle Modules (HS) 12.94
07.94
1.1 Start–up guidelines
Structure of the The Start–up Guide is structured in the sequence of the actual start–up steps.
Start–up Guide
When commissioning systems for standard applications, where the drive con-
verter interfaces (Section 1.5) and controller optimization settings when supplied
are generally adequate, only the start–up steps which are printed in bold, are of
significance.
1 First steps 2 System configuration 3 Drive converter interfaces 4 Controller optimization
Start–up Motor and drive Analog speed setpoint Speed controller

guidelines converter data sets interface
– Standard motors Current controller
Start–up info./ – Special–purpose Input terminals
instructions motors
– Star/delta motors, Output terminals
Operator control and 2 motors
display elements,
control parameters Standard applications
HS Overview, setting Other applications

data – Auxiliary function M19
– C axis
Connections – Spindle positioning
– Torque–controlled
operation
– Monitor function
– HPC axis
5 Diagnostics, fault analysis
Diagnostic resources Fault analysis
6 Appendix
Flow diagram for short start–up Connector assignments
Code numbers for power modules Address, RAM variables

and standard motors
Setting and monitoring data
Overview of connections
Fig. 1-1 Start–up steps

HS/1-4 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
Parameter list
Warning
! The settings of parameters, which are not in the parameter list
(refer to Section 6.6), may not be changed.
The parameter descriptions are information units, in the form of tables.

The parameter sequence represents the procedure when parameterizing the
equipment.
Table 1-1 Example of a parameter list
Parameter attributes
Number Change P–051 Setting range Description
becomes
Mot. 1 Mot. 2 effective
Online,
RESET,
after Parameter name
4 Value range
P–040.1 P–270.1 initializa- Brief parameter description
10 Dimensions
tion, FW x.xx
after HS
conversion
Parameter
attributes Number
– Mot. 1
generally valid parameters,
parameters for motor 1 (star) when using star/delta
motors or 2 motors
– Mot. 2
parameters for motor 2 (delta) when using star/delta motors or 2 motors
– (P–001)
display parameters
– P–040.1
gearbox–stage dependent parameters

07.94
Changes becomes effective

– online
Change immediately becomes effective
– RESET
The unit must be powered–down and up again
– after conversion
A conversion program is initiated by setting to 1H; the parameter can
then be automatically reset to 0H (P–143, P–177, P–237, P–239).
– after initialization
Initialization is initiated by setting P–097 to 1H.
P–051
Write–protected parameters
Write protection is removed by entering 4H or 10H
Setting range For several control words, the functions are activated by setting bits.
Example: Bit 8 0100H or bit 6 0040H
Bit 9 0200H or bit 7 0080H
HS A combination of several functions is entered in the form of hexadecimal
additions.
Example: Bit 8 + bit 9 0300H or bit 6 + bit 7 00C0H
Description
FW x.xx
Firmware release–dependent coding of function and parameter extensions.
The extension is available from the specified firmware release onwards.

10.00
03.96
1.2 Start–up instructions
Start–up Using
Operator control and display elements (refer to Section 1.3)

RS232C interface with an IBM AT–compatible computer and
start–up software (refer to the foreword)
Re–initializing If an already initialized drive converter is to be re–initialized, then the following

the drive converter procedure must be followed:
(if required)
If required, save the setting data (parameters)
Remove the write protection: Set P–051 to 4H
Start initialization: Set P–097 to 0H
Overwrite the parameters in the drive–machine data memory:
Set P–052 to 1H and wait until P–052 resets itself back to 0H.
Power–on reset:
Power–down the unit and approx. 2 s after the display has gone dark,
power–up the unit again: P–095 or P–096 must be displayed.
Initialize (Section 2.1) HS

Replacing firm- From version V2.00, the firmware can be replaced using the user–prompted
ware (if necessary) start–up software for main spindle and induction motor modules.
Firmware release Module
Before FW 3.00 6SN1121–0BA1–0AA0
From FW 3.00 6SN1121–0BA11–0AA1
Procedure:
Save the setting data (parameters)

Replace the firmware using the start–up program
Initialize with the pulses and controller inhibited (Section 2.1)
Re–load the setting data (parameters) which was saved
Save the setting data in the drive–machine data memory (Section 1.3)
Starting–up The drive converter setting data (parameters) can be saved on floppy disk using
series machines, the start–up software. The following procedure must be maintained for series
replacing modules, start–up of additional drive converters:
replacing 1. – Initialize with the pulses and controller inhibited:
components Enter P–095, power module code according to Tab. 6–1. 1)
– The motor code number and motor encoder pulse number are saved
on the floppy disk, which means that they do not have to be entered.
– Start initialization.
2. Load the setting data from the floppy disk and save.
1) From FW 3.00, power modules with Order No. [MLFB] 6SN112–1A0–A1, are automatically recognized.
It is then no longer possible/necessary to enter P–095.

1.3 Operator and display elements, control parameters
Operator and The following operator and display elements are provided on the front panel to
display elements start–up and parameterize the SIMODRIVE 611 analog system MSD module:
3 operator keys ( + , P and – key)
6–digit LCD display

The operator element functions are shown using as an example, parameter
P–039.
Gearbox–stage dependent parameters are listed with sub–parameter numbers
(e.g. P–039.1 to P–039.8).
<< – P + P >>
< – + >
HS Parameter number
– P +
Sub–parameter number +
P P
Parameter value
< – + >
<< – P + P >>

04.97
Control
parameters
Note
If data save (P–052) is interrupted due to power failure or power–down, then
the modified values are lost, and the drive converter displays fault message
“F–07” after it is powered–up again. The parameter values can be re–set after
fault message “F–07” has been acknowledged (refer to Section 5.2.2).
Table 1-2 Control parameters

P–051 – Online – 0...7FFF hex Write protection
P–151 Write protection is removed by entering 4H or 10H.
P–052 – Online 4 0...1 hex Transferring parameters into the FEPROM
P–152 Parameters are transferred into the drive–machine
data memory by setting to 1H.
The parameter is reset to 0H after transfer.
P–053 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Control word
Bit Value
0000H Ready relay pulls–in if there is no fault
and the pulses and controller are ena-
0 bled.
0001H
The ready relay pulls–in if there is no
fault.
HS
0000H For a ramp–function generator fast stop,
the speed setpoint is digitally set to zero
1 but the motor remains magnetized.
The pulses are cancelled after the drive
0002H has been shut down.
0000H Speed setpoint smoothing inactive
4
0010H Speed setpoint smoothing active
0000H Speed actual value smoothing inactive
5 0020H Speed actual value smoothing active,
if at the same time
P090 bit 3=0 FW 3.0
Inverter clock
Bit 10/Bit 9/Bit 8 cycle frequency
[kHz]
0000H 3.2
0100H 2.8 FW 3.0
0200H 6.3
8 0300H 5.0 FW 3.0
9 0400H 4.7
10
0500H 3.9 FW 3.0
0600H 7.8
0700H 5.9 FW 3.0
Note:
A pulse frequency > 3.2 kHz is
only possible if the drive is
de–rated (refer to Table 1–3).

04.97
07.94

0000H Fault message F–79 not suppressed,
P–053 4 11 Fault message F–79 suppressed
0800H
Ramp–function generator tracking active
0000H
12 Ramp–function generator tracking
1000H
inactive
Bipolar speed setpoint evaluation
0000H
13 Unipolar speed setpoint evaluation
2000H
FW 2.00
Cyclic parameter number display active
0000H
15 Cyclic parameter number display
8000H
inactive FW 3.0
Bit Value
0000H Parameter format hex display
0001H Parameter format dec display
0 CAUTION!
Parameter setting limits are not
effective in the hex format!
0000H Fault message F–09 activated
HS 1 0002H Fault message F–09 suppressed
FW 2.00
0000H Extended monitoring for F-09 inactive
2 Extended monitoring for F-09 active
0004H (short–circuit M/P5) FW 3.00
0000H Speed controller clock cycle [s]
RESET 10
Normal operation 1000
HPC axis without filter 500
with filter 600
0008H Possible from FW 3.0
3 Normal operation 525
HPC axis without filter 300
with filter 350
Bit 3 can only be changed after first
saving on the FEPROM and then
power–off/power–on
Online 10 0000H Speed controller without integrator inhibit
4 Speed controller with integrator inhibit
0010H (for M19)
0000H Fault message F-18 suppressed
5
0020H Fault message F-18 active (FW 3.00)
0000H Integrator, speed controller when limiting
is set to the difference between the
6 torque limit and P component
Integrator, speed controller held when
0040H limiting, FW 2.00
RESET 10 0100H A basic flux model is switched–in by
setting this bit. This results in faster
and more uniform acceleration if the
8
drive starts with a speed setpoint
when the controller is enabled.
RESET 10 9 Selects square wave evaluation, motor

encoder
0000H Sine/cosine
0200H Square wave

04.97
Various inverter clock cycle frequencies can be parameterized; please observe

the appropriate current de–rating.
Table 1-3 Currents as a function of the inverter clock cycle frequency, MSD analog fT
In/Is6/Imax In/Is6/Imax In/Is6/Imax In/Is6/Imax

Power Order Nos. in A in A in A in A
module 6SN1123–1AA0–
type 6SN1124–1AA0– Code fT=3.20 kHz fT=4.70 kHz fT=6.30 kHz fT=7.80 kHz
6SN1135–1BA1– No.
50 A –0CA 6 24/32/32 20/26/26 15/20/20 10/14/14

80 A –0DA 7 30/40/51 26/34/44 21/28/36/ 17/23/29
108 A –0LA 13 45/60/76 39/52/65 32/43/54 26/34/43
45/60/76 39/52/65 32/43/54 26/34/43
120 A –0GA 8
60/80/102 51/68/86 41/54/69 31/42/53
160 A –0EA 9
85/110/127 73/95/109/ 60/78/90 48/63/72
200 A –0FA 10 101/127/163 81/102/131/ 62/78/101
120/150/193
300 A –0JA 11 200/250/257 169/211/217 135/169/174 104/130/134
400 A –0KA 12
In/Is6/Imax In/Is6/Imax In/Is6/Imax In/Is6/Imax

module 6SN1123–1AA0–
type 6SN1124–1AA0– Code fT=2.80 kHz fT=3.90 kHz fT=5.00 kHz fT=5.90 kHz
6SN1135–1BA1– No. HS
From FW 3.00
50 A –0CA 6 24/32/32 22/29/29 19/25/25 16/21/21
80 A –0DA 7 30/40/51 28/37/48 25/33/42 22/30/38
108 A –0LA 13 45/60/76 42/56/71 37/50/63 34/45/57
45/60/76 42/56/71 37/50/63 34/45/57
120 A –0GA 8
60/80/102 56/74/95 49/65/83 43/58/73
160 A –0EA 9
85/110/127 79/103/119 71/91/106 63/82/95
200 A –0FA 10 111/139/179 98/122/157 86/108/139
120/150/193
300 A –0JA 11 200/250/257 185/232/238 163/203/209 144/180/185
400 A –0KA 12

HS
BERO
HS/1-12
Fig. 1-2
1.4

1.4 Overview, setting data
X433 System configuration Speed setpoint Controller optimization
P–141
HPC P–109, P–110, P–149 P–093, P–094 P–053, P–091, P–092, P–106,
Motor encoder sensing P–107, P–108, P–111, P–112,
P–036, P–037, P–038, P–098, P–267, P–268 HPC axis P–117, P–118, P–119
X412
Motor temperature sensing Control parameters Function parameter 1 Position controller
Setting data
P–063, P–064, P–065, P–291
Overview, setting data

P–141, P–142, P–143 P–126, P–129, P–130, P–131 P–134, P–135, P–136,
Spindle encoder sensing P–137, P–138, P–139
P–141 Position setpoint Function parameter 2
X432 Spindle positioning P–144, P–145, P–146, P–148, P–149
Motor encoder output P–121, P–122, P–123,
P–033 P–124, P–125
X421 M19 Speed Rounding– Speed controller Torque limiting

P–054, P–055, P–056, P–058
56 P–062 setpoint off P–039, P–040, P–041, P–042, P–043, P–050
Analog Speed setpoint smoothing P gain, integral action time
14 P–019 P–248, P–269, P–270, P–271, P–272, P–273, P–290
setpoint P–014, P–015, P–024, P–030 P–018, P–053 P–031, P–032, P–265, P–266
24 P–053, P–258 Adaption Digital Curr.controller
Channel C axis Ramp–funct. Maximum P–195, P–196, P–198, P–199, P–201, P–202 filter
8 P–203, P–283, P–284, P–285, P–286, P–288
selection P–114, P–115, P–149 generator speed
P–289, P–293 P–103, P–104, P–117 P–116, P–120, P–278, P–292
P–113 Torque setpoint
P–048, P–049, P–068 P–016, P–017 P–029, P–264 Torque setpoint smoothing P–118, P–276, P–277
X431 P–280, P–281
P–035, P–044, P–045, P–046, P–075, P–274
E1 P–081 Slip monitoring
E2 P–082 P–340, P–341, P–343, Initialization
P–344, P–345, P–346
E3 P–083
Standard motor Special motor Star/delta motor,
E4 P–084 Osc. gen. Stop without 2 motors
SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
Freely–pr. P–095, P–095, P–095,

reverse rotation
E5 P–085 enable P–096, Initialization P–096, Initialization P–096, Initialization
P–154, P–155, P–022, P–261 P–098, parameters P–098, parameters P–098, parameters
E6 P–086 terminals
P–156, P–157 P–097 P–097 P–097
E7 P–087 P–159,P–160, P–159, P–160,
General control parameters
E8 P–088 P–161,P–162, P–161, P–162,
P–163,P–164, Motor data P–163, P–164,
E9 P–089 P–051, P–052, P–053, P–090, P–151, P–152
P–165,P–166, set P–165, P–166, Motor data set,
X441 P–167,P–168, P–167, P–168, star–motor
P–169,P–170, P–169, P–170, motor 1
A11
P–241 Freely–pr. Relay signals P–171,P–172, P–171, P–172,

P–021, P–023, P–027, P–047, P–260, P–173,P–174, P–173, P–174,
A21 P–242 relay
P–175,P–176, P–175, P–176,
P–262, P–263
A31 functions Relay P–256, P–257 Transfer Transfer
P–243 P–177 P–177
functions motor data motor data
A41 P–244 Variable relay function P–219, P–220,
A51 P–245 P–185, P–186, P–187, P–221, P–222,
P–188, P–189, P–190, P–223, P–224,
A61 P–246 P–191, P–192, P–193, P–225, P–226, Motor data set,
Invert relay function P–247 P–194, P–247 P–227, P–228, delta–motor
X451 P–229, P–230, motor 2
A91 Analog outputs Diagnostic functions P–231, P–232,
A ? ! dn/dt monitoring P–20 P–233, P–234,
D P–012, P–013, P–026,
A92 P–066, P–067, P–068, min/max P–235, P–236,
P–179, P–181 P–238
P–069, P–071, P–078 Transient recorder function
P–079 P–206 bis P–218 Transfer
07.94
10.00
04.97
Current/Hz control P–237, P–239 motor data
X1 Test sockets
A P–311, P–312, P–313
P–180 Enable
X2 D P–072, P–073, P–074, Zero mark/Bero changeover
P–076, P–077, P–080 P–320, P–321
04.97
1.5 Connections
1.5 Connections
X432 Spindle encoder, BERO X412 RON 350

or encoder output at the motor
NC encoder
Warning! Test sockets
! DAU 3 X1 X2 DAU 4
It is not permissible that a spindle IR M

encoder is connected to the MSD
control boards (Order No. X421 56 X451 A91
[MLFB] 6SN11–BA13–0A0)! nset1 DAU 1
14 M
If this is not observed, the unit and
spindle encoder could be damaged. 24 A92
nset2 DAU 2
8 M
Inputs Outputs
X431 663 IF X441 289
65 RF A11 nact = nset1)
81 HSS A21 Md < Mdx1)
E1 2nd limit value1) A31 nact < nmin1)
E2 TH = 01) A41 nact < nx1)
E3 RESET1) A51 Motor overtemp.1)
E4 M191) A61 Drive convert. overtemp.1) HS
E5 Md–controlled1) 672
Ready/fault
E6 Oscillation1) 673
E7 Gearbox st. bit 01) 674
E8 Gearbox st. bit 11)
E9 Gearbox st. bit 21) AS1 Signaling contact
9 Enable voltage AS2 Start inhibit
X411 RS232C X4332) BERO

interface connection
LC display
+ P –
X151 Equipment bus X351
P 600
DC link
M 600
Motor terminals U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2 PE3
Fig. 1-3 Connections
1) Freely–programmable terminals and relay functions as supplied

2) Only for Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1121–0BA11–0AA1

07.94
1.5 Connections
Space for notes
HS

10.00
2.1 Motor and drive converter data sets
Determining and Setting the System

Configuration 2
Warning
! Incorrect setting values in P–098 can cause the motor to accelerate up to inad-
missibly high speeds and terminal 64 (NE) and terminal 65 (controller inhibit)
are ineffective. Only terminal 663 (axis–specific pulse cancellation) “open” is
effective.
2.1 Motor and drive converter data sets HS
2.1.1 System configuration with standard motors
Initialization
Table 2-1 Initialization
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–095 – After – 6...13 dec Power module code number
initialization Default: 7 (Section 6.2) from FW 3.00
Default: 31)
P–096 – After – 101...429 dec Motor code number
initialization Default: 101 (Section 6.2)
P–098 – After – 128...4096 dec Encoder pulse number, motor measuring sy-
initialization stem
Default: 2048 for 1PH4, 1PH6
Adapt for 1PH2 and toothed–wheel encoder.
P–097 – – – 0...1 hex Initialization
“SEtUP” message is displayed.
The selected motor/power module combination is
loaded into the drive–machine data memory.
“P–000” is displayed after successful initialization
on the operating display.
1) Power modules (LT) with Order No. [MLFB] 6SN12–1A0–A1 are automatically recognized from FW 3.00.
It is then not possible to change P–095.

07.94
Operation with
an uncontrolled
infeed
Table 2-2 Operation with an uncontrolled infeed (UE)
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–173 – After 10 100...6000 RPM Speed at the start of field weakening
conversion Multiplies the initialized value by the factor
Vsupply1 0.002(corresp. to 0.8 for Vsupply=400 V)
V
P–176 – After 10 1...150 %
Stall torque reduction factor
conversion
Multiplies the initialized value by the factor
1
Vsupply 0.002 )2
(corresponds to V0.64 for Vsupply=400 V)
P–177 – Online 10 0...1 hex Start calculation, motor
The calculation for the entered motor is started.
“99” is entered into P–096
P–052 – Online 4 0...1 hex Parameter transfer into the FEPROM
HS

10.00
2.1.2 System configuration with special motors (non–catalog motors)
Note
When using special motors, the motor data must be discussed with the
responsible SIEMENS office.
Overview
Initializing special motors
Motor data set
Characteristics for flux setpoint and main field inductance
Initializing
special motors
If a non–catalog motor is to be loaded, then initially, a standard motor (motor
numbers 101 to 429) should be initialized, whose motor data approximately
correspond to those of the non–catalog motor. Starting from these motor data,
the required changes can be made for motor 1 in the range P–158 to P–176.
The required calculation is started with P–177=1. After the calculation has been
HS
completed, 0 is written back into P–177. P–052 is set to 1 H to save the data.
Table 2-3 Initializing special motors
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
Default: 31)
The motor code number of a standard motor is
entered, whose motor data approximately
correspond to those of the special motor.
P–098 – After – 128...4096 dec Encoder pulse number – motor measuring
initialization system
Default: 2048
P–097 – – – 0...1 hex Initialization
The motor/power module combination selected is
loaded into the drive–machine data memory.
“P–000” is displayed in the operating display after
successful initialization.
1) Power modules with Order No. [MLFB] 6SN112–1A0–A1 are automatically recognized from FW 3.00.

07.94
Motor data set For special motors, the motor data must be entered. The list of motor data
(P–159 to P–176) is provided in Section 6.6.
Table 2-4 Motor data set
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–158 – Online 4 0.000 mH...65.535 From FW 3.00
mH Low–leakage motors require a series reactor to
smooth the phase currents. The series reactor
acts on the drive converter just like an increased
leakage stator reactance P169/229 .
Previously, P169/P229 had to be manually adap-
ted. P158 and P294 influence the stall limiting and
the pre–assignment of the current controller.
P–159 Motor data for motor 1
After con- Refer to
to – 10 Motor data are entered for the special motor
version Section 6.6
P–176
P–177 – Online 10 0...1 hex Start calculation, motor 1 (P–096)
The calculations are started for the special motor
which was entered.
“99” is entered in P–096.
HS P–052 – Online 4 0...1 hex Parameters transfer into the FEPROM

04.97
Flux setpoint
and main field
inductance
characteristic
Table 2-5 Flux setpoint and main field inductance characteristic
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–172 – After con- 10 10...10000 RPM Upper speed Lh characteristic
version (magnetizing inductance characteristic)
P–173 – After con- 10 100...6000 RPM Speed at the start of field weakening
version Speed at start of field weakening for the flux set-
point charac. and lower speed for Lh characteristic
When operating the converter from an uncontrolled
infeed, the determined speed should be multiplied
1
by the factor Vsupply 0.002
V
(corresponds to 0.8 for Vsupply=400V)
P–175 – After con- 10 100...300 % Gain factor, Lh characteristic

version
Lh2 (at n=P–172)
P–175 = . 100 %
Lh1 (at n=P–173)
100 % = constant Lh over the complete speed HS
range
P–176 – After con- 10 1...150 % Stall torque reduction factor

version Speed at the start of the stall torque limit:
P–176 > 100 %: Increases the intervention point
P–176 < 100 %: Reduces the intervention point
When operating the converter from an un–

controlled infeed, the determined speed should be
multiplied by the factor (Vsupply 0.002 1 )2
V
(corresponds to 0.64 for Vsupply=400 V)
Flux setpoint Magnetizing inductance

Φ Lh
P–175 [%]
Lh2
100 %
Lh1
(Rated value)
Speed Speed
P–173 P–173 P–172
[RPM] [RPM]

04.97
07.94
2.1.3 System configuration with star/delta motors, 2 motors
Note
When using special motors, the motor data must be discussed with the
responsible SIEMENS office.
Overview
Initializing star/delta motors, 2 motors
Motor data sets
Flux setpoint and magnetizing reactance characteristic
Motor changeover
Initializing star/ In this case, when initializing, the number of the star motor (even number)
delta standard should be entered in the range between 200 and 299 into parameter P–096.
motors The required calculations are automatically made when selecting the initialized
function (P–097=1).
HS
Initializing two If two different standard motors are to be loaded, then initially, a standard motor
different standard (motor number 101 to 429) should be initialized. This motor data is displayed in
motors the parameter range for motor 1 (star) P–158 to P–176.
After initialization, the motor number for motor 2 (delta) must be entered into
P–238, and the required calculations started with P–239 = 1. This motor data
must be displayed in the range P–219 to P–236 and P–294.

04.97
Initializing star/
delta motors,
2 motors
Table 2-6 Initializing star/delta motors, 2 motors
Number Change Setting range Description
P–051

Default: 31)
The following motor code number should be
entered depending on the system configuration:
Star/delta standard motor
The even (star motor)
motor code number is entered
Star/delta special motor
An even motor code number of a standard
motor (star) is entered,
whose motor data approximately
correspond to those of the special motor. HS
2 standard motors
The motor code number of the
1st standard motor is entered
2 special motors
A motor code number of a standard motor
is entered, whose motor data approximately
correspond to those of the 1st special motor.
P–098 – After – 128...4096 dec Encoder pulse number – motor measuring
initialization system
Default: 2048
P–097 – – – 0...1 hex Initializing
The selected motor/power module combination is
loaded in the drive–machine data memory.
“P–000” is displayed after successful initialization
in the operating display .
– P–238 After con- 10 101...429 dec Motor code number
version Pre–setting: 101 (Section 6.2)
The motor code number for the 2nd motor (delta)
is entered according to the system configuration.
Proceed as for P–096.
– P–239 Online 10 0...1 hex Start calculation, motor 2 (P–238)
1) Power modules (LT) with Order No. [MLFB] 6SN12–1A0–A1 are automatically recognized from FW 3.00.

07.94
Motor data sets For special motors, the motor data must be entered. The list of motor data sets
special motors is provided in the Attachment (refer to Section 6.6).
P–158 to P–176 star motor data and data set, motor 1

P–294, P–219 to P–236 delta motor data and data set, motor 2
Table 2-7 Motor data sets

Number Change Setting range Description
P–051
P–159 P–219 After con- 10 Refer to Section Motor data for motor 1/motor 2
to to version 6.6 The motor data is entered depending on
P–176 P–236 the system configuration:
Star/delta standard motor
Data does not have to be entered
Star/delta special motor
Motor data is entered for star (P–159 to P–176)
and delta (P–219 to P–236)
2 standard motors
Data does not have to be entered
2 special motors
Motor data is entered for the 1st special motor
HS (P–159 to P–176) and 2nd special motor
(P–219 to P–236)
P–158 P294 Online 4 0.000 mH...65.535 From FW 3.00
mH Low–leakage motors require that a series reactor
is used to smooth the phase currents. The series
reactor acts on the drive converter just like an
increased leakage stator reactance P169/229 .
Previously, P169/P229 had to be manually adap-
ted. P158 and P294 influence the stall limiting and
the pre–assignment of the current controller.
P–177 P–237 Online 10 0...1 hex Start calculation motor 1(P–096)/motor 2
(P–238)
The calculations are started for the special motor
which was entered if P–180 = 0.

10.00
04.97
Flux setpoint
and main field
inductance
characteristic
Table 2-8 Flux setpoint and main field inductance characteristic
is
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–172 P–232 After con- 10 10...10000 RPM Upper speed Lh characteristic
version (magnetizing inductance characteristic)
P–173 P–233 After con- 10 100...6000 RPM Speed at the start of field weakening
version Speed at the start of field weakening for the flux
setpoint characteristic and lower speed for Lh
characteristic
controlled infeed, the determined speed should be
multiplied by the factor Vsupply 0.002 1
(corresponds to 0.8 for Vsupply=400V) V
P–175 P–235 After con- 10 100...300 % Gain factor, Lh characteristic
version
Lh2 (for n=P–172)
P–175 = . 100 %
Lh1 (for n=P–173)
100 % = constant Lh over the compl. speed range
HS
P–176 P–236 After con- 10 1...150 % Stall torque reduction factor
version Speed at the start of the stall torque limit:
P–176 > 100 %: Increases the intervention point
P–176 < 100 %: Decreases the intervention point

controlled infeed, the determined speed should
be multiplied by the factor (Vsupply 0.002 1)2
(corresponds to 0.64 for Vsupply=400 V) V
P-176/P-236 will be loaded for specific motors

from FW 3.10 onwards.
P–178 P–240 – – Display parameter Displays the speed, above which the rated output
must be reduced due to the stall torque limiting,
from FW 3.10
Flux setpoint Magnetizing inductance

Lh
Φ
P–175 [%]
Lh2
100 %
Lh1
(rated value)
Speed Speed
P–173 P–173 P–172
[RPM] [RPM]

07.94
Motor
changeover
Table 2-9 Motor changeover
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–180 – Online 10 0...1 hex Enable motor changeover (star/delta)
0H: No motor changeover possible
1H: Motor changeover enabled
Note:
A freely programmable input terminal
(E1 to E9) must be assigned function number 5
for the changeover request
(parameterization, Section 3.2.2)
HS

04.97
2.2 Standard applications

2.2.1 Operating display
The actual operating status of the unit is displayed in parameters P–000 and
P–100.
Table 2-10 Operating display
Display
Function group
Relay functions Mode Equipment status Mode Gearbox stage
Free–progr. Drive not enable- NE module Display in P–000:

relay function 1 d: pulse enable (only for star/delta Gearbox stage
terminal A11 progress condi- missing mode) 1 selected
P–241 tion, refer to co- (term.63/term.4
nact = nsetl1) 8) Star configura-
lumn
tion selected
“Equip.status”
Gearbox stage
Free–progr. Closed–loop Axis–specific 2 selected
relay function 2 speed control- pulse enable Delta configura-
terminal A21 led operation missing tion selected
P–242 (term.663)
|Md| < Mdx1) Open–loop tor-
que controlled Gearbox stage HS
operation Digital filter is 3 selected
Free–progr. inactive
relay function 3 Torque–control- NE module con-
terminal A31 led operation troller enable mis-
P–243 with slip monito- sing (term.64)
|nact| < nmin1) ring and/or HS module Display in P–100:
controller enable Gearbox stage
(only for the spindle 4 selected
missing (term.65) positioning mode)
Free–progr. ModeM19
relay function 4
terminal A41 RFG enable Position 1 is
P–244 missing selected
|nact| < nx1) Mode, (term.81)
In- Gearbox stage
spindle po-
5 selected
active Free–progr.
sitioning
Position 2 is
relay function 5 Setpoint enable
Mode,C selected
terminal A51 missing
P–245 axis
(select terminal
Mot–Temp1) Fct. No. 16) Gearbox stage
Position 3 is 6 selected
Mode,
Free–progr. HPC axis selected
relay function 6 0.5 ms or 0.3ms The torque direction
terminal A61 for an enabled motor
P–246 is displayed:
var. relay unction Mode, Position 4 is Gearbox stage
(P–186)1) HPC axis
Motoring
7 selected
selected
0.6 ms or
Ready/ 0.35ms
fault
terminal 672/674 Generating Gearbox stage
Diagnostic
P–053 function I/f 8 selected
ready Incremental
open–loop ctrl.
positioning is
operation
selected Gearbox stage 1...8
The segment is Speed controller
Osciallation selected via free–
energized, if the clock cycle fast,
function is selec- programmable
appropriate relay clock cycle is
ted (fr. Fct. 3.00) terminal function
has pulled–in active
P–081...P–089
=9, 10, 11
1) As supplied

07.94
2.2.2 Firmware version and module version
Table 2-11 Firmware version and module version
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
(P–099) – – – 0.00...99.00 Firmware release
(P–150) – – – – Module ID
Function of connector X432:

F00H No function
200H With additional input for
spindle encoder
300H Output, pulse encoder signals
for external use
HS

04.97
2.2.3 Setting parameters for standard applications
Overview
Speed setting values
Torque limit values
Motor temperature monitoring
Oscillation operation
Speed setting
values
Table 2-12 Speed setting values
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–022 P–261 Online 4 1...nrated RPM Shutdown speed, pulse cancellation
The drive is switched into a no–current condition
when the controller is inhibited and the shutdown
speed is fallen below (shutdown so that the drive HS
cannot reverse).
P–025 Online 4 0...15000 ms Time–delayed pulse cancellation after control-
ler inhibit FW 3.00
Pulse cancellation can be delayed after the
controller inhibit after braking along the down
ramp using P025.
Controller inhibit
n
Braking along the

down ramp Pulses are
canceled
Shutdown
speed P022 t
Time delay P025
P–029 P–264 Online 4 0...nmaxMot RPM Speed limiting

Sets the maximum motor speed
Encoder phase error correction
If the two encoder tracks don’t have a precise 90
P–036 – Online 4 – 400...400 dec offset to one another, this results in a torque ripple.
Setting resolution 1 corresponds to 0.18
max. value 400, corresponds to 72
P–037 P–267 Online 4 1...32000 RPM Changeover speed, motor encoder evaluation
Above this speed, the fine resolution of the speed
actual value generation is disabled.
(this is no longer relevant from firmware V2.00)
Hysteresis P–037/P–267
P–038 P–268 Online 4 1...500 RPM
(this is no longer relevant from firmware V2.00)

07.94
Torque limit values
Table 2-13 Torque limit values
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–039.1 P–269.1 Online 4 5...300 % 1st torque limit value
(referred to the rated motor torque)
P–041 P–271 Online 4 5...100 % 2nd torque limit value referred to P-039/P-269
This is selected using function No. 1 and it
becomes active after the speed, set in
P–050/P–290 has been exceeded.
P–050 P–290 Online 4 0...nmaxMot RPM Changeover speed from Md1 to Md2
P–040.1 P–270.1 Online 4 5...100 % Regenerative limiting
(referred to P–039/P–269 or P–041/P–271)
P–042 P–272 Online 4 1...nmaxMot RPM Changeover speed for P–040/P–270
P–043 P–273 Online 4 0...nmaxMot RPM Hysteresis P–042/P–272
Torque [%]
(referred to the rated motor torque)
HS P–050
P–039.1
Motoring
P–041
P–040.1 Speed [RPM]
Generating
P–039.1
P–042
I2maxconv – I02 mot

Max. selectable torque limit: 100 % (referred to10 s overload)
I2ratedmot – I02 mot
Imaxconv – max. drive converter current
I0 mot – no–load motor current
Iratedmot – rated motor current

04.97
Motor temperature
monitoring
Table 2-14 Motor temperature monitoring
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–063 P–291 Online 4 0...170 °C Max. motor temperature
When exceeded, after approx. 1 s:
“Pre–alarm, motor overtemperature” relay
time in P–065:
pulse cancellation and fault message F–14
P–064 – Online 4 0...170 °C Fixed temperature
For a value 0, the motor parameter is calculated
using this fixed temperature. Caution!
The motor temperature monitoring function is
de–activated.
P–065 – Online 4 0...600 s Timer, motor temperature monitoring
Oscillation mode
HS
Table 2-15 Oscillation mode
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–154 – Online 4 –nmaxmot... Oscillation setpoint 1
nmaxmot RPM
P–155 – Online 4 –nmaxmot... Oscillation setpoint 2
nmaxmot RPM
P–156 – Online 4 10...10000 ms Oscillation interval time 1
10...10000 ms Oscillation interval time 2
P–157 – Online 4 0...10000 ms from From FW 3.00, when entering a 0, only the
FW 3.00 value in P154 becomes effective
Speed [RPM]
P–154
P–155 Time [ms]
P–156 P–157

07.94
2.3 Additional applications
2.3.1 Orientated spindle stop (using NC auxiliary function M19)
Function M19 can be switched–in using a select terminal (E1 to E9) (refer to
Section 3.2.2).
Table 2-16 Orientated spindle stop (using NC auxiliary function M19)
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–054 – Online 4 –nmaxmot... M19 normalization, speed setpoint
nmaxmot RPM Speed, which is reached with the analog input
voltage in P–024.
+ = cw rotation for a positive speed setpoint
– = ccw rotation for a positive speed setpoint
P–055 – Online 4 C000...4000 hex M19 offset correction
e. g. positive corrective value 2FH
negative corrective value FF00H
P–056 – Online 4 0...nmaxmot RPM M19 changeover speed
HS Speed changeover point of the setpoint normaliza-
tion factor. When the selected speed is fallen
below, the values, entered in parameters P–054
and P–055 become effective.
P–058 – Online 4 0...nmaxmot RPM Shutdown threshold, rounding–off M19
When the selected speed is fallen below, the
speed setpoint smoothing and rounding–off are
disabled. They can only be re–enabled after first
canceling M19 mode.
FW 2.00
P–062 – Online 4 0...nmaxmot RPM M19 switching threshold, I component, speed
controller
Speed actual value threshold for switching–in the
speed controller integral action time. The integral
action time is switched–in again when the absolute
value falls below the speed entered in P–062.
P–062 is activated by setting
bit 4 = 1 (corresponds to 10H) in P–090.

10.94
2.3.2 C axis
C–axis operation can be selected using a select terminal

(E1 to E9) (Section 3.2.2). The setpoint can only be entered via terminals 24
and 8.
Table 2-17 C axis
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–114.1 – Online 4 –nrated–1...nrated–1 Normalization, speed setpoint C axis
RPM Speed, which is reached with the analog input
voltage in P–024.
+ = cw direction of rotation for a positive speed
setpoint
– = ccw direction of rotation for a positive speed
setpoint
P–115.1 – Online 4 C000...4000 hex Offset correction to P–114
Max. corrective value 2000 or E000 corresponds
approx. 1/8 of P–114, if P–024 = 10.0
HS
2.3.3 Spindle positioning
Overview
Function description
Position reference values
Function parameter 1
Position controller
Control parameter
Function parameter 2
Diagnostics parameter
Brief start–up
Function The main spindle is positioned from the same direction of rotation or with
description direction of rotation reversal without a higher–level position control loop of a
numerical control.

12.94
07.94
There are various ways of sensing the position:
With motor encoder (sin/cos tracks) without gearbox ratio (all of the parame-
ters are pre–initialized for this particular case)
With motor encoder (sin/cos tracks) and external zero mark (BERO) at
the spindle for gearbox stage changeover
With incremental spindle encoders (max. 8192 pulses per revolution), only
for versions with input for a spindle encoder (6SN11–BA12–0A0)
Spindle encoder signals are always processed with squarewave evaluation
including pulse quadrupling.
Warning
! A spindle encoder may not be connected to MSD control boards with pulse
encoder signal output for external use (Order No.
[MLFB] 6SN11–BA13–0A0)! If this is not observed, the unit and spindle
encoder could be damaged.
The hardware configuration must be entered via P–141.
HS The select terminal function “Positioning On” (funct. No. 28) must be connected
to one of the freely–programmable terminals E1 to E9 via parameters P–081 to
P–089 (refer to Section 3.2.2). Positioning is initiated by connecting the enable
voltage to the selected terminal.
Positioning is executed in several phases:
The drive is braked

Starting from any speed, the drive brakes along the characteristic, specified
by the ramp–up/ramp–down generator, down to the search speed. The
speed setpoint is specified by the open–loop positioning control; a speed
setpoint,
possibly available at terminal 56, is suppressed.
The search speed is the highest speed from which the drive can brake in
one revolution down to the target position without overshoot.
The search speed is limited towards the top by the deceleration capacity of
the drive and therefore the external moment of inertia.
Position is sensed
The position controller is switched–in after the search speed has been
reached and the zero mark has been recognized.

10.94
Move to the position

The last revolution before the target is sub–divided into three phases,
depending on the distance to the target.
Speed (RPM)
Search speed
Reference position recognized
P–146
Braking
characteri-
stic
P–139
Straight
line 1
P–136
Phase 1
Straight line 2
2
P–137 or138
360° Last revolution 0° Distance

P–135 (degrees)
P–134
HS
Fig. 2-1 Moving into position
The starting points of the various phases and the gradients of the individual
sections can be set. This means that the approach characteristics can be
adapted to the widest range of requirements (P–134 to P–139).
If the drive moves at a speed less than the search speed, then the drive can
accelerate to the search speed to shorten positioning (P–142).
For most applications, it is sufficient to optimize the system by adapting the
search speed P–146 and adapting parameters P–137 or P–138.
Reference value format

The position reference value may only have values from 0 to max. +32767,
from firmware release V2.00, max. 64000 I/rev (this corresponds to the max.
encoder pulse number between two zero pulses). The direction of rotation is
obtained from the polarity of the search speed. Position reference values are
entered in encoder pulses.
When positioning with the motor encoder, P–141 allows a multiplication fac-
tor to be entered to improve the setpoint resolution. Values of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16
and 32 can be entered. The multiplication factor can be selected so high,
that a computed pulse number of up to 32768 can be obtained.
Example:
The standard RON350 encoder (2048 pulses). When using a multiplication
factor of 16, this results in a computed pulse number of 32768. This value
should then be entered into P–131. Setpoint inputs of between 0 and 32768
can be entered; from firmware release V2.00, max. 64000 I/rev. If higher
values are entered, fault message FP–01 is output when positioning.

Position reference value is entered

The drive can be positioned using four internal position reference values per
gearbox stage (P–121 to P–122 and P–124 to P–125).
Select terminal Select terminal Parameters for the

Position reference
function 23 function 27 position reference
value
value
0 0 1 P–121
1 0 2 P–122
0 1 3 P–124
1 1 4 P–125
After the reference position has been reached, another setpoint can be acti-
vated using select terminal functions 23 and 27. In this case, the signal must
change at both terminals within 20 ms, so that they are identified as being
simultaneous.
A new position is only selected using a gearbox stage terminal when in the
“In position” status, only if the signal changes from a low to a high at the ter-
minal with function 28 (positioning “On”). Contrary to select terminal func-
tions 23 and 27, in this case, the zero mark is always passed again.
Incremental position reference value

An incremental position reference value for each gearbox stage can be ent-
HS ered via parameter P–123. If the spindle is in position, and a positive edge
appears at the freely–programmable terminal, assigned with select function
22, then the incremental position reference value is added to the actual posi-
tion reference value and the drive moves to the calculated new position.
This operation can be re–initiated after the new position has been reached.
Negative values are permissible for parameters P–123, contrary to P–121,
P–122, P–124 and P–125.
Zero offset
A zero offset can be entered via parameters P–129/P–130.
Setting possibility:
Select the positioning control (open–loop) (P–149 = 1H)
inhibit the controller and pulses.
Rotate the spindle through a complete revolution, and then bring to the re-
quired position (check using P–140 corresponds to the position actual
value). Set P–129 to 1H and wait until the parameter automatically writes
back 0H to itself. The actual position is then transferred as the new zero
mark. The difference to the actual zero mark is displayed in P–130. If the
system now positions to 0H, the spindle moves to the position which has
been saved in P–130.
Relay signals
Select relay functions 9 and 10 (refer to Section 3.3.2) are available for the
relay messages “Position reached”. The associated tolerances are entered
via parameters P–144 and P–145.

Re–synchronizing the spindle (zero mark)

The position counter status of the spindle is re–synchronized after each ge-
arbox stage change when a BERO zero mark is used. This re–synchroniza-
tion routine can be suppressed, or specifically selected via select terminals.
Setting possibility:
Spindle re–synchronization after a gearbox stage change can be suppres-
sed by setting bit 1 in parameter P–149. A signal change at a freely–pro-
grammable terminal, assigned the select terminal function “Gearbox stage,
bit 0 to bit 2” is interpreted by the position controller as parameter changeo-
ver. If the gearbox is mechanically changed–over, then when positioning
using a motor encoder with external zero mark, this must be signaled to the
position controller via select terminal function 29.
The select terminal function 29 latches (the state is saved). The high signal
level must be present for at least 20 ms.
Position reference
values
Table 2-18 Position reference values
Number Change
effective
P–051 Setting range Description HS
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–121 – Online 4 0...64000 dec Position reference value 1
The value is entered as encoder pulse number
(max. entry is increments per revolution)
P–123 – Online 4 –32768...32767 Position reference value, incremental

dec The value is entered as encoder pulse number
(max. entry is increments per revolution)

Function
parameter 1
Table 2-19 Function parameter 1
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–126 – Online 4 0.0...180 degrees Bandwidth integrator enable, speed controller
In order to improve the approach characteristics
when positioning, it can be sometimes advanta-
geous if the speed controller integrator is disabled.
In the target range, the integrator inhibit is re-
moved again (I component = 0). The bandwidth
of the target range can be selected using this
parameter.
P–149 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Start–up parameter, C axis/position.
The integrator inhibit function is enabled by setting
bit 5 (20H) via P–149.
P–129 – Online 4 0...1 hex Setting the internal zero
The zero offset to the hardware zero is entered
into P–130 by setting bit 0 (1H) (actual position
counter status).
P–130 – Online 4 0...64000 dec Zero offset
HS Enters the difference to the hardware zero
P–131 – Online 4 128...64000 dec Max. pulse number between 2 zeros
Enters the pulse number for one spindle
revolution.
If a spindle encoder (squarewave signals) is used,
then pulse quadrupling can be taken into account.
If the system positions using a gearbox and
BERO, the difference between two consecutive
BERO zero marks can be read via P–133. P–133
indicates the most accurate results in the speed
range between 100 and 500 RPM. Data read at
standstill provide incorrect values.

10.94
Position controller
Table 2-20 Position controller
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–134 – Online 4 0.0...180.0 degrees Intervention point P–136
P–135 – Online 4 0.0...180.0 degrees Intervention point P–137/P–138
P–136 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex P gain, straight line 1
P–137 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex P gain, straight line 2
Gain setting when positioning with spindle encoder
P–138 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex P gain, straight line 2 (HMS)
Gain setting when positioning with motor encoder.
P–139 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Multiplication factor for braking parabola
Factor to adjust the gradient of the braking
characteristic, refer to Fig. 2-1.
HS

07.94
Control
parameters
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–141 – Online via 4 0...FFFF hex Switching parameter, positioning
P–143
Bit Value
0000H Evaluates the motor encoder
signals (HMS evaluation)
0001H Evaluates the spindle encoder
signal
Note: X432 must be configured as
spindle encoder input. This is only
possible for module versions
0 6SN1121–0BA12–0AA0 (always)
and 6SN1121–0BA11–0AA1
(using P033=0). If this is not done,
fault message F–10 will be output.
Spindle encoder signals are al-
ways evaluated as squarewave
signals including pulse quadru-
pling.
HS 0000H Zero pulse from an encoder
1
0002H External zero pulse (e. g. BERO)
0000H Spindle encoder phase sequence
is not inverted
2
0004H Spindle encoder phase sequence
is inverted (actual value reversal)
0100H Setpoint multiplication factor 2 for
8 positioning with a motor encoder
with internal zero.
with internal zero.
with internal zero.
0800H Setpoint multiplication factor 16
11 for positioning with a motor
encoder with internal zero.
1000H Setpoint multiplication factor 32
12 for positioning with a motor
encoder with internal zero.
Note:
When changing the setpoint multiplication factor
(bits 8 to 12), before accepting the new setting,
the pulse number must be adapted in P–131
using P–143.
The modified settings must be activated using
P–143.
The setting of parameter P–141 is accepted and
activated by writing a 1 into parameter P–143
instead of 0!

effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–142 – Online 4 0...21 hex Speed increase flag
Bit Value
0000H The drive first accelerates to the
search speed if positioning is
started from a speed which is
lower than the search speed and
then the position is approached
0
(faster positioning).
The drive does not accelerate to
0001H the search speed and the drive
moves into the position from the
present speed.
0000H Zero mark monitoring (fault
FP–02) has been enabled. When
positioning with a BERO, the zero
mark is evaluated for each posi-
tioning operation, otherwise, only
after gearbox stage changeovers.
5
The zero mark monitoring is also
inhibited after a gearbox stage
changeover, if P–142, bit 0 is set HS
to 1.
0020H Zero mark monitoring (fault
FP–02) is inhibited.
P–143 – Online 4 0...1 hex Transfer parameter P–141
Modified values are transferred into P–141, if
P–143 = 1. The parameter is automatically reset
to 0.

Function
parameter 2
Table 2-22 Function parameter 2
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–144 – Online 4 0.00...18.00 de- Response width, relay 1
grees Setting value for “In position 1” relay signal
(refer to Section 3.3.2)
0.00...18.00 de-
P–145 – Online 4 Response width, relay 2
grees
P–146 – Online 4 0...4 nrated Search speed
Speed setting value, which is started when
entering the position.
P–148 – Online 4 0.0...180.0 degrees Motion window
If the spindle is pushed out of its position with the
pulses inhibited in the positioning mode, then
when the pulses are re–enabled, the reference
position is re–approached along the shortest
distance. If bit 3 is set in P–149, this is only
realized, if the motion window (P–148) is not
exited and the terminal with funct. No. 28 (high)
HS was not switched.

03.96
Tabelle 2-22 Function parameter 2
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–149 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Commissioning parameters, C axis/position
Bit Value
0000H Positioning inhibited, the control for
the positioning is not processed, i.
e. positioning is not possible and
0 possible position actual value dis-
plays are not precise!
The control for positioning is pro-
0001H cessed and positioning is possible.
0000H When a positioning command is re-
ceived (terminal with funct. No. 28
high), the spindle is re–synchroni-
zed, if, beforehand, the signal chan-
ges at one freely programmable ter-
minal assigned the select terminal
1 function “Gearbox stage bit 0 to bit
2”.
The spindle is only re–synchroni-
0002H zed, if, before the positioning com-
mand, there was a positive signal
edge at a select terminal assigned
function 29. HS
0000H The position reference values are
not mirrored.
2
0004H The position reference values are
mirrored.
0000H The position is always approached
from the same direction of rotation;
the direction of rotation is entered
3
0008H using the sign (polarity) of the
search speed. (exception, refer to
P–148)
0000H The speed controller integral action
time is active.
0020H The speed controller integral action
5
is disabled. The integral action time
is re–activated in the target range
(can be set using P–126).
0040H Reduction of overshoots after bra-
6 king down to the search speed
FW 2.00
0000H The speed setpoint rounding–off
(P–019) is also effective while posi-
tioning.
0080H The speed setpoint rounding–off
(P–019) is de–activated when the
7
positioning command is received.
The speed setpoint smoothing
(P–018) is never effective during a
positioning operation, independent
of P–149.

07.94
Diagnostic
parameters
Table 2-23 Diagnostic parameters
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
(P–100) – – – – Operating display P–100
(P–128) – – – – Actual position reference value
The actual reference position is displayed in
parameter P–128 in the form of encoder pulses.
However, the value is only updated, if the
positioning software is enabled by P–149 = 1.
(P–132) – – – – Absolute position actual value without zero
offset
(P–133) – – – – Difference between 2 ext. zero marks
The difference between two consecutive BERO
zero marks is displayed (P–141 = 2).
(P–140) – – – – Absolute position actual value with zero mark
offset
HS (P–147) – – – – Position counter status with respect to BERO

The position counter status is displayed when
positioning with BERO.
(P–320) – – – – Diagnostics, motor encoder zero mark
(P–321) – – – – Diagnostics, spindle encoder zero mark

Brief Commissioning example

commissioning Hardware structure: Encoder signals and zero pulse from the motor encoder
P–149 must be set to 1H to enable the position program.
Enter the hardware configuration via parameter P–141

0 corresponds to the encoder signals from the motor encoder
Set P–141 to 0H (this is the pre–setting); if P–141 is changed, the change must be
accepted with P–143 = 1.
Enter the pulse number between two zero marks into P–131
Can the
position be selected no
by manually selecting
the spindle
1. Enable the drive
(terminals 663, 65, 81)
yes 2. With a speed setpoint, move the spindle
1. Inhibit the controller and pulses. through at least one revolution and then
stop at the required position.
2. Rotate the spindle through one complete revolution and
3. De–energize terminals 65 and 663.
then into the reference position (the position actual value
is displayed via P–140).
HS
Write 1H into P–129: The parameter value automatically resets itself which means that this position
is defined as software zero.
The offset with respect to the hardware zero mark is displayed in parameter P–130.
Testing the position value:

1. Enable the drive (terminals 663, 65, 81)
2. Enter a speed setpoint
3. Select a select terminal (E1 to E9) with fct. No. 28 for positioning
The motor brakes down to the search speed and stops at the specified ref. position.
(The position ref. value and actual value can be checked using P–128 and P–140.)
no Change position value

Required position
reached? using P–121
yes
Optimize positioning using parameters P–134 to P–139.

The search speed can be changed via P–146. Additional functions (refer to the parameter description,
Table 2–21 and 2–22) can be selected via parameters P–142 and P–149
The response bandwidth for the two relay signals can
be changed using P–144 and P–145.
Save the modified parameters in the FEPROM (P–052).
End

07.94
2.3.4 Open–loop torque controlled mode (master/slave)
Overview
Parameter settings
Parameter description
Slip monitoring
Function Open–loop torque controlled operation is necessary if the speed controller is

description used in the NC or for the slave drive for master/slave applications. Open–loop
torque controlled operation can be selected via select terminal E1 to E9 (refer to
Section 3.2.2). For master/slave operation (2 spindle drives can be operated,
rigidly coupled together), the torque setpoint must be fed to the slave drive from
the master via a D/A converter output (adaptation P–066 or P–068, refer to
Section 3.3.5) (adaptation P–048, P–049).
Warning
HS ! If the mechanically rigid coupling is released, the slave drive must be changed–
over to “Closed–loop speed control”, otherwise the drive would accelerate to
max. speed, even for an Md setpoint input of 0.
Master drive
Speed setpoint
D/A converter output, M
assigned via P–066/068 3∼
T. 56/14 Rigid or quasi–
T. A9n rigid coupling,
which can also
Speed setpo- Torque setpoint be released in
int operation.
Slave drive M
T. 56/14
Mdset adaptation 3∼
T. 24/8 via P–048/049
Speed setpoint
for the slave for T. En T. En
open–loop torque
controlled
operation with Select terminal Select terminal, torque control
or
slip monitoring open–loop tor- with slip monitoring
que control (fct. No. 32)
(fct. No. 4) FW 2.00
Slave drive:
For a rigid coupling “Open–loop torque controlled”
With the coupling released “Closed–loop speed controlled”
Fig. 2-2 Master/slave operation

04.97
Note
When the controller is inhibited in the open–loop torque controlled mode, the
drive must be braked via the Md setpoint input; the pulses are only internally
canceled after the shutdown speed has been reached (P–022).
Parameter Example:
settings
In order that the torque setpoint is available at terminals A92 and M of the
master drive, address 0C6CH must be written into parameter P–068. Using
parameter P–069, by shifting, it is possible to determine which voltage is
available at a specific torque.
The normalization of the rated motor torque can be taken from the contents of
address 0F52H. In order to determine this value, address 0F52H must be
entered into P–250, and the normalization value for the rated torque can be
read–out of P–251.
Contents Value to be conver-

Shift factor Output voltage
P–251 ted
P–069 D/A conv. 2 [V] at Mdrated
(hex) (hex)
0 0C00 0.94 HS
1 1800 1.88
0C00
2 3000 3.75
3 6000 7.50
0 1000 1.25
1000 1 2000 2.50
2 4000 5.00
At the max. output voltage, the torque limit in P–039 must be taken into account
(160 % corresponds to Mdrated 1.6), and it must be guaranteed that there is no
overcontrol (> 10 V).
If the slave drive is switched into the torque mode, parameters P–048 and
P–049 still remain effective. The torque can be changed using P–048 (this
corresponds to P–014 in the closed–loop speed controlled mode) and the
torque drift can be compensated using P–049 (corresponds to P–015 in the
closed–loop speed controlled mode). Parameter P–049 is not suitable to
compensate frictional forces. P–048 and P–049 are not effective in closed–loop
speed controlled operation.
The following is valid from FW 3.00:
The torque data is updated via address 304C with 1 ms (previously 20 ms), and
is normalized with 5 V rated motor torque.
Example:
Output via terminals A92 and M
P68 = 304CH, P69 = 0H
The normalization can be influenced by P26.
For P26 = 100 %, 5 V corresponds to the rated torque.
For P26 = 160 %, 8 V corresponds to the rated torque.

07.94
Parameter
description
Table 2-24 Parameter description
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–048 – Online 4 –250...250 % Normalization Mdset
The setting value is referred to the rated motor
torque.
P–049 – Online 4 C000...4000 hex Offset, torque setpoint
Open–loop torque The mechanical coupling of drives using a friction–locked connection can result
control with slip in slip for open–loop torque controlled slave drives.
monitoring With this function, the slave drive monitors the deviation between the speed
FW 2.00 actual value and the speed setpoint and reduces the drive torque when a speed
tolerance is exceeded.
Assignment, speed setpoint channels:
HS Master drive, terminal 56/14
Slave drive, terminal 24/8
The open–loop torque control with slip monitoring can be activated using select
terminal function No. 32 (refer to Fig. 2-2).

12.94
Table 2-25 Slip monitoring
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–340 – Online 4 0.1...100.0 % Speed deviation, slip monitorinig
Permissible speed deviation referred to the actual
speed setpoint.
P–346 – Online 4 0.0...100.0 % Hysteresis, P–340
P–341 – Online 4 0.0...100.0 % Torque reduction, slip monitoring
If the speed deviation, parameterized in P–340 is
exceeded, the torque setpoint is reduced.
P–343 – Online 4 0...999 ms Delay time, slip monitoring
Delay time until the torque reduction is removed.
P–344 – Online 4 0.01...100.0 %/ms Torque red. rate of change, slip monitoring
Rate at which the torque setpoint is reduced.
P–345 – Online 4 0.01...100.00 %/ms Rate of increase of the slip monitoring
Rate at which the torque setpoint is increased.
(P–347) – Online – – Speed dev. actual slip monitoring
If the displayed value is greater than the threshold,
set in P–340, then slip occurs, and the monitoring
is activated.
HS
nact P–346
nset P–340 nset
Reduction factor
for Mdset
P–344
100 %
P–345
P–341
t
P–343
nact – nset
(P–347) = 100 %
nset

07.94
2.3.5 Monitor function
The address contents (data in the RAM area) of the MSD module can be read
using parameters P–249 to P–251.
Note
There is a list of important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their
addresses in the Attachment (Section 6.5).
Table 2-26 Monitor function
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–249 – Online 10 0...FFFF hex Segment, memory location monitor
Selects the segment address
P–250 – Online 10 0...FFFF hex Address, memory location monitor
Selects the offset address
P–251 – Online – – Value display, memory location monitor
HS Displays the contents of address P–249/P–250
2.3.6 HPC axis (FW 2.00)
Only the freely–programmable terminals E1 to E6 can be assigned functions in

the HPC–axis mode.
Overview
System configuration
Drive converter interfaces
Controller optimization
Diagnostics
Function The High Precision C axis mode (HPC) can achieve improved load and control
description characteristics by reducing the speed controller clock cycle to 0.5 or 0.6 ms.
From FW 3.00, 0.3 or 0.35 ms are possible.
Expanded functionality in the HPC–axis mode:
– Flux adaptation (noise reduction)
– 2 digital filters can be parameterized in the torque setpoint channel for a
0.6 ms speed controller clock cycle (from FW 3.00, 0.35 ms is possible).

03.96
The following functions are not available in the HPC–axis mode:

– Torque setpoint smoothing
– Oscillation
– NC auxiliary function M19
– 2nd torque limit value
– Ramp–function generator
– Speed controller adaptation
– Gearbox stage changeover
– Spindle positioning
– Reduced terminal and relay functions
– Smoothing, D/A converter P/Pmax display
System Prerequisites for HPC axis operation:

configuration
– Speed range: nratedmotor
– Can only be selected for motor 1 (star operation)
– HPC axis has priority over a standard C axis
– Changeover in the normal mode is realized online; then, all of the
functions are available again.
HS
Selecting an HPC axis
Table 2-27 Selecting an HPC axis
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–149 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Commissioning parameters, C axis/position
Bit Value
0000H HPC axis cannot be selected
8
0100H HPC axis can be selected
The HPC–axis mode is selected using the select
terminal function No. 30
Torque limit values
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–109 – Online 4 5...180 % Torque limit value. HPC
Sets the max. permissible torque,
referred to the rated motor torque.
P–110 – Online 4 5...100 % Regenerative limiting, HPC
Limits the torque in regenerative operation,
referred to P–109.

Drive converter
interfaces
Analog setpoint
The analog speed setpoint or Md setpoint is only entered via setpoint
channel 2 (terminal 24/8).
The speed setpoint is limited to nratedmotor.
Table 2-29 Analog speed setpoint
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–093 – Online 4 C000...4000 hex Offset correction, speed setpoint HPC
Drift compensation for the analog speed setpoint
input.
P–094 – Online 4 –nrated–1... Normalization, speed setpoint HPC
+nrated–1 RPM The speed can be set with P–094, which should
be reached, for the analog input voltage, which
was set in P–024.
Permanently wired terminal functions

HS Terminals 663, 65 and 81 are also available in the HPC–axis mode.
Freely–programmable terminal functions

Only input terminals E1 to E6 (P–081 to P–086) are evaluated.
The following terminal functions are available (refer to Section 3.2.2)
Terminal function Function No.

Reset fault memory (R) 3
(fault acknowledgement)
Open–loop torque controlled operation 4
Integrator inhibit, speed controller 8
Speed setpoint smoothing 25
Suppress F–11 (traverse to fixed endstop) 26
HPC axis 30
Inverter clock cycle frequency 33
34

Permanently–wired relay functions

Terminals 672/673/674 are also available in the HPC–axis mode.
Freely–programmable relay functions

The statuses of the non–available relay functions are frozen when chan-
ging–over into the HPC–axis mode.
The following relay functions are available (refer to Section 3.3.2):
Table 2-31 Relay functions
Terminal function Function No.

nact < nmin 1
Motor overtemperature, pre–alarm 5
Drive converter overtemperature, pre–alarm 6
Variable, relay function 1 7
Variable, relay function 2 8
Controller
optimization Speed setpoint smoothing
HS
Table 2-32 Speed setpoint smoothing
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–106 – Online 4 3...10000 ms Smoothing time speed setpoint smoothing
HPC
(Switched–in/out using P–053 or using select
terminal function No. 25)
Bit Value
4 0000H Speed setpoint smoothing inactive
0010H Speed setpodint smoothing active
Gain, integral action time, speed controller
Table 2-33 Gain, integral action time, speed controller
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–111 – Online 4 3.0...240.0 dec P gain, speed controller HPC
The P–gain setting is, with the same gain factor,
a factor of 4 smaller with respect to the normal
mode.
P–112 – Online 4 2...6000 ms Integral action time, speed controller HPC

Flux adaptation
Table 2-34 Flux adaptation
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–119 – Online 4 5...100 % Flux adaptation HPC
Reduces the magnetic motor flux
(noise reduction)
Digital filter, speed setpoint channel

2 digital filters can be parameterized in the HPC–axis mode, which are then
switched in series.
However, the filter can only be activated if the speed controller sampling
time is set to 0.6 ms via P–117.
The actual sampling time can be recognized in the operating display
(Section 2.2.1) (dig. filter, also refer to Section 4.1).
Table 2-35 Digital filter, torque setpoint channel

HS
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–118 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Torque setpoint filter type
Bit Value
0000H Bandstop characteristics, normal
mode
0
0001H Lowpass characteristics, normal
mode
0000H Bandstop filter 1 HPC–axis mode
8 Lowpass filter 1 HPC–axis mode
0100H FW 2.00
0000H Bandstop filter 2 HPC–axis mode
9 Lowpass filter 2 HPC–axis mode
0200H FW 2.00
P–091 – Online 4 45...750 Hz Frequency, filter 1 HPC
Lowpass: 3 dB transition frequency
Bandstop: Center frequency
P–092 – Online 4 0.50...10.00 dec Quality, filter 1 HPC
Filter quality of the bandstop,
Quality = 1 corresponds to 1.00
P–107 – Online 4 45...750 Hz Frequency, filter 2 HPC
P–108 – Online 4 0.50...10.00 dec Quality, filter 2 HPC

04.97
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–117 – 4 0...FFFF hex Select, torque setpoint filter
Bit Value
Online 0000H Filter normal mode not active
0
0001H Filter normal mode active
Online 0000H Filter 1 HPC–axis mode not active
8 Filter 1 HPC–axis mode active
0100H FW 2.00
Online 0000H Filter 2 HPC–axis mode not active
9 Filter 2 HPC–axis mode active
0200H FW 2.00
RESET 0000H Speed controller sampling time
0.5 ms,
no filter in the HPC–axis mode
possible. From FW 3.00, 0.3 ms.
0400H Speed controller sampling time
10
0.6 ms,
filters in the HPC–axis mode can
be activated. From FW 3.00, 0.35
ms.
FW 2.00 HS
Diagnostics The following diagnostic functions are not available in the HPC–axis mode:
Diagnostics parameter P–020 (dn/dt monitoring), P–320, P–321

Transient recorder function
I/Hz controlled operation

07.94
2.3.7 Maximum current limiting (I2t limiting, from FW 3.1)
Description From FW 3.1 onwards, there is a maximum current limiting function to protect
the power module. The characteristic can be taken from the characteristic in
Fig. 2–3.
I
To FW 3.00
Imax (P–317)
From FW 3.00
IS6 (P–318)
IN
0.7 IN
10 s t
240 s (4 min)
Fig. 2-3 Characteristic for standard parameterization of the I2t limiting

HS
The maximum current can, depending on the parameter setting, be additionally
reduced (P–317, P–318). The current limiting response can be read–out via the
diagnostic parameters (P–319, P–322).
Table 2-36 Parameters for I2t limiting
Number Change effec- P–051 Setting range Description
tive
P–317 Immediately 4 25 ... 100 % Reduction factor, max. load duty cycle I2t
The max. power module current is reduced
for a 10 s load duty cycle.
P–318 Immediately 4 25 ... 100 % Reduction factor S6, load duty cycle I2t
The max. power module current is reduced
for S6 4 min load duty cycle.
(P–319) – – – Diagnostics I2t power model
The parameter indicates that the limit has
become effective. Each time the current limit
responds at the reduction characteristic (after
10 s), the contents of P–319 are incremented.
(P–322) – – – I2t load limiting
Actual value display of the actual limit (max.
100 % referred to P–039).

10.94
3.1 Analog speed setpoint interface
Parameterizing the Drive Converter

Interfaces 3
Overview
Speed setpoint channel selection
Normalization, analog speed setpoint
Unipolar speed setpoint input (fixed direction of rotation)
Steady–state minimum speed
HS
Speed setpoint
channel selection
Table 3-1 Speed setpoint channel selection
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–113 – Online 4 0...3 dec Channel selection, speed setpoint
P–113 T.56/14 T.24/8

0 Off Off
1 On Off
2 Off On
31) On On
1) Setpoint inputs are added

07.94
Normalization,
analog speed
setpoint
Table 3-2 Normalization, analog speed setpoint
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–014.1 P–258.1 Online 4 –nmaxmot... Speed for max. motor useful speed
nmaxmot RPM Speed, which is reached for the analog input
voltage in P–024.
+ = cw rotation for a positive speed setpoint
– = ccw rotation for a positive speed setpoint
P–024 – Online 4 5.0...15.0 V Normalization, setpoint
Analog speed setpoint voltage for P–014/P–258
Note:
Max. setpoint voltage at terminals 56/14 and
terminals 24/8 11 V.
P–015.1 – Online 4 C000...4000 hex Offset correction, speed setpoint
e. g. positive correction value 2FH
negative correction value FF00H
HS
Unipolar
speed setpoint
input
Table 3-3 Unipolar speed setpoint input
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
Bit Value
(from
FW 0000H Bipolar speed setpoint by
2.00) 2000H generating the absolute value
of the speed setpoint is only
13 permitted for one direction of
rotation.
The direction of rotation is
defined using P–014/P–258.

Steady–state
minimum speed
Table 3-4 Steady–state minimum speed
effective
P–030 Online 4 0...nmaxmot RPM Steady–state minimum speed
No steady–state operation in the speed range
around zero.
This range is passed through with the actual
ramp–up or ramp–down times if the speed set-
point exceeds the steady–state minimum speed
in the opposite direction of rotation.
Zero speed can be forced by inhibiting the
permanently wired enable signals.
FW 2.00
Effective setpoint [RPM]
Steady–state minimum speed 200
200 Input setpoint [RPM] HS

07.94
3.2 Input terminals
3.2 Input terminals
Warning
! Terminal function parameters P–081 to P–089 may only be programmed when
the pulses are canceled (terminal 63 or terminal 663 open–circuit).
3.2.1 Permanently–wired terminal functions
Table 3-5
Terminal function Description Terminal-

number
Axis–specific pulse The inverter is enabled (motor controlled) if the enable voltage is connected to
enable terminal 663 (axis–specific pulse enable) and terminal 65 (controller enable).
If the axis–specific pulse enable is withdrawn while the motor is rotating, the 663
inverter is inhibited after 20 ms and the motor coasts down in a no–current
condition.
Controller enable If terminal 65 is opened while the motor is rotating, the drive brakes along the
ramp–function generator ramp. 65
HS When the absolute value falls below the nmin threshold (P–022), the inverter is
inhibited and the motor is shutdown without any reverse rotation.
Ramp–function If the enable voltage is connected to terminal 81, the speed setpoint is enabled.
generator fast stop When the input is open–circuit, the speed setpoint is zero (digital zero). The
drive brakes without ramp–function generator along the torque limit. If bit 1 in 81
P–053 is set, then the pulses are canceled when zero speed is reached.

12.94
03.96
3.2 Input terminals
3.2.2 Freely–programmable terminal functions
Overview
Terminal function assignment
Terminal functions
Terminal function
assignment
Table 3-6 Terminal function assignment
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–081 – Online 4 1...34 dec Terminal function assignment, E1 to E9
to Terminals E1 to E9 are assigned by entering the
P–089 function number. The factory setting can be taken
from the following table.
Terminal functions
HS
Terminal function Description Fct. Input

No. terminal
when
supplied
2nd torque limit The 2nd torque limit becomes active, if this terminal is energized, and the 1 E1 (P–081)
changeover speed in P–050 is exceeded.
Oscillation To changeover gearbox stages, the speed setpoints, described in Section 2 E6 (P–086)
2.2 “Standard applications” are entered.
Reset Remotely acknowledges fault messages. 3 E3 (P–083)
fault memory (R) Terminal 65 (controller enable) must be open in order to acknowledge.
(fault acknowledge-
ment)
Open–loop torque Changeover from closed–loop speed control to open–loop torque control. 4 E5 (P–085)
controlled operation
Star/delta operation Changeover between star (open) and delta operation (enable voltage). 5 –
M19 operation Auxiliary NC function for an orientated spindle stop. 6 E4 (P–084)
When this terminal is energized, the setpoint normalization, entered in
P–054, is selected if the speed falls below the value entered in P–054.
Run–up time = 0 If the enable voltage is connected to this terminal, the internal ramp– 7 E2 (P–082)
function generator is bypassed.
Integrator inhibit, The speed controller integral component can be inhibited via this terminal. 8 –
speed controller
Gearbox stage 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A total of eight parameter sets for setpoint nor-
Bit 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 malization, speed monitoring, controller setting, 9 E7 (P–087)
Bit 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 torque limiting and torque monitoring can be 10 E8 (P–088)
entered using these terminals.
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 11 E9 (P–089)

3.2 Input terminals
Terminal function Description Fct. Input termi-

No. nal when
supplied
Setpoint enable If this terminal is open circuit, then a setpoint of digital zero is entered. 16 –
(only for speed If the enable voltage is connected to the terminal, the setpoint is enabled
setpoint) (analog setpoint or oscillation setpoint).
The setpoint is enabled if the terminal function is not selected.
Incremental If the spindle is in position, and if the enable voltage is connected to the 22 –
positioning terminal, then the incremental position reference value in P–0123 is ad-
ded to the actual position reference value. The drive then moves to this
new calculated position.
Position reference Together with the terminal, function No. 27, this terminal is used to select 23 –
values 1...2 the position reference value defined using parameters P–121, P–122,
P–124 and P–125 (Section 2.3.3).
C axis In the C–axis mode, the finer setpoint normalization, set in P–114, ap- 24 –
plies. Only setpoint input 2 is evaluated (terminals 24 and 8).
Speed setpoint When the enable voltage is connected to this terminal, speed setpoint 25 –
smoothing smoothing is activated. The smoothing time is entered in P–018 (also
with P–053).
Suppressing F–11 If the enable voltage is connected to this terminal, fault message F–11 26 –
can be suppressed (speed controller at its endstop).
Position Together with the terminal, function No. 23, this terminal is used to select 27 –
reference values 3..4 the position reference value defined using parameters P–121, P–122,
P–124 and P–125 (Section 2.3.3).
HS Positioning on If the enable voltage is connected to this terminal, positioning is started. 28 –
Spindle re– A positive (rising) edge at this terminal results in re–synchronization the 29 –
synchronization next time that a positioning command is received via terminal, function
No. 28.
This function has a saving characteristic.
HPC axis If the enable voltage is connected to this terminal, when bit 8 was set in 30 –
(from FW 2.00) P–149, the HPC–axis mode is selected.
Slip monitoring If the enable voltage is connected to this terminal, the open–loop speed 32 –
(from FW 2.00) control with slip monitoring is activated.
Inverter clock cycle Term. with Effective Using these terminals you can toggle between 33
frequency Fct. No. parameter four clock cycle frequencies. These clock cycle 34
(from FW 3.00) frequencies are defined using parameters
33 34
P–053, P–331, P–332 and P–333 (refer to
L L P–053 Section 4.2).
H L P–331
L H P–332
H H P–333

3.3 Output terminals
Warning
! The relay may only be programmed (P–241 to 247) if the pulses have been
canceled (terminal 63 or terminal 663 open circuit).
3.3.1 Permanently–wired relay functions
Table 3-8 Permanently–wired relay functions
Terminal Terminal
Description
function number
The relay function can be selected using P–053:
Bit Value
Ready/no 0000H The relay pulls–in if there is no fault 672
fault, axis– and the pulses and controller have 673
specific 0 been enabled. 674
0001H Ready relay pulls–in if there is no
fault.
Checkback si-
gnal, start in-
The relay (NC contact) pulls–in if the enable voltage is AS1 HS
connected to terminal 663 pulse enable, axis–specific. AS2
hibit
3.3.2 Freely–programmable relay functions
Overview
Assignment of signals (messages)
Relay functions
Parameterizable signals (messages)
Control word, signals (messages)
Note The relay signals are updated with 20 ms for a 1 ms speed controller clock
cycle. For a speed controller clock cycle of 0.5 ms, then 10 ms (refer to P–90
bit 3).
Signal
assignments
Table 3-9 Signal assignments
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–241 – Online 4 1...20 dec Programmable signals 1 to 6
to Relay outputs A11 to A61 are assigned by
P–246 entering the function number. The factory setting
should be taken from the following table.

07.94
Relay functions
Relay function Description Fct. Relay

No. output
Ramp–up The relay pulls–in if, after a setpoint step, the speed actual value is within the 2 A11
completed tolerance bandwidt around the new setpoint, and stays for at least 200 ms in (P–241)
this tolerance bandwidth. The signal then stays in the active position until the
speed setpoint changes.
The width of the tolerance bandwidth can be parameterized in P–027.
The signal also remains active if the speed actual value leaves the tolerance
bandwidth after 200 ms, unless the setpoint has in the meantime changed.
The “Ramp–up completed” signal remains inactive if the tolerance bandwidth
is left again before the 200 ms has expired.
The relay does not drop–out due to speed fluctuations caused by load chan-
ges.
From FW 3.00, the 200 ms time can be parameterized using P–256.
Md < Mdx The relay pulls–in for Md < Mdx an. This can be set using P–047. 3 A21
If the relay nact = nset drops–out due to a speed setpoint change, the Md < (P–242)
Mdx relay can only drop–out again 800 ms after the relay nact = nset has pul-
led–in again.
From FW 3.00, the 800 ms time can be parameterized using P–257.
nact < nmin The relay pulls–in for nact < nmin. This can be set using P–021. 1 A31
HS (P–243)
nact < nx The relay pulls–in for nact < nx. This can be set using P–023. 4 A41
(P–244)
Motor over- The relay drops–out for a motor overtemperature condition. This can be set 5 A51
temperature using P–063. (P–245)
pre–alarm If the fault condition is kept, the drive converter is powered–down with fault
message F–14 after the time set in P–065.
For short–circuit and cable interruptions, the relay is immediately switched,
and is powered–down with fault message F–19 after approx. 6 s.
Drive converter The relay drops–out if the main heatsink thermo switch responds. 6 –
temperature pre– If the overtemperature condition remains, the drive converter is powered–down
alarm after approx. 20 s with fault message F–15.
Variable relay Refer to the description “Variable relay function” in Section 3.3.3 7 A61
function 1 (P–246)
Variable relay Refer to the description “Variable relay function” in Section 3.3.3 8 –
function 2
In position 1 The relay pulls–in if the positioning program is run–through and the spindle is 9 –
within the tolerance bandwidth set in P–144.
In position 2 The relay pulls–in if the positioning program is run–through and the spindle is 10 –
within the tolerance bandwidth set in P–145.
Relay, star This relay can control the external auxiliary contactor to changeover the win- 11 –
operation ding into the star configuration.
Relay, delta This relay can control the external auxiliary contactor to changeover the win- 12 –
operation ding into the delta configuration.
nact = nset The “nact = nset (actual)” signal is active after the speed setpoint has entered 20 –
(actual) the speed tolerance bandwidth around the setpoint and has remained for at
least 200 ms in the tolerance bandwidth.
If the tolerance bandwidth is left, the “nact = nset (actual)” signal immediately
becomes inactive.
From FW 3.00, the 200 ms time can be parameterized using P–256 .

Signals which can

be parameterized
Table 3-11 Signals which can be parameterized
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–021.1 P–260.1 Online 4 0...nrated RPM nmin for “nact < nmin” signal
Response value of the nact < nmin relay
P–023.1 P–262.1 Online 4 0...nmaxmot RPM nx for “nact < nx” signal
Response value of the nact < nx relay
P–027.1 P–263.1 Online 4 0...nrated/16 RPM Tolerance bandwidth for “nact = nset” signal
P–047.1 – Online 4 0...100 % Mdx for “Md < Mdx” signal
This setting refers to the actual torque limiting
P256 – Online 4 0.00...0.50 Delay time “nact=nset” signal, from FW 3.00
P257 – Online 4 0.00...1.00 Delay time “Md < Mdx” signal, from FW 3.00
Control word,
signals HS
Table 3-12 Control word, signals
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–247 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Control word, signals
Bit Value
0 0001H Relay function, terminal A11 is
inverted
inverted
inverted
inverted
inverted
inverted

07.94
3.3.3 Variable relay function
Table 3-13 Variable relay function
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–185 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address for monitoring 1
Address of RAM variables
P–186 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Threshold for monitoring 1
Comparison value for the RAM variables content
(addresses, refer to Section 6.5)
P–187 – Online 4 0.00...10.00 s Pull–in delay, monitoring 1
P–188 – Online 4 0.00...10.00 s Drop–out delay, monitoring 1
P–189 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Hysteresis, monitoring 1
(hysteresis for the threshold P–186)
P–190 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address for monitoring 2
P–191 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Threshold for monitoring 2
P–192 – Online 4 0.00...10.00 s Pull–in delay, monitoring 2
P–193 – Online 4 0.00...10.00 s Drop–out delay, monitoring 2
HS P–194 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Hysteresis, monitoring 2
(hysteresis for the threshold P–191)
P–247 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Control word, signal
Bit Value
0000H Variable relay function 1 with
sign interrogation
8
absolute value interrogation
sign interrogation
9
P–186 as threshold
1000H Variable relay function 1 as bit
test.
12
The threshold (P–186) is ANDed
with the RAM variables
(P–185) to be monitored
FW2.00
13
test, FW2.00
Note
There is a list of the most important measured quantities (RAM variables) and
their addresses in the Attachment (Section 6.5).

10.00
3.3.4 Motor encoder signals for NC
Table 3-14 Motor encoder signals for NC
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–033 – Online 4 0...7 dec Encoder resolution for NC
The following multiplication factors can be set
when using the squarewave–converted motor en-
coder signals.
Limiting speed
Square-
[RPM] for
P–033 Factor wave pul-
RON350/
ses
ERN 1387
1 1 2048 16000
3 0.5 1024 16000
5 2 4096 5000
7 4 8192 2500
Up to FW 2.40, output with factor 1
0
From FW 3.00, pulses are not output
Up to FW 2.40, output
HS
Toothed–wheel
with factor 1
0 encoder
From FW 3.00, pul-
256 pulses/rev.
ses are not output
1 1 256 24000
3 0.5 128 24000
5 2 512 24000
7 4 1024 12000
Up to FW 2.40, output
Toothed–wheel
with factor 1
0 encoder
From FW 3.00, pul-
512 pulses/rev.
ses are not output
1 1 512 12000
3 0.5 256 12000
5 2 1024 12000
7 4 2048 6000
Up to FW 2.40, output with factor 1
0
From FW 3.00, pulses are not output

07.94
3.3.5 Analog outputs
Overview
Function
Technical data
Parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2
Fine normalization
Function Analog output of RAM variables for measuring and diagnostics
Technical data
2 output channels at terminal A91 (DAU 1) and terminal A92 (DAU 2)
Voltage range ± 10 V
Coarse normalization, offset compensation
Signal resolution, 7 bits + sign
HS
Fine normalization for
– speed actual value (absolute)
– utilization
– M/Mrated
The polarity of the output voltage can be set using the fine normalization
(± 200 %)
Factory setting:
– A91 10 V, if the max. speed is reached (nact = P–029)
– A91 10 V, if the torque or power is reached (Mdmax, Pmax = P–039)

03.96
Parameterization
DAU 1, DAU 2
Table 3-15 Parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–066 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address, DAU 1
Address of the RAM variables which are to be
output at DAU 1.
Default: n/nmax (RAM address: 3044H)
Setting example:
Motor temperature in C ––> RAM address: Shift
FC2 via P–067
P–067 – Online 4 0...15 dec Shift factor DAU 1
The selected data value is shifted to the left
1 corresponds to multiplication by 2
n corresponds to multiplication by 2n
P–078 – Online 4 7F...FF80 hex Offset DAU 1
A possible offset for DAU 1 is compensated
Default: Utilization (M/Mmax or P/Pmax)
(RAM address: 3048H)
Smoothing can be set using P–071.
HS
Output voltage [V]
1st overflow 2nd overflow 3rd overflow 4th overflow

+10.0
–10.0
0000H 2000H 4000H 6000H 8000H A000H C000H E000H FFFFH
Hex numerical value

Shift factor = 0 Offset = 0 V
Shift factor = 2 Fine normalization = 100 %

07.94
Fine normalization The coarse normalization (P–067, P–069) must be set to 0H, otherwise the
overcontrol protection of the DAUs (D/A converters) is not effective.
Table 3-16 Fine normalization
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–012 – Online 4 –200.0...200.0 % Normalization, DAU nact display
For P–012 = 100 %, the following is valid:
Max. speed (P–029) corresponds to +10 V.
Only acts on address 3044H, pre–set to DAU1.
From FW 3.00, update clock cycle is 1ms (pre-
viously 20ms)
P–013 – Online 4 –200.0...200.0 % Normalization, DAU utilization display
Utilization display
n = 0 to nrated: Md/Mdmax
n > nrated: P/Pmax
(takes into account the actual torque limits P–039,
P–041)
Max. torque or power corresponds to +10V.
This is only effective on address 3048H, pre–set
to DAU2. From FW 2.40, update clock cycle is
HS 1ms (previously 20ms)
P–026 – Online 4 –200.0...200.0 % Normalization, DAU M/Mrated
Rated torque corresponds to +5 V
M/Mrated is signed, i. e.
a negative rated torque corresponds to –5 V.
Is only effective at address 304CH. From FW
3.00, update clock cycle is 1ms (previously 20ms)
P–071 – Online 4 2...32767 ms Smoothing time, DAU utilization display
(from FW 2.40, not in the HPC–axis mode)
Output via address 3048H, pre–set to DAU2
Note
There is a list of the most important measured quantities (RAM variables) and
their addresses in the Attachment (Section 6.5).

04.97
4.1 Speed controller optimization
Controller Optimization 4
Overview
Speed setpoint smoothing
Speed actual value smoothing
Ramp–function generator
Gain, integral action time
Speed controller adaptation
Torque, speed setpoint smoothing (pT1)
Digital filter, torque setpoint channel HS
Delay time, “speed controller at its endstop”
Speed setpoint
smoothing
Table 4-1 Speed setpoint smoothing
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–018 – Online 4 3...10000 ms Smoothing time, speed setpoint smoothing
(enabled/disabled using P–053 or via select
terminal function No. 25)
P–019 – Online 4 0...30 dec Degree of rounding–off, speed setpoint
(pT2 element)
This is only effective when the speed setpoint
smoothing is active.
0: No rounding–off
30: Max. rounding–off
Bit Value
4 Speed setpoint smoothing
0000H
inactive
0010H
Speed setpoint smoothing active

07.94
Speed actual value

smoothing
Table 4-2 Speed actual value smoothing
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–034 – Online 4 1...10 ms Smoothing time, speed actual value smoothing
(enabled/disabled using P–053, bit 5) FW 3.00
This is only possible for a 1 ms speed controller
sampling (P-090.3 = 0).
Bit Value
5 0000H Speed actual value smoothing
0020H inactive
Speed actual value smoothing
active
If simultaneously P–090 bit 3=0
(speed controller clock
cycle=1 ms)
HS Ramp–function ge-
nerator
Table 4-3 Ramp–function generator
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–016.1 – Online 4 0.01...64.00 s Ramp–up time, ramp–function generator
From n = 0 to nmax (P–029)
P–017.1 – Online 4 0.01...64.00 s Ramp–down time, ramp–function generator
From nmax (P–029) to n = 0
Bit Value
0000H Ramp–funct. generator tracking
1000H active
12
Ramp–funct. generator tracking
inactive
Speed Ramp–function Speed Ramp–function

generator output Speed
setpoint generator output
Speed
setpoint
Speed actual value Speed actual value

Time Time
Without ramp–function generator tracking With ramp–function generator tracking

10.00
Gain, integral
action time
Table 4-4 Gain, integral action time
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–031.1 P-265.1 Online 4 3.0...120.0 dec1) P gain, speed controller
P–032.1 P-266.1 Online 4 5...6000 ms Integral action time, speed controller
Bit Value
0000H The integral component is set
to 0 if the speed controller is
controlled to its maximum.
6 0040H The integrator is held if the
speed controller is controlled
to its maximum.
FW 2.00
HS
1) From FW 3.10: 6.0...240.0 dec

07.94
Speed controller
adaptation
Table 4-5 Speed controller adaptation
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–195 P–283 Online 4 0...nmaxmot RPM Lower adaptation speed
P–196 P–284 Online 4 0...nmaxmot RPM Upper adaptation speed
P–198 P–285 Online 4 1.0...120.0 dec1) P gain, upper adaptation speed
P–199 P–286 Online 4 1...200 % Reduction factor, P gain
(the P gain characteristic is multiplied over the
complete speed range)
P–201 P–288 Online 4 5...6000 ms Integral action time, upper adaptation speed
P–202 P–289 Online 4 1...200 % Reduction factor, integral action time
(the integral action time characteristic is multiplied
over the complete speed range)
P–203 P–293 Online 4 0...7 dec Control word adaptation speed controller
Adaptation is only possible in gearbox stage 1!
HS Bit Value
0000H No adaptation
1
0002H Speed controller adapt. active
P gain [dec ]
Integral action time [ms]
P–202
P–032.1
P–199
P–198
P–199
P–201
P–031.1 P–202
Speed [RPM]
P–195 P–196
1) From FW 3.10: 6.0...240.0 dec

Torque setpoint
smoothing (pT1)
Table 4-6 Torque setpoint smoothing (pT1)
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–035 – Online 4 3...10000 ms Smoothing time, torque setpoint smoothing
P–045 P–274 Online 4 1...nmaxmot RPM Switch–in speed, torque setpoint smoothing
The torque setpoint smoothing is switched–in
above this speed
P–046 P–275 Online 4 0...nrated RPM Hysteresis P–045/P–275
P–044 – Online 4 0...1 hex Select torque setpoint smoothing
0: No torque setpoint smoothing
1: Torque setpoint smoothing above the
switch–in speed P–045
HS

07.94
Digital filter ,
torque setpoint
channel
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–118 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Torque setpoint filter type
P–281 Online 4 0...1 hex 0: Bandstop characteristics
1: Lowpass characteristics
P–103 P–276 Online 4 50...450 Hz Torque setpoint filter frequency
Lowpass: 3 dB transition frequency
Bandstop: Center frequency
P–104 P–277 Online 4 0.10...10.00 dec Torque setpoint filter quality
Filter quality of the bandstop,
quality = 1 corresponds to 1.00
P–117 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Torque setpoint filter selection
P–280 Online 4 0...1 hex 0: Digital filter is disabled
1: Digital filter is enabled
Amplitude Amplitude P–104 2

HS
3dB {
P–104 0.5
P–103
P–103 Frequency [Hz] Frequency [Hz]
Lowpass Bandstop
Delay time, “speed

controller at its
endstop”
Table 4-8 Delay time, “speed controller at its endstop”
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–248 – Online 4 100...10000 ms Delay time, fault message F–11
The fault message is output, if the speed controller
is fully controlled for the time specified in P–248,
and if the speed actual value does not exceed the
internal threshold nrated/256.

04.97
4.2 Current controller optimization
Note
Generally, it is not necessary to change the following parameters, as the
optimum current controller settings can be calculated from the motor and power
module data.
Overview
Current controller
Inverter clock cycle frequency
Current controller
Table 4-9 Current controller
Number Change P–051 Setting range Description HS
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–116 P–278 Online 4 –255...255 dec Correction, P gain current controller
A signed offset is added to the current controller
P gain.
P–120 P–292 Online 4 500...10000 RPM Changeover speed, current controller adapta-
tion
The current controller P gain is increased when
the speed is exceeded.
(P–316) – Online 4 – Display, current controller P gain
The currently effective P gain of the current
controller is displayed.

07.94
Inverter clock cy-

cle frequency
Table 4-10 Inverter clock cycle frequency1
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
Bit
Value Pulse frequency
[kHz]
8 0000H 3.2
9 0200H 6.3
10 0400H 4.7
0600H 7.8
0100H 2.8 from FW 3.00
0300H 5.0 from FW 3.00
0500H 3.9 from FW 3.00
0700H 5.9 from FW 3.00
Note:
An inverter clock cycle frequency > 3.2 kHz is
only possible if the output is de–rated
HS (refer to Table 1–3).
Table 4-11 Inverter clock cycle frequency 2, 3 and 4
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–331 – Online 4 0–7hex Inverter clock cycle frequency 2 from FW 3.00
Settings
Value Pulse frequency[kHz]
0000 3.2
0001 2.8
0002 6.3
0003 5.0
0004 4.7
0005 3.9
0006 7.8
0007 6.1
(P–330) – Online – 2.8–7.8kHz Displays the actual clock cycle frequency
The inverter clock cycle frequencies, set using these parameters, can be
changed–over using input terminals (refer to Section 3.2.2).


04.97
5.1 Diagnostic resources
Diagnostics and Fault Analysis 5

5.1.1 Measured value displays
Table 5-1 Measured value displays
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
(P–001) – – – –20000...20000 Speed setpoint
RPM HS
(P–002) –20000...20000 Speed actual value
– – –
(P–102) RPM
(P–003) – – – 0...500 V Motor voltage
(P–004) – – – 0...100.0 % Utilization (referred to the actual torque limit)
(P–006) – – – 0...700 V DC link voltage
(P–007) – – – 0...150 A Motor current
(P–008) – – – 0...100 kVA Motor reactive power
(P–009) – – – 0...100 kW Motor active power
(P–010) – – – 0...150 °C Motor temperature
Setpoint for open–loop torque controlled
(P–101) – – – –200...200 %
operation
(P–330) – – – 2.8...7.8 kHz Inverter clock cycle frequency

5.1.2 Status displays
P–000, P–100 Refer to Section 2.2.1, Table 2-10

operating display
P–011
status of the
digital inputs
Table 5-2 P–011 status of the digital inputs
Display
Display
value
Term. E6 Term. E2
Term. 63 Term. 663
central
– freely–program- freely–program-
HS pulse enable
NE
mable using mable using
axis–specific
pulse enable
P–086 P–082
Term. E7 Term. E3
Term. 64 Term. 65
central
– freely–program- freely–program-
controller enable axis–specific
mable using mable using
NE controller enable
P–087 P–083
Term. E8 Term. E4 Term. 81
open
– – freely–program- freely–program- ramp–function
mable using mable using generator fast
P–088 P–084 stop
Term. E9 Term. E5 Term. E1
– – freely–program- freely–program- freely–program-

mable using mable using mable using
P–089 P–085 P–081
Several messages can be displayed. The hexadecimal addition is displayed.

Example: 4H + 8H = CH

P–254
display, active
functions 1
Table 5-3 P–254 display, active functions 1
Display
Display
value
Fct. No. 9 Fct. No. 5 Fct. No. 1
– – Gearbox stage Star/delta 2nd torque limit

bit 0
– – Gearbox stage M19 operation Oscillation

bit 1

HS
Gearbox stage TH = 0 Reset fault
– –
bit 2 memory
(fault acknow-
ledgement)
– Setpoint enable – Integrator inhibit, Open–loop

speed controller torque controlled
operation


07.94
P–255
display, active
functions 2
Display
Display
value
Fct. No. 26 Fct. No. 32

– – –
Suppress F–11 Slip monitoring
Fct. No. 33
– – Inverter clock
Pos. reference HPC axis
cycle frequency
values 1...2
bit 0
HS Fct. No. 27
– C axis Incremental po- Inverter clock

Pos. reference
sitioning cycle frequency
values 3...4
bit 1
– Positioning on Speed setpoint Spindle re– –

smoothing synchronization
active


04.97
5.1.3 Diagnostic parameters
Table 5-5 Diagnostic parameters
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
(P–020) – – – – Diagnostics, speed actual value
If this is continually increased by several incre-
ments, then there is an increased noise signal level.
(counter for dn/dt monitoring)
Possible causes:
Encoder shield not grounded
Defective encoder
Electronics ground not OK
Motor ground not connected to the MSD module
Measuring circuit 1 defective
An excessive motor moment of inertia was
entered (P–159, P–219)
(P–028) – – – – Diagnostics
Bit Value
3 0008H Pre–alarm, temperature sensor HS
Breakage
Short–circuit
13 2000H Division interrupt due to an error
in the calculation routine due to
incorrectly entered data.
(P–299) – – – – Checksum parameter
At each data save operation (P–052 = 1H), the
checksum is formed across the parameter contents.
This means that a change in the drive machine data
is identified.
(P–320) – – – – Diagnostics, motor encoder zero from FW 3.00
If this is continually increased by several incre-
ments, then there is an increased noise signal level.
Possible causes:
Defective encoder
Measuring circuit defective
(P–321) – – – – Diagnostics, spindle encoder zero from FW 3.00
Prerequisite: Positioning with spindle encoder is
selected, spindle encoder pulse number in P–131.x
is to the power of 10.
There is an increased noise level, if this continually
increases by several increments.
Possible causes:
Defective encoder
Measuring circuit defective

07.94
5.1.4 Test sockets X1, X2, IR
Overview
Function
Technical data
Assignment
Normalization IR
Parameterization X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4)
Function Analog output of the phase current actual value and RAM variables for test and
diagnostic purposes.
Technical data
Phase current actual value at test socket IR
2 output channels at X1 (DAU 3) and X2 (DAU 4)
HS Voltage range 0...+ 5 V (value 0 corresponds to +2.5 V)

Coarse normalization, offset compensation for X1 and X2 via parameter
Assignment
X1: Test socket DAU 3

X1 X2 X2: Test socket DAU 4
IR M IR: Current actual value, phase R
M: Reference ground
Fig. 5-1 Assignment, test sockets
Normalization,
phase current IR
Table 5-6 Normalization IR
Power module Power module code Normalization IR

numbers (P–095)
50 A 6 50 A corresponds to 8.25 V

12.94
Parameterization
X1 (DAU 3),
X2 (DAU 4)
Table 5-7 Parameterization X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4)
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
output at DAU 3.
Pre–setting: |P/Prated| (RAM address: 3050H)
The selected data values are shifted to the left
1 corresponds to multiplication by 2
n corresponds to multiplication by 2n
Compensates any existing offset for DAU 3
P–072 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address DAU 4
Pre–setting: nact (RAM address: C04H)
HS
Output voltage [V]

+5.0
+2.5
0.0
Shift factor = 0 Hex numerical value

Offset = 0 V
Note
A list of all of the important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their
addresses are provided in the Attachment (Section 6.5).

07.94
5.1.5 Minimum/maximum value memory
Function RAM variables are monitored for minimum and maximum values.
Table 5-8 Minimum/maximum value memory
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–181 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address for min/max memory
Address for RAM variable
P–179 – Online 4 0...2 hex Select min/max memory
0H: Stop memory function
1H: Start memory function
with absolute value evaluation
2H: Start memory function
with bipolar evaluation
(P–182) – – – – Minimum value, min/max memory
(P–183) – – – – Max. value, min/max memory
HS
Note
5.1.6 Transient recorder function
Function 2 RAM variables are simultaneously recorded and output via test sockets X1
and X2.
Technical data
Two 16–bit signals are recorded in parallel
640 value recording depth
1 ms sampling time (P–090, bit 3=0) or 0.525 ms (P–090, bit 3=1, from
FW 3.00)
Start and stop conditions (trigger conditions)

Cyclic output via DAUs
Trigger condition for output

Parameterization
Table 5-9 Parameterization
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–207 – Online 4 0...10 hex Setting the transient recorder
1H: Start via P–206 without start and stop
condition
2H: Start condition P–208 and P–209, no
stop condition, start via P–206
5H: Stop condition via P–210 and P–211, no
start condition, start via P–206
6H: Record with start and stop condition
4H: Trace memory pre–set via
P–217
P–212 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address, signal 1
There is a list of the important measured quanti-
ties (RAM variables) and their addresses in the
Attachment (Section 6.5).
P–213 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address, signal 2
P–208 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address for the start condition
Address of the RAM variables which start the
recording HS
P–209 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Threshold for the start condition
Start condition mask, this is compared with the
RAM variable in P–208
P–210 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address for the stop condition
P–211 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Threshold for the stop condition
P–206 – Online 4 0...1 hex Select transient recorder
Starts the transient recorder function by setting
to 1H
P–215 – Online 4 0...15 dec Shift factor, signal 1
Refer to the description of test sockets X1, X2,
Section 5.1.4
P–216 – Online 4 0...15 dec Shift factor, signal 2
P–217 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Trigger signal 1
Trigger signal amplitude “low” for DAU output
P–218 – Online 4 0...FFFF hex Trigger signal 2
Trigger signal amplitude “high” for DAU output
P–214 – Online 4 0...1 hex Start output of the recorded trace
The recorded values are cyclically output at the
DAU
Recorded signal 1 → DAU 3 (X1)
Recorded signal 2 → DAU 4 (X2)
The previous assignment of the DAUs is buffered
and is re–selected after the output function has
been completed.
Note

5.1.7 Current/Hz control
Function Diagnostics for motor encoder faults
Function Above the speed at the start of field weakening (P–173), the absolute current
information should be selected to be lower than the no–load current, as otherwise voltage
limiting will become active. This will result in uneven running and torque surges.
The frequency should be slowly changed, as current/Hz operation is prone to
stalling.
Table 5-10 Current/Hz control
effective
Mot. 1 Mot. 2
P–311 – Online 4 0.0...100.0 % Current for current/Hz control
(referred to the rated motor current)
P–312 – Online 4 0.0...800.0 Hz Frequency for current/Hz control
P–313 – Online 4 0...1hex Select current/Hz control
0H: Current/Hz control off
1H: Current/Hz control on
HS

10.94
5.2 Fault analysis
5.2 Fault analysis
5.2.1 Fault display, fault acknowledgement
Fault display
Display
Inactive 1 fault
Several faults, select with key
Fault message number (refer to Table 5–11)
= Fault
= Positioning fault
Fig. 5-2 Fault display

HS
Fault By
acknowledgment P key
Press the P key if the controller is inhibited.

If the fault can be acknowledged, the system returns to the operator control
program.
If the fault cannot be acknowledged, as, for example, there is a defect, then
this can be temporarily suppressed in the display.
Remote acknowledgment
One of the following terminals is controlled for controller inhibit:
– Terminal “R” RESET at the NE and monitoring module
– Terminal “Reset fault memory” at the MSD module
Powering–down
Power–down the unit and power–up again approx. 2 s after the display goes
dark.
Fault suppression Using

– key
The system returns to the operator control program for approx. 1 minute
after pressing the – key; however, the fault is not acknowledged.

07.94
5.2 Fault analysis
5.2.2 Fault message list
Table 5-11 Fault message list
Fault Fault Cause Removing the fault

message
F–04 Incorrect setpoint A/D converter faulted (setpoint If this is repeated, replace the control
value conversion channel) board
F–07 Data save on the If the fault message is repeated, while 1. Re–start data save via P52=1
FEPROM was a data save is being made, then the
FEPROM is defective. 2. If fault F–07 occurs again, replace
unsuccessful
If the fault message occurs immedia- the control board
tely after powering–up the drive con-
verter, then the drive converter was
previously powered–down during a
data save operation. This means that
the last parameter changes are not
saved. A new data save operation
must be initiated.
F–08 Irretrievable data Defetive FEPROM Replace the control board

loss
HS F–09 Fault, Motor encoder not connected or Check the encoder cable/shielding, or
encoder system 1 defective Replace the motor encoder, or
(motor encoder) Motor encoder cable defective Replace the control board
Measuring circuit 1 (speed actual
value sensing) defective, not correctly
inserted or incorrectly equipped
(P–150).
The fault message can be suppressed via
P–090 bit 1 from FW 2.00 onwards.
F–10 Fault Positioning with spindle encoder Correctly adapt P33 (refer to the
equipping selected (P141=1, P143=1), incorrect Start–up Guide, Section 3.3.4)
parameterization
module version FW 1/2 Replace with the correct control
encoder system 2 Positioning with spindle encoder board version
selected (P141=1, P143=1), there is Connect the spindle encoder
no spindle encoder at X432 FW 3.00
Positioning with spindle encoder
(P141=1, P143=1) and output of
squarewave–converted motor
encoder signals X432 selected
(P033<>0)
FW 3.00
Output of squarewave–converted
motor encoder signals at X432
selected (P033<>0), there is a spindle
encoder at X432 FW 3.00

5.2 Fault analysis

message
F–11 Speed controller Motor overloaded Avoid motor overload (P004<100%)

is at its limit, Tighten the DC link busbars
speed actual va- DC link busbars not connected
lue missing DC link fuse defective
Defective transistor in the power Replace the power module

module Connect the motor encoder
Motor encoder not connected
Defective motor encoder cable
Defective motor encoder Replace the motor encoder

Motor ground not connected Check the PE/motor connection
Motor encoder cable shield not Ground the shield or replace the
connected encoder cable
Motor not connected or phase missing Correctly connect the motor phases
Motor stalled Release the motor (mech. blockage)
Measuring circuit 1 (speed actual Contactor between the motor and
value sensing) defective or not drive converter must be closed
correctly connected Replace the control board
(The delay time can be set via P–248.) HS
F–14 Motor Motor overloaded Reduce the motor load
overtemperature Motor current to high, e. g. due to in- Correct the motor data
correct motor data (P–096)
Defective temperature sensor (motor) Changeover to the 2nd temperature

Defective motor fan sensor
Measuring circuit 1 (speed actual Connect the fan

value – motor) defective Replace the control board or motor
encoder
Winding short, motor Replace the motor
F–15 Drive converter Drive converter overloaded (incorrect Correct the motor/drive converter
overtemperature motor/drive converter assignment, in- assignment (P95/96). Reduce the
correct load duty cycle) Md limit (P39)
Ambient temperature too high Power module too small
Fan failed Replace power module
Inverter clock cycle frequency greater Reduce clock cycle frequency
than 3.2 kHz
Temperature sensor defective
Acknowledgement: Only after cooling–
down below 50C15K, by
powering–down and powering–up again.
F–16 Illegal Incorrect code number 3 selected in Load the correct code number
power module P–095 (for power modules without
automatic recognition)
code
Incorrect code number selected in
P–095 (for power modules with auto-
matic recognition) from FW 3.00
F–17 I0 motor > Irated Incorrect motor/drive converter Correctly set Io motor, or
power module assignment Use a larger power module

5.2 Fault analysis

message
F–18 Fault, Spindle encoder not connected or Connect or replace the

encoder system 2 defective FW 3.00 spindle encoder
(spindle encoder) Defective spindle encoder cable Check the connecting cable,
FW 3.00 encoder/drive converter
Measuring circuit 2 defective Replace the control board

FW 3.00
The fault message can be suppressed via
P–090 bit 5.
F–19 Temperature sen- Temperature sensor defective (PTC Replace the temperature sensor
sor thermistor
at 20°C 600 Ω, if required, use the
Interrupted
2nd PTC thermistor of the motor)
Short–circuit
Sensor connection interrupted Re–establish the connection between

the temperature sensor and motor/
drive converter
Measuring circuit 1 defective Replace the control board
HS Acknowledgement: Only by powering–

down and powering–up.
F–61 Max. motor Incorrectly entered encoder pulse Correctly enter the encoder pulse
frequency number (P–098) FW 2.00 number (P98)
exceeded Master/slave have no force–locked Re–establish the mechanical force–

connection locked connection (slave drive)
F–79 Division interrupt Incorrect motor data in P–159 to Correctly set the motor data
(message can be P–176 or P–219 to P–236
suppressed by
setting P–053, bit Field weakening > 1:16 Field weakening < 1:16
11)
FP–01 Setpoint > enco- Setpoint input too high (P–121 to Setpoint input must be set lower
der pulse number P–125, P–131). External position (max P131)
reference value
FP–02 Zero mark moni- Zero mark signal from the encoder or Set the Bero clearance lower or
toring has BERO interrupted replace the BERO
responded
Incorrect parameterization (P–131) Replace the cabling
Replace the encoder
Parameter setting in P131 greater
than the pulse number per revolution
FP–03 Zero mark Value in P–130 > than the pulse The entry in P–130 must be set lower
shift > encoder number in P–131 than the value in P–131
pulse number

10.00
5.2 Fault analysis

message
FP–04 No valid There is no valid zero mark when setting Rotate the spindle at least through
zero mark P–129 to 1, e. g.: one revolution (rotate through 3600
and again set P129 to 1). Check the
After power–up zero mark if the fault is still present.
After the gearbox stage change If a BERO is being used, adjust the
clearance, check the cabling or re-
place the Bero.
For spindle/motor encoder, check
the cabling or replace the encoder.
F–60 Power offset Pulse and/or controller enable missing Enable the pulses and controller.
adjustment Only then can the adjustment be
started (to FW 2.40)
HS

07.94
5.2 Fault analysis
Faults After
Power ON
Operating display inactive
– minimum two phases missing (NE/monitoring module)
– at least two input fuses have failed (NE/monitoring module)
– electronics power supply in the NE/monitoring module defective
– equipment bus connection (ribbon cable), MSD module ↔ NE/
monitoring module not inserted or defective
– defective control board
– defective EPROM/FEPROM
– no valid firmware loaded, display:
“– – – – – –” or ERROR
Controller enable (without fault message)

Motor rotates, max. 30 RPM at nset > 30 RPM or the motor oscillates
(oscillation not selected) at nset < 30 RPM
– incorrect motor rotating field, as feeder cables interchanged
(interchange 2 phase connections).
HS – excessively high motor encoder pulse number entered
Motor remains stationary for a speed setpoint which is not equal to zero
– oscillation function is selected (P–154, P–155=0)
– terminal 81 not selected
– function number 16 (setpoint enable) programmed but not selected
Motor briefly moves
– defective power module
Motor accelerates to a high speed
– pulse number too low
Positioning on
The drive rotates with the search speed but does not position
– pulse number between two zero marks too high


6 Attachment
Attachment 6
HS

6.1 Flow diagram for short start–up
Warning
! The drive accelerates up to nset, if a fault at the NE module is acknowledged
with the MSD module enabled.
Note
If the data save operation is interrupted due to power failure or the equipment
being powered–down, values which had changed since the last data save
are lost, and after the drive converter is powered–up again, it outputs fault
message “F–07”. The parameter values can be set again after fault message
“F–07” has been acknowledged (refer to Section 5.2.2).
START
Before the unit is powered–up:
HS Check the connections in accordance with the circuit–diagram of

the system.
Disconnect or de–energize the pulse and controller enable (termi-
nal 663, terminal 65).
Determine the code number for the motor and power module
(list, refer to Table 6–1 to 6-5)
Power–up the unit

(power ON)
Does the display yes

remain inactive? Fault
no
Is “F–...” yes Fault

displayed flashing? (refer to Section 5.2.2)
no
Is “P–000”
displayed (refer no
to Section
2.2.1)?
yes
1 2

04.97
1
2
Set P–051 to 4H
(remove write protection)
Set P–097 to 0H
(initialize)
Set P–052 to 1H setzen

The module was already (write into the FEPROM)
commissioned. In order to
adapt it to a new motor, it Wait until P–052 has been set to 0H
must be first brought into the again and then power–down
initialized condition. the drive converter and 2 s after
the operating display has gone dark,
power–up gain.
Display, “P–095” or “P–096”

P–095:Enter or check the power
module code number
P–096:Enter the motor code number
P–098:Enter the number of encoder pulses
per motor revolution.
HS
Set P–097 to 1H
“SEtUP” is displayed
Wait until P–000 is displayed

Is a special
yes
motor being used for
which a code number for
P–096 has not been
defined?
Set P–051 to 10H
no Enter P–159 to P–176
Set P–177 to 1H (calculate motor data).

Wait until P–177 has been again set to
Set P–051 to 4H. 0H.
Set P–051 to 4H.
Set P–052 to 1H.
Wait until P–052 is again set to 0H.

The motor data are transferred into the
FEPROM.

Check the following parameters and if required change:
P–014 Normalization nset

P–015 Offset correction nset
P–016 Ramp–up time, ramp–function generator

P–017 Ramp–down time, ramp–function generator
P–029 Max. motor speed nmaxmot
P–021 to P–023, Relay response values

P–027 of the speed monitoring
P–039 to P–043 Torque limit values

P–047 to P–050
HS P–081 to P–089 Freely–programmable

terminal functions
P–185 to P–194, Freely–programmable

P–241 to P–246 relay functions
P–180 for Y/∆ motor
no
Values changed?
yes
Set P–052 to 1H

The changed values are transferred
into the FEPROM.

4 Status of the two center positions of

the operating display “P–000” (refer
to Section 2.2.1)
All enable signals are disconnected at

the NE and MSD modules.
All enable signals at the NE module

are at the enable voltage.
Connect the enable voltage to the

axis–specific pulse enable terminal
663 at the MSD module.
Controller enable
Connect the enable voltage to termi-
nal 65 at the MSD module.
Connect the speed setpoint at termi-

nal 56 and terminal 14 and set to 0 V
HS
(display at P–001).
Is the
no terminal fct. 16 yes
(setpoint enable) selected and
not switched–in.
Remove ramp–function
generator fast stop, terminal 81.
Remove ramp–function
generator fast stop, terminal 81.
Enable the setpoint enable

via a select terminal
Slightly increase the speed setpoint. If fault message

F–11 is output, the speed actual value is either faulted or
the motor is incorrectly connected. If the motor oscillates,
then either the phase sequence at the motor is incorrect, or
oscillation has been pre–selected.

Disable the ramp–function generator via terminal

62 (TH = 0), if the terminal is parameterized.
Optimize the speed controller via P–031 and P–032.
If required, re–adjust the limit values or relay

control thresholds.
no
Values changed?
yes
Set P–052 to 1H.

HS The modified values are transferred into the
FEPROM.
After commissioning, save the modified

parameter values in a file or document
in a list.
Set P–051 to 0H
End

04.97
6.2 Code numbers for power modules and standard motors
Table 6-1 Power module code number
Order No.
Power Rated output Peak output current, Peak output current, Power
6SN1123–1AA0
module current briefly briefly module code
6SN1124–1AA0
type [A] S6–40 % 10 min [A] S6–40 %. 10 s [A] No. P–095
6SN1135–1BA1
50 A –0CA 24 32 32 6
80 A –0DA 30 40 51 7
108 A –0LA 45 60 76 13 FW 2.40
120 A –0GA 45 60 76 8
160 A –0EA 60 80 102 9
200 A –0FA 85 110 127 10
300 A –0JA 120 150 193 11 FW 2.00
400 A –0KA 200 250 257 12 FW 2.00
Table 6-2 Motor code number
Order No. Rated motor Rated motor No–load Rated speed Motor code
Max. speed
[MLFB] AC output current motor current [RPM]
[RPM]
number HS
motor 1PH6... [kW] [A] [A] P–096
101–NF4 3.7 12.5 6.2 1500 101
101–NG4 4.7 13.7 6.9 2000 102
103–NF4 5.5 17.9 9.1 1500 103
103–NG4 7.0 19.4 9.9 2000 104
105–NF4 7.5 22.5 11.5 1500 105
9000
105–NG4 9.5 25.3 13.1 2000 106
105–NZ4 12.0 27.0 15.6 3000 140
107–NC4 5.0 22.7 11.7 750 131
107–NF4 9.0 26.9 14.2 1500 107
107–NG4 11.5 29.8 15.6 2000 108
131–NF4 9.0 27.2 11.7 1500 109
131–NG4 12.0 32.1 13.6 2000 110
131–NZ0 8.0 23.2 10.9 1500 141 FW 2.00
133–NB4 4.5 26.0 9.8 525 132
133–NF0 11.0 26.7 11.5 1500 111
133–NF4 11.0 31.3 13.4 1500 112
133–NG0 14.5 31.5 14.5 2000 136
133–NG4 14.5 37.5 16.1 2000 113
135–NF0 15.0 35.0 16.1 1500 114
135–NF4 15.0 41.3 18.8 1500 8000 115
135–NG4 20.0 50.6 22.8 2000 116
137–NB4 7.9 43.6 18.6 525 133
137–NF4 18.5 50.2 22.9 1500 117
137–NG0 24.0 50.0 23.2 2000 137
137–NG4 24.0 57.8 26.5 2000 118
137–NZ4 11.0 41.8 18.0 750 143 FW 3.00
138–NF0 22.0 51.5 24.6 1500 119
138–NF4 22.0 61.0 28.7 1500 120
138–NG4 28.0 66.1 31.4 2000 121

04.97
07.94
Table 6-2 Motor code number
Max. speed
[MLFB] AC output current motor current [RPM] number
[RPM]
motor 1PH6... [kW] [A] [A] P–096
161–NF0 22.0 53.5 23.9 1500 122
161–NF4 22.0 60.8 26.9 1500 123
161–NG4 28.0 68.1 31.3 2000 124
163–NB4 11.5 66.2 27.8 500 134
163–NF0 30.0 72.5 33.3 1500 125
163–NF4 30.0 86.0 40.3 1500 126
163–NG4 38.0 84.0 37.5 2000 127
6500
163–NZ0 19.0 56.0 25.2 950 139
167–NB4 14.5 78.0 34.4 500 135
167–NF0 37.0 79.6 36.3 1500 128
167–NF4 37.0 95.7 43.5 1500 129
167–NG0 45.0 83.3 32.2 2000 138
167–NG4 45.0 91.0 41.0 2000 130
168–NF0 40.0 84.0 38.0 1500 142 FW 2.00
186–NB4 26.8 66.0 35.5 610 161
6100
186–NB9 30.8 67.0 35.0 700 167
186–NB4 22.0 66.0 35.5 500 160
186–NE4 42.0 86.0 46.0 1250 163
186–NF4 50.0 100.0 52.0 1500 164
206–NB4 32.0 96.0 48.0 500 5000 162
206–NE4 63.0 125.0 64.0 1250 165
HS 206–NF4 76.0 149.0 68.0 1500 166
226–NF4 100.0 192.0 79.0 1500 168 FW 2.00
Max. speed
[RPM]
motor 1PH7... [kW] [A] [A] P–096
101–NF4 3.7 8.9 4.82 1500 9000 400 FW 3.00
103–NG4 7 16.2 7.84 2000 9000 402 FW 3.00
105–NF4 7 16.4 8.36 1500 9000 403 FW 3.00
107–NF4 9 20.8 9.91 1500 9000 404 FW 3.00
131–NF4 11 23.1 8.36 1500 8000 406 FW 3.00
133–ND4 12 28 12.7 1000 8000 408 FW 3.00
133–NG4 20 43 17.4 2000 8000 409 FW 3.00
137–ND4 17 40.7 18.5 1000 8000 411 FW 3.00
137–NG4 28 58.6 21.4 2000 8000 412 FW 3.00
163–ND4 22 52.7 24.1 1000 6500 414 FW 3.00
163–NF4 30 70.3 30.1 1500 6500 415 FW 3.00
167–NF4 37 77.8 31.9 1500 6500 417 FW 3.00
184–2NE 40.0 85.0 46.2 1250 5000 418 FW 2.40
184–2NB 22.0 54.0 34.7 500 5000 419 FW 2.40
184–NT 21.5 76 40 500 5000 424 FW 3.00
186–2NE 60.0 120.0 63.0 1250 5000 420 FW 2.40
186–2NB 29.6 75.0 42.5 500 5000 421 FW 3.00
186–NT 29.6 106 56 500 5000 425 FW 2.40
224–2NF 100.0 188.0 73.0 1500 4500 422 FW 2.40
224–2NC 55.0 117.0 63.5 700 4500 423 FW 2.40
101–NF 3.7 9.8 5.9 1500 9000 426 FW 3.1
103–NG 7 17.1 8.3 2000 9000 427 FW 3.1
105–2NF 7 17.4 9.4 1500 9000 428 FW 3.1
107–NF 9 22.5 11 1500 9000 429 FW 3.1

Table 6-3 Star/Delta motors
Order No. Rated motor Rated motor No load Motor code

[MLFB] output current motor current Rated speed Max. speed number
Y/∆ motors [kW] [A] [A] [RPM] [RPM] P–096
1PH6... Y/ Y/
133–4NB8 4.3 15.3/13.5 6.4/8.0 525/1250 200
8000
137–4NB8 7.5 25.2/22.5 11.7/13.5 525/1250 202
163–4NB8 11.5 39.5/35.2 14.3/20.8 500/1250 204
6500
167–4NB8 14.5 45.5/40.5 17.9/23.2 550/1250 206
186–4NB8 22.0 55.0/50.0 31.0/35.0 500/1250 208
206–4NB8 32.0 76.0/73.0 38.0/49.0 500/1250 5000 210
226–4NB8 42.0 94.0/88.0 56.0/55.0 500/1250 214 FW 2.00
Table 6-4 Water–cooled motors
Order No. Rated motor Rated motor No load Rated speed Motor code
Max. speed
[RPM]
motor 1PH4... [kW] [A] [A] P–096
103–4NG6 8.5 36.4 17.7 2000 18000 301
105–4NG6 12.0 51.3 24.4 2000 17000 303
107–4NG6 16.0 55.5 26.9 2000 305
133–4NF6 14.0 55.9 21.4 1500
16000
307 HS
135–4NF6 20.0 76.6 29.7 1500 15000 309
137–4NF6 25.0 92.8 35.9 1500 14000 311
138–4NF6 28.0 102.2 40.0 1500 13000 313
163–4ND6 25.0 103.8 42.4 1000 12000 315
167–4ND6 31.0 129.4 50.7 1000 11000 317
168–4ND6 35.0 143.9 58.6 1000 10000 319
103–4NF2 7.5 25.2 11.5 1500 300
105–4NF2 11.0 36.6 16.4 1500 9000 302
107–4NF2 14.0 45.0 19.0 1500 304
133–4NF2 15.0 53.1 17.4 1500 306
135–4NF2 22.0 70.7 25.5 1500 308
8000
137–4NF2 27.0 81.9 30.3 1500 310
138–4NF2 30.0 97.3 33.8 1500 312
163–4NF2 37.0 103.0 44.0 1500 314
167–4NF2 46.0 115.0 49.2 1500 6500 316
168–4NF2 52.0 143.0 58.8 1500 318

07.94
Table 6-5 Built–in motors
Order No. Rated motor Rated motor No load Rated speed Motor code
Max. speed
[RPM]
motor 1PH2... [kW] [A] [A] P–096
092–4WG4 4.7 20.6 10.6 2000 326
18000
096–4WG4 10.0 41.6 21.5 2000 327
123–4WF4 11.5 54.5 21.1 1500 328
127–4WF4 21.0 80.8 33.4 1500 16000 329
128–4WF4 25.0 97.1 37.4 1500 330
143–4WF4 30.0 96.5 41.8 1500 331
12000
147–4WF4 38.0 111.3 43.7 1500 332
093–6WF4 7.5 23.1 10.9 1500 320
095–6WF4 10.0 28.4 13.6 1500 321
113–6WF4 15.0 53.3 21.8 1500 322
10000
115–6WF4 16.5 52.7 21.9 1500 323
117–6WF4 18.0 58.9 24.7 1500 324
118–6WF4 23.0 78.9 32.8 1500 325
182–6WC4 11.8 37.0 17.0 750 333 FW 2.00
184–6WP4 14.5 56.0 25.7 600 8000 334 FW 2.00
186–6WB4 18.3 62.5 31.0 525 335 FW 2.00
188–6WB4 23.6 78.0 38.0 500 336 FW 2.00
6000
254–6WB4 28.8 118.0 42.0 500 337 FW 2.00
256–6WB4 39.3 119.0 54.0 500 4000 338 FW 2.00
HS
Measuring system pulse number is 256 or 512 depending on the toothed–wheel
encoder used.

04.97
6.3 Overview of connections
Overview
Connection diagram
Terminals
Relay terminals
Star/delta changeover
Warning
! Cable shields and cores in power cables which are not used
(e.g. braking cores) must be connected to PE potential in order to discharge
any charges occurring from capacitive coupling.
Hazardous touch voltages can occur if this is not observed.
Note: When using non–PELV circuits at terminals AS1 and AS2, the connector
must be prevented from being incorrectly inserted by using the appropriate
connector coding (refer to EN 60204–1, Section 6.4) HS
Refer to Catalog NC 60 for the coding connector Order Nos.

07.94
Connection dia-
gram SIMODRIVE
611 analog system
NE module MSD module
X111 Module, X432 BERO input X412
External
internal Motor encoder
74 spindle encoder input
motor encoder output
Ready 73.2
signal 73.1
X1 X2
72 IR M
X121 Module,
Group signal 5.3
I2t, temperature 5.2 External X421 X451 internal
monitoring 5.1 56 A91
63 nset1 DAU 1
Pulse enable 14 M
9 En+
9 24 A92
Drive enable En+ nset2 DAU 2
64 8 M
19 En– X431 X441
X141 External Internal
7 P24 IF 663 289
45 P15 RF
44 N15 65 A11 Relay 11)
10 HSS 81 Relay 21)
N24 A21
15 M T. 11) E1 A31 Relay 31)
15 M T. 21) E2 A41 Relay 41)
R RESET
X161 T. 31) Relay 51)
HS Setting–up
9
112
En+
T. 41)
E3
E4
A51
A61 Relay 61)
Contactor control 48 T. 51) E5 672
111 T. 61) Ready
Signaling contact E6 673
213
line contactor T. 71) E7 674
Fault
113
X171 T. 81) E8
NS1
NS2 T. 91) E9 AS1 Sign.contact
X172 Signaling contact En+ 9 AS2 start inhibit
AS1
AS2 start inhibit
X411 X433
SPP 5V RS232C BERO input2)
EXT UNIT interface

VDC>>
X181 M500 X351
X151
X351
P500 Equipment bus

2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1 DC link P 600
2W1 M 600
1W1
X131
U1 V1 W1 PE1 U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2

FN LK
L1 at
M
L2 3 G SG
L3 from NC
PE
Warning! If a power contactor is used between the motor and MSD module, then it must be ensured that
! this contactor is always switched when it is in a no–current condition. (It may only be opened
after the pulses have been canceled (terminal 663), and then 40 ms later, the contactor itself).
Fig. 6-1 Connection diagram
1) Freely–programmable inputs and outputs

2) From Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1121–0BA11–0AA1

04.97
Terminals
Table 6-6 Terminals
Ter- Designa- Max. cross–section

Type Typ. voltage/
minal tion Function 1) limit values
No.
U2
V2 Motor connection O 3–ph. ...450 V According to the Planning Guide
W2 AC

PE2 Protective conductor O 0V Stud
X151/351 Equipment bus I/O Various Ribbon cable

56 X421 Speed setpoint 1 I 10V/0.5mA 1.5 mm2
14 X421 (differential input) I (max. 11 V) 1.5 mm2
24 X421 Speed setpoint 2 I 10V/0.5mA 1.5 mm2
8 X421 (differential input) I (max. 11 V) 1.5 mm2
C axes or
supplementary speed setpo-
int
663 X431 Axis–specific pulse enable
I
+21V...+33V
1.5 mm2
HS
65 X431 Controller enable +13V...+30V
I 1.5 mm2
81 X431 Ramp–function generator fast +13V...+30V
I 1.5 mm2
E1 X431 stop +13V...+30V
I 1.5 mm2
E2 X431 Fr.–prog. enable terminal 12) +13V...+30V
I 1.5 mm2
I 1.5 mm2
I 1.5 mm2
I 1.5 mm2
I 1.5 mm2
I 1.5 mm2
I 1.5 mm2
I 1.5 mm2
93) X431 Fr.–prog. enable terminal 92) +24V
O 1.5 mm2
Enable voltage
A91 X451 Analog output DAU1 O 10 V 3 mA 1.5 mm2
M X451 Ref. potential for DAU1 O 0V 1.5 mm2
A92 X451 Analog output DAU2 O 10 V 3 mA 1.5 mm2
M X451 Ref. potential for DAU2 O 0V 1.5 mm2
X1 Test socket O 0 V...5 V 3 mA Test socket, 2 mm diameter
IR Test socket O 10 V 3 mA Test socket, 2 mm diameter
M Test socket O 0V Test socket, 2 mm diameter
1) I = Input, O = Output
2) Can be freely–programmed using operator control parameters
3) Refer to Sections 3.1...3.2

07.94
Relay terminals
Table 6-7 Relay terminals
Ter-
Designa- Type Typ. voltage/limit va-
minal Function 1) Max. cross–section
tion lues
No.
289 X441 Signals, center contact I 30 V/6.0 A max3) 1.5 mm2
A11 X441 Fr.–prog. relay fct. 12) NO 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
A51) X441 Fr.–prog. relay fct. 52) NO 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
672 X441 Ready/no fault, axis– NO 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2

673 X441 specific I 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
674 X441 NC 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
AS 1 X441 Signaling contact I 250 VAC/1 A, 1.5 mm2
AS 2 X441 Start inhibit NC 30 VDC/2 A 1.5 mm2
HS
1) I = Input, NC = NC contact, NO = NO contact

2) Can be freely programmed using operator control parameters
3) When using several relays, the total current may not exceed 6 A.

Star/delta Motors with star/delta changeover allow a wider constant power range. At lower
changeover speeds, the drive is operated in the star configuration (high torque) and at hig-
her speeds, in the delta configuration (high stall torque). It is possible to chan-
geover between star and delta operation while the drive is running. The chan-
geover command (star/delta) must be externally entered (similar to a gearbox
stage changeover).
SIMODRIVE 611 analog system Selectable

relay outputs 2)
MSD module
U2 V2 W2 PE
T. 663 T. En1) T. An2) T. An2) T. 289
K2
Auxiliary contactor
Kx3) K1 power supply,
K2h K1h max. 30 V DC
K1h K2h
HS
Kx3)
K1 K2
U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2
U2
K2 K1
V2
W2
K1 ∆ K2 Y
1PH
Y/∆
Pulse Y/∆
enable changeover
From NC/PLC
Fig. 6-2 Connection diagram for Y/∆ changeover
1) One input terminal, selectable from terminals E1 to E9.

2) Two relay outputs, selectable from terminals A11 to A61.
3) A safe operating stop is not guaranteed by just opening K1 and K2.
This means, for safety–related reasons, contactor Kx must provide electrical isolation.
This contactor may only be switched when it is in a no–current condition, i. e. the pulses must be inhibited 40 ms
before the contactor is opened.

6.4 Connector assignments
Overview
Connector assignment X412 and motor connector
Connector assignment X432 for the spindle encoder
Connector assignment X432 for the BERO
Connector assignment X432 for motor encoder signal output for the NC
Connector assign-
ment, X412 and
motor connector X412: 15–pin sub–D socket connector, shift latch
Motor connector: 17–pin, round connector
Please note: The connector may only be inserted and removed when the
equipment is in a no–voltage condition.
HS Table 6-8 Connector assignment: Encoder signals, motor
Signal name X412/PIN No. Motor connector/PIN No.

P encoder 1 10
M encoder 2 7
A 3 1
A 4 2
Inner shield 5 17
B 6 11
B 7 12
5 V sense 9 16
R 10 3
0 V sense 11 15
R 12 13
+ Temp 14 8
– Temp 15 9
8
15 11 1
10
12 2
16
13 3
9 15 17
14 4
8
7 6 5
9
1
The outer shield is connected to the connector housing.

04.97
Connector assign- 15–pin sub–D plug connector: Shift latch

ment, X432 for the
spindle encoder
Please observe: The connector may only be inserted and removed when
the equipment is in a no–voltage condition.
Table 6-9 Connector assignment: Evaluation for incremental encoders with TTL
squarewave signals
PIN No. Signal name Explanation

1 5V Encoder power supply
2 0V Ground, encoder power
supply
3 A Signal A
4 A Signal A, inverted
5 May not be assigned
6 B Signal B
7 B Signal B, inverted
9 5 V sense Sensor line
10 May not be assigned HS
11 0 V sense Sensor line, ground
12 R Signal R
13 R Signal R, inverted
Connector assign- Please observe: The connector may only be inserted and removed when
ment, X432 for the equipment is in a no–voltage condition.
BERO
Table 6-10 Connector assignment: Evaluating external reference marks

10 En + 24 V
14 BERO Signal
15 En – Ground
BERO
Table 6-11 Connector assignment: Evaluating external reference marks

1 En + 24 V
2 BERO Signal
3 En – Ground

motor encoder
signal output for
NC
Table 6-12 Connector assignment: Motor encoder signal output with TTL
squarewave signals

2 0V Ground, encoder power
supply
3 A Signal A
4 A Signal A, inverted
6 B Signal B
7 B Signal B, inverted
HS 11 May not be assigned
12 R Signal R
13 R Signal R, inverted

Connector X432
R1
td
td
R2
td td
R3
td td
Fig. 6-3 X432: Output signals for numerical control

HS
R1: Multiplication factor 1 and 0.5
R2: Multiplication factor 2
R3: Multiplication factor 4
Incremental signals: TTL squarewave pulse trains A and B and their
inverted pulse trains A and B.
For clockwise direction of rotation, B lags A.
Edge clearance: a ≥ 200 ns, if the maximum permissible encoder
signal input frequency is not exceeded
Reference signal: One squarewave pulse R per mech. revolution
and its inverted pulse R.
Delay time: |td| ≥ 50 ns
Load capacity: –IaHigh ≥ 20 mA
IaLow ≥ 20 mA
CLoad ≥ 1000 pF
Signal level: Open output (internal 270 Ω) 3.5 V,
for a total minimum terminating resistance
60 Ω 2.5 V.
Additional details can be taken from the
RS422A interface description.

07.94
6.5 Addresses, RAM variables
6.5 Addresses, RAM variables
The following applies for all of the address data: Segment address = 0H
Table 6-13 Addresses, RAM variables
Address Address low Corres- Cyclic update

Variable Value
high ponds to time
Speed setpoint 0C02H 0C00H 10 0000H nrated Speed controller
clock cycle as
Speed actual value 0C06H 0C04H 10 0000H nrated
parameterized in
Absolute speed actual value (1 ms) – 1402H 1 000H nrated P–090
Speed, setpoint–actual value diffe- 0C0AH 0C08H 10 000H nrated
rence
Torque setpoint from the speed con- – 0C66H Addr. 0F52H Mdrated
troller
Torque setpoint for K/P converter – 0C6CH Addr. 0F52H Mdrated
Actual Mdset for Md operation – 0C6EH Addr. 0F52H Mdrated
Input, ramp–function generator 0E00H 0E02H 10 0000H nrated
Output, ramp–function generator 0E04H 0E06H 10 0000H nrated
HS Magnetizing current setpoint – 0F5CH 2 000H Irated 1 ms
Active current setpoint – 0F5EH 2 000H Irated Speed controller
clock cycle as
Slip frequency setpoint – 0F7CH 2 000H frated parameterized in
P–090
Stator temperature – 0FC2H 64H 100 °C 1s
Input, digital filter – 1B08H Addr. 0F52H Mdrated Speed controller
clock cycle as
Output, digital filter – 1B0AH Addr. 0F52H Mdrated parameterized in
P–090
DC link voltage – 906H2) 3593 600 V 1 ms
Power P/Prated – 3064H 4000H Prated 1 ms
Power |P/Prated| – 3050H1) 4000H Prated 1 ms
1) from FW 2.00
2) up to FW 2.40

10.00
6.6 Setting and monitoring data (parameter list)

Fields with gray background: Data cannot be entered
Table 6-14 Overview of the parameters (search help for the descriptions)
P– Sec- Page P– Sec- Page P– Sec- Page P– Sec- Page P– Sec- Page
tion tion tion tion tion
000 2.2.1 25 040 2.2.3 28 080 5.1.4 83 120 4.2 75 160 2.1 18
001 5.1.1 77 041 2.2.3 28 081 3.2.2 59 121 2.3.3 35 161 2.1 18
002 5.1.1 77 042 2.2.3 28 082 3.2.2 59 122 2.3.3 35 162 2.1 18
003 5.1.1 77 043 2.2.3 28 083 3.2.2 59 123 2.3.3 35 163 2.1 18
004 5.1.1 77 044 4.1 73 084 3.2.2 59 124 2.3.3 35 164 2.1 18
005 – – 045 4.1 73 085 3.2.2 59 125 2.3.3 35 165 2.1 18
006 5.1.1 77 046 4.1 73 086 3.2.2 59 126 2.3.3 36 166 2.1 18
007 5.1.1 77 047 3.3.2 63 087 3.2.2 59 127 – – 167 2.1 18
008 5.1.1 77 048 2.3.4 46 088 3.2.2 59 128 2.3.3 42 168 2.1 18
009 5.1.1 77 049 2.3.4 46 089 3.2.2 59 129 2.3.3 36 169 2.1 18
010 5.1.1 77 050 2.2.3 28 090 1.3 10 130 2.3.3 36 170 2.1 18
011 5.1.2 78 051 1.3 9 091 2.3.6 52 131 2.3.3 36 171 2.1 18
012 3.3.5 68 052 1.3 9 092 2.3.6 52 132 2.3.3 42 172 2.1 18/19 HS
013 3.3.5 68 053 1.3 9 093 2.3.6 50 133 2.3.3 42 173 2.1 16/19
014 3.1 56 054 2.3.1 30 094 2.3.6 50 134 2.3.3 33/37 174 2.1 18
015 3.1 56 055 2.3.1 30 095 2.1 15/17 135 2.3.3 33/37 175 2.1 18/19
016 4.1 70 056 2.3.1 30 096 2.1 15/17 136 2.3.3 33/37 176 2.1 16/19
017 4.1 70 057 – – 097 2.1 15/17 137 2.3.3 33/37 177 2.1 16/18
018 4.1 69 058 2.3.1 30 098 2.1 15/17 138 2.3.3 33/37 178 2.1 23
019 4.1 69 059 – – 099 2.2.2 26 139 2.3.3 33/37 179 5.1.5 84
020 5.1.3 81 060 – – 100 2.2.1 25 140 2.3.3 42 180 2.1 24
021 3.3.2 63 061 – – 101 5.1.1 77 141 2.3.3 32/38 181 5.1.5 84
022 2.2.3 27 062 2.3.1 30 102 5.1.1 77 142 2.3.3 33/39 182 5.1.5 84
023 3.3.2 63 063 2.2.3 29 103 4.1 74 143 2.3.3 39 183 5.1.5 84
024 3.1 56 064 2.2.3 29 104 4.1 74 144 2.3.3 40 184 – –
025 2.2.3 27 065 2.2.3 29 105 – – 145 2.3.3 40 185 3.3.3 64
026 3.3.5 68 066 3.3.5 67 106 2.3.6 51 146 2.3.3 40 186 3.3.3 64
027 3.3.2 63 067 3.3.5 67 107 2.3.6 52 147 2.3.3 42 187 3.3.3 64
028 5.1.3 81 068 3.3.5 67 108 2.3.6 52 148 2.3.3 40 188 3.3.3 64
029 2.2.3 27 069 3.3.5 67 109 2.3.6 49 149 2.3.3 36/41 189 3.3.3 64
030 3.1 57 070 – – 110 2.3.6 49 150 2.2.2 26 190 3.3.3 64
031 4.1 71 071 3.3.5 68 111 2.3.6 51 151 1.3 9 191 3.3.3 64
032 4.1 71 072 5.1.4 83 112 2.3.6 51 152 1.3 9 192 3.3.3 64
033 3.3.4 65 073 5.1.4 83 113 3.1 55 153 – – 193 3.3.3 64
034 4.1 70 074 5.1.4 83 114 2.3.2 31 154 2.2.3 29 194 3.3.3 64
035 4.1 76 075 – – 115 2.3.2 31 155 2.2.3 29 195 4.1 72
036 2.2.3 27 076 5.1.4 83 116 4.2 75 156 2.2.3 29 196 4.1 72
037 2.2.3 27 077 5.1.4 83 117 4.1 74 157 2.2.3 29 197 – –
038 2.2.3 27 078 3.3.5 67 118 4.1 74 158 2.1 18 198 4.1 72
039 2.2.3 28 079 3.3.5 67 119 2.3.6 52 159 2.1 18 199 4.1 72

07.94
Table 6-14 Overview of the parameters (search help for the descriptions), continued
P– Sec- Page P– Sec- Page P– Sec- Page P– Sec- Page P– Sec- Page
tion tion tion tion tion
200 – – 230 2.1 22 260 3.3.2 63 290 2.2.3 28 320 5.1.3 81
201 4.1 76 231 2.1 22 261 2.2.3 27 291 2.2.3 29 321 5.1.3 81
202 4.1 76 232 2.1 23 262 3.3.2 63 292 4.2 75 322 2.3.7 54
203 4.1 76 233 2.1 23 263 3.3.2 63 293 4.1 72 323 – –
204 – – 234 2.1 22 264 2.2.3 27 294 2.1 22 324 – –
205 – – 235 2.1 23 265 4.1 71 295 – – 325 – –
206 5.1.6 85 236 2.1 23 266 4.1 71 296 – – 326 – –
207 5.1.6 85 237 2.1 22 267 2.2.3 27 297 – – 327 – –
208 5.1.6 85 238 2.1 21 268 2.2.3 27 298 – – 328 – –
209 5.1.6 85 239 2.1 21 269 2.2.3 28 299 5.1.3 81 329 – –
210 5.1.6 85 240 2.1 23 270 2.2.3 28 300 – – 330 5.1.1 77
211 5.1.6 85 241 3.3.2 61 271 2.2.3 28 301 – – 331 4.2 76
212 5.1.6 85 242 3.3.2 61 272 2.2.3 28 302 – – 332 4.2 76
213 5.1.6 85 243 3.3.2 61 273 2.2.3 28 303 – – 333 4.2 76
214 5.1.6 85 244 3.3.2 61 274 4.1 73 304 – – 334 – –
215 5.1.6 85 245 3.3.2 61 275 4.1 73 305 – – 335 – –
216 5.1.6 85 246 3.3.2 61 276 4.1 74 306 – – 336 – –
HS 217 5.1.6 85 247 3.3.2/ 63/64 277 4.1 74 307 – – 337 – –
3.3.3
218 5.1.6 85 248 4.1 74 278 4.2 75 308 – – 338 – –
219 2.1 22 249 2.3.5 48 279 – – 309 – – 339 – –
220 2.1 22 250 2.3.5 48 280 4.1 74 310 – – 340 2.3.4 47
221 2.1 22 251 2.3.5 48 281 4.1 74 311 5.1.7 86 341 2.3.4 47
222 2.1 22 252 – – 282 – – 312 5.1.7 86 342
223 2.1 22 253 – – 283 4.1 72 313 5.1.7 86 343 2.3.4 47
224 2.1 22 254 5.1.2 79 284 4.1 72 314 – – 344 2.3.4 47
225 2.1 22 255 5.1.2 80 285 4.1 72 315 – – 345 2.3.4 47
226 2.1 22 256 3.3.2 63 286 4.1 72 316 4.2 75 346 2.3.4 47
227 2.1 22 257 3.3.2 63 287 – – 317 2.3.7 54 347 2.3.4 47
228 2.1 22 258 3.1 56 288 4.1 72 318 2.3.7 54 348 – –
229 2.1 22 259 – – 289 4.1 72 319 2.3.7 54 349 – –

Sec. Firm–
Designation Setting value, dependent on the gearbox stage
07.94
P No. ware- Setting range Default Dim.
rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(P–000) Operating display 2.2.1 1.20 – – –
(P–001) Speed setpoint 5.1.1 1.20 – – RPM
(P–002) Speed actual value 5.1.1 1.20 – – RPM
(P–003) Motor voltage 5.1.1 1.20 – – V
(P–004) Utilization 5.1.1 1.20 – – %
(P–006) DC link voltage 5.1.1 1.20 – – V
(P–007) Motor current 5.1.1 1.20 – – A
(P–008) Motor reactive power 5.1.1 1.20 – – kVA
(P–009) Motor active power 5.1.1 1.20 – – kW
°
(P–010) Motor temperature 5.1.1 1.20 – – C
(P–011) Status of the digital inputs 5.1.2 1.20 – – Hex
P–012 Normalization, DAU act n display –200,0...200,0 100,0 %

3.3.5 1.20
P–013 Normalization, utilization display 3.3.5 1.20 –200,0...200,0 100,0 %
P–014 Speed for max. motor useful speed mot 1 3.1 1.20 –nmaxMot ...n maxMot n maxMot RPM

P–015 Offset correction, speed setpoint 3.1 1.20 C000...4000 0 Hex
P–016 Ramp–up time, ramp–function generator 4.1 1.20 0,01...64,00 2,00 s
P–017 Ramp–down time, ramp–function generator 4.1 1.20 0,01...64,00 2,00 s
P–018 Smoothing time, speed setpoint smoothing 4.1 2.40 3...10000 5 ms
P–019 Degree of rounding–off, speed setpoint 4.1 1.20 0...30 0 Dec
(P–020) Diagnostics, speed actual value 5.1.3 1.20 – – Hex

P–021 n min for ”n act < n min” signal mot 1 3.3.2 1.20 0...n rated 12 RPM
P–022 Shutdown speed, pulse cancellation mot 1 2.2.3 1.20 1...n rated n rated/256 RPM
P–023 n x for ” nact < n x” signal mot 1 3.3.2 1.20 0...n maxMot 6000 RPM
P–024 Normalization, setpoint 3.1 1.20 5,0...15,0 10,0 V

P–025 Timer stage, pulse cancellation 2.2.3 3.00 0...15000 0 ms
P–026 Normalization DAU M/M rated 3.3.5 1.20 –200,0...200,0 100,0 %

HS/6-115
P–027 Tolerance bandwith for ”nact = n set” signal mot 1 3.3.2 1.20 0...n rated/16 20 RPM
(P–028) Diagnostics 5.1.3 1.20 – – Hex
P–029 Speed limiting 2.2.3 1.20 0...n maxMot n maxMot RPM

HS
HS
HS/6-116
Firm– Setting value, dependent on the gearbox stage

P No. Designation Sec. ware- Setting range Default Dim. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
rel.
P–030 Steady–state minimum speed 3.1 2.00 0...n maxMot 0 RPM
P–031 P gain, speed controller mot 1 4.1 1.20 6.0 ...3,0...120,0

240.0 from FW3.1 32,0 Dec
P–032 Integral action time, speed controller mot 1 4.1 1.20 5...6000 20 ms
P–033 Encoder resolution for NC 3.3.4 1.20 0...7 0 Dec
P–034 Smoothing time, speed actual value smoothing 4.1 3.00 0...10 3 ms
P–035 Smoothing time, torque setpoint mot 1 4.1 1.20 3...1000 3 ms
P–036 Encoder phase error correction 2.2.3 1.20 –400...400 0 Dec
P–037 Changeover speed, motor encoder eval. mot 1 2.2.3 1.20 32000 32000 RPM
P–038 Hysteresis, P–037 mot 1 2.2.3 1.20 0...500 50 RPM
P–039 1st torque limit value mot 1 2.2.3 1.20 5...300 100 %
P–040 Regenerative limiting mot 1 2.2.3 1.20 5...100 100 %

P–041 2nd torque limit mot 1 2.2.3 1.20 5...100 50 %
P–042 Changeover speed for P–040 mot 1 2.2.3 1.20 1...n maxMot 500 RPM
P–043 Hysteresis, P–042 mot 1 2.2.3 1.20 0...n maxMot 20 RPM

P–044 Select torque setpoint smoothing 4.1 1.20 0...1 1 Hex

P–045 Switch–in speed, torque setpoint smooth. mot 1 4.1 1.20 1...n maxMot 4000 RPM
P–046 Hysteresis, P–045 mot 1 4.1 1.20 0...n rated 50 RPM
P–047 M dx for ”M d < M dx” signal mot 1 3.3.2 1.20 0...100 90 %
P–048 Normalization, torque setpoint 2.3.4 1.20 –250...250 100 %

P–049 Offset, torque setpoint 2.3.4 1.20 C000...4000 0 Hex
P–050 Switching speed from Md1 to M d2 mot 1 2.2.3 1.20 0...n maxMot 4 n rated RPM

P–051 Write protection 1.3 1.20 0...7FFF 0 Hex
P–052 Transfer parameter into FEPROM 1.3 1.20 0...1 0 Hex
P–053 Control word 1.3 2.40 0...FFFF 11 Hex

P–054 M19 normalization, speed setpoint 2.3.1 1.20 –nmaxMot ... n maxMot n rated RPM
P–055 M19 offset correction, speed setpoint 2.3.1 1.20 C000...4000 0 Hex
P–056 M19 changeover speed 2.3.1 1.20 0...n maxMot n rated RPM
07.94
P–058 Shutdown threshold, rounding–off M19 2.3.1 2.00 0...n maxMot 0 RPM
P–062 M19 switching threshold I comp. speed controller 2.3.1 1.20 0...n maxMot n rated/128 RPM
07.94
P No. Designation Sec. ware Setting range Default Dim.
rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
°
P–063 Max. motor temperature mot 1 2.2.3 1.20 0...170 Motor type dep. C
°
P–064 Fixed temperature 2.2.3 1.20 0...170 0 C
P–065 Timer stage, motor temperature alarm 2.2.3 1.20 0...600 240 s
P–066 Address DAU 1 3.3.5 1.20 0...FFFF 3044 Hex

P–067 Shift factor DAU 1 3.3.5 1.20 0...15 0 Dec
P–071 Smoothing time DAU utilization display 3.3.5 2.40 0...32767 20 ms
P–072 Address DAU 4 5.1.4 1.20 0...FFFF C04 Hex

P–073 Shft factor DAU 4 5.1.4 1.20 0...15 0 Dec
P–074 Offset DAU 4 5.1.4 1.20 7F...FF80 0 Hex


P–081 Terminal function assignment E1 3.2.2 1.20 1...34 1 Dec


HS/6-117
P–090 Control word 1.3 1.20 0...FFFF 002D Hex
P–091 Frequency filter 1 HPC 2.3.6 2.00 45...750 300 Hz
P–092 Quality filter 1 HPC 2.3.6 2.00 0,50...10,00 1,00 Dec

HS
HS
HS/6-118

Designation Sec. ware Setting range Default Dim.
P No.
rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P–093 Offset correction, speed setpoint HPC 2.3.6 2.00 C000...4000 0 Hex
P–094 Normalization, speed setpoint HPC 2.3.6 2.00 –nrated–1...+n –1 n rated/8 RPM
rated
P–095 Power module code number 2.1 1.20 6...13 7 Dec
P–096 Motor code number mot 1 2.1 1.20 101...425 101 Dec
P–097 Initialization 2.1 1.20 0...1 0 Hex
P–098 Encoder pulse number, motor meas. system 2.1 1.20 128...4096 2048 Dec
(P–099) Firmware release 2.2.2 1.20 0.00...99.00 – Dec

(P–100) Operating display 2.2.1 1.20 – – –
(P–101) Setpoint for torque–controlled operation 5.1.1 1.20 – – %
(P–102) Speed actual value 5.1.1 1.20 – – RPM
P–103 Frequency, torque setpoint filter mot 1 4.1 1.20 50...450 300 Hz
P–104 Quality, torque setpoint filter mot 1 4.1 1.20 0,10...10,00 1,00 Dec
P–106 Smoothing time, speed setpoint smooth. HPC 2.3.6 2.00 3...10000 3 ms
P–107 Frequency filter 2 HPC 2.3.6 2.00 45...750 300 Hz
P–108 Quality filter 2 HPC 2.3.6 2.00 0,50...10,00 1,00 Dec
P–109 Torque limit value HPC 2.3.6 2.00 5...180 100 %
P–110 Regenerative limiting HPC 2.3.6 2.00 5...100 100 %
P–111 P gain speed controller HPC 2.3.6 2.00 3,0...240,0 10,0 Dec
P–112 Integral action time, speed controller HPC 2.3.6 2.00 2...6000 20 ms
P–113 channel selection speed setpoint 3.1 1.20 0...3 1 Hex
P–114 Normalization speed setpoint C axis 2.3.2 1.20 –nrated–1...+n rated

–1 n rated/8 RPM
P–115 Offset correction speed setpoint C axis 2.3.2 1.20 C000...4000 0 Hex
P–116 Correction, P gain current controller mot 1 4.2 1.20 –255...255 0 Dec
P–117 Select torque setpoint filter mot 1 4.1 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex
P–118 Type, torque setpoint filter mot 1 4.1 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex
P–119 Flux adaptation HPC 2.3.6 2.00 5...100 100 %
07.94
P–120 Changeover speed, curr.controller adapt.Mot 1 4.2 1.20 500...10000 Mot.type dep. RPM
10.00
07.94
P No.
rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P–121 Position reference value 1 2.3.3 1.20 0...64000 0 Dec

P–123 Position reference value, incremental 2.3.3 1.20 –32768...32767 256 Dec

P–126 Bandwidth integrator enable speed controller 2.3.3 1.20 0,0...180,0 10,0 Dec
(P–128) Actual position reference value 2.3.3 1.20 – – Dec
P–129 Set the internal zero mark 2.3.3 1.20 0...1 0 Hex
P–130 Zero mark offset 2.3.3 1.20 0...64000 0 Dec
P–131 Max. pulse number between 2 zero marks 2.3.3 1.20 128...64000 2048 Dec
(P–132) Absolute position act. value w/o zero mark shift 2.3.3 1.20 – – Dec
(P–133) Difference between 2 ext. zero marks 2.3.3 1.20 – – Dec
P–134 Application point for P–136 2.3.3 1.20 0,0...180,0 10,0 Degree

P–135 Application point for P–137/P–138 2.3.3 1.20 0,0...180,0 2,0 Degree
P–136 P gain, straight line 1 2.3.3 1.20 0...FFFF 220 Hex
P–137 P gain, straight line 2 2.3.3 1.20 0...FFFF 220 Hex
P–138 P gain, straight line 2 (HMS) 2.3.3 1.20 0...FFFF 44 Hex
P–139 Multiplier for braking parabola 2.3.3 1.20 0...FFFF 100 Hex
(P–140) Abs. position act. value w/ zero mark shift 2.3.3 1.20 – – Dec
P–141 Switching parameter, positioning

2.3.3 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex
P–142 Flag for speed increase 2.3.3 1.20 0...21 0 Hex
P–143 Transfer parameter P–141 2.3.3 1.20 0...1 0 Hex
P–144 Response width, relay 1 2.3.3 1.20 0,00...18,00 1,00 Degree
P–145 Response width, relay 2 2.3.3 1.20 0,00...18,00 5,00 Degree
P–146 Search speed for spindle positioning 2.3.3 1.20 0... 4 n rated 500 RPM

HS/6-119
(P–147) Position counter status re: BERO 2.3.3 1.20 – – Dec
P–148 Motion window spindle positioning 2.3.3 1.20 0,0...180,0 1,0 Degree
HS
HS
Firm- Setting value, dependent on the gearbox stage
HS/6-120

P No.
rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P–149 Start–up parameter C axis/position 2.3 1.20 0...FFFF 40 Hex

(P–150) Board ID 2.2.2 1.20 Dependent on the module expansion Hex
P–151 Write protection 1.3 1.20 0...7FFF 0 Hex

P–152 Transfer parameter into EEPROM 1.3 1.20 0...1 0 Hex
P–154 Oscillation setpoint 1 2.2.3 1.20 –nmaxMot ... n maxMot 0 RPM
P–155 Oscillation setpoint 2 2.2.3 1.20 –nmaxMot ... n maxMot 0 RPM
P–156 Oscillation interval time 1 2.2.3 1.20 10...10000 1000 ms

P–157 Oscillation interval time 2 2.2.3 1.20 0...10000 1000 ms
P–158 Inductance of the series reactor mot 1 2.1 3.00 0,000...65,535 0,000 mH
P–159 Motor moment of inertia mot 1 2.1 1.20 0,002...32,000 Mot.type dep. kgm 2
P–160 Rated motor power mot 1 2.1 1.20 0,0...150,0 Mot.type dep. kW
P–161 Rated motor current mot 1 2.1 1.20 0,00...200,0 Mot.type dep. A
P–162 Rated motor voltage mot 1 2.1 1.20 0,0...500,0 Mot.type dep. V
P–163 Rated motor speed mot 1 2.1 1.20 0...4096
– Mot.type dep. RPM
P–164 Rated motor frequency mot 1 2.1 1.20 0,0...409,6 Mot.type dep. Hz
P–165 No–load motor voltage mot 1 2.1 1.20 0,0...500,0 Mot.type dep. V
P–166 No–load motor current mot 1 2.1 1.20 0,00...200,00 Mot.type dep. A
P–167 Stator resistance, cold mot 1 2.1 1.20 0...32767 Mot.type dep. m
P–168 Rotor resistance, cold mot 1 2.1 1.20 0...32767 Mot.type dep. m
P–169 Stator leakage reactance mot 1 2.1 1.20 0...32767 Mot.type dep. m
P–170 Rotor leakage reactance mot 1 2.1 1.20 0...32767 Mot.type dep. m
P–171 Magnetizing reactance mot 1 2.1 1.20 0...65535 Mot.type dep. m
P–172 Upper speedL h characteristic mot 1 2.1 1.20 100...24000 Mot.type dep. RPM
P–173 Speed at the start of field weakening mot 1 2.1 1.20 100...6000 Mot.type dep. RPM
P–174 Max. motor speed mot 1 2.1 1.20 0...20000 Mot.type dep. RPM
P–175 Gain factor L h characteristic mot 1 2.1 1.20 50...300 Mot.type dep. %
P–176 Stall torque reduction factor mot 1 2.1 1.20 50...150 Mot.type dep. %
07.94
10.00
P–177 Start calculation motor 1 (P–096) 2.1 1.20 0...1 0 Hex
(P–178) Speed at the start of the stall torque mot 1 2.1.3 3.1 0...32767 Mot.type dep. rev/min
10.00
07.94
rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P–179 Select min/max memory 5.1.5 1.20 0...2 0 Hex

P–180 Enable motor changeover (star/delta) 2.1.3 1.20 0...1 0 Hex
P–181 Address for min/max memory 5.1.5 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex
(P–182) Min. value, min/max memory 5.1.5 1.20 – – Hex

(P–183) Max. value, min/max memory 5.1.5 1.20 – – Hex
P–185 Address for monitoring 1 3.3.3 1.20 0...FFFF C06 Hex
P–186 Threshold for monitoring 1 3.3.3 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex

P–187 Pull–in delay, monitoring 1 3.3.3 1.20 0,00...10,00 0,00 s
P–188 Drop–out delay, monitoring 1 3.3.3 1.20 0,00...10,00 0,00 s
P–189 Hysteresis, monitoring 1 3.3.3 1.20 0...FFFF 1 Hex

P–190 Address for monitoring 2 3.3.3 1.20 0...FFFF C06 Hex
P–191 Threshold for monitoring 2 3.3.3 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex
P–192 Pull–in delay for monitoring 2 3.3.3 1.20 0,00...10,00 0,00 s

P–194 Hysteresis, monitoring 2 3.3.3 1.20 0...FFFF 1 Hex

P–195 Lower adaptation speed mot 1 4.1 1.20 0...n maxMot 1000 RPM
P–196 Upper adaptation speed mot 1 4.1 1.20 0...n maxMot 1200 RPM
1,0...120,0
P–198 P gain, upper adaptation speed mot 1 4.1 1.20 6.0...240.0 fr.FW3.1 24,0 Dec
P–199 Reduction factor, P gain mot 1 4.1 1.20 1...200 100 %

P–201 Integr.act.time, upper adaptation speed mot 1 4.1 1.20 5...6000 80 ms
P–202 Reduction factor, integral action time mot 1 4.1 1.20 1...200 100 %
P–203 Control word, speed controller adapt. mot 1 4.1 1.20 0...7 0 Dec
P–206 Select transient recorder 5.1.6 1.20 0...1 0 Hex
P–207 Set transient recorder 5.1.6 1.20 0...10 1 Hex
P–208 Address for start condition 5.1.6 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex

HS/6-121
P–209 Threshold for start condition 5.1.6 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex
P–210 Address for stop condition 5.1.6 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex

HS
HS
HS/6-122

rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P–211 Threshold for stop condition 5.1.6 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex

P–212 Address, signal 1 5.1.6 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex
P–213 Address, signal 2 5.1.6 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex
P–214 Start trace record output 5.1.6 1.20 0...1 0 Hex
P–215 Shift factor, signal 1 5.1.6 1.20 0...15 0 Dec

P–216 Shift factor, signal 2 5.1.6 1.20 0...15 0 Dec
P–217 Trigger signal 1 5.1.6 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex
P–218 Trigger signal 2 5.1.6 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex

P–219 Motor moment of inertia mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0,002...32,000 Mot.type dep. kgm 2
P–220 Rated motor output mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0,0...150 Mot.type dep. kW
P–221 Rated motor current mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0,00...200,00 Mot.type dep. A
P–222 Rated motor voltage mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0,0...500,0 Mot.type dep. V
P–223 Rated motor speed mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0...4096 Mot.type dep. RPM
P–224 Rated motor frequency mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0,0...409,6 Mot.type dep. Hz
P–225 No–load motor voltage mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0,0...500,0 Mot.type dep. V
P–226 No–load motor current mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0,00...200,00 Mot.type dep. A
P–227 Stator resistance, cold mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0...32767 Mot.type dep. m
P–228 Rotor resistance, cold mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0...32767 Mot.type dep. m
P–229 Stator leakage reactance mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0...32767 Mot.type dep. m
P–230 Rotor leakage reactance mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0...32767 Mot.type dep. m
P–231 Magnetizing reactance mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0...65535 Mot.type dep. m

P–232 Upper speed Lh characteristic mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 100...24000 Mot.type dep. RPM
P–233 Speed at the start of field weak. mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 100...6000 Mot.type dep. RPM
P–234 Max. motor speed mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 0...20000 Mot.type dep. RPM
P–235 Gain factor Lh characteristic mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 50...300 Mot.type dep. %
P–236 Stall torque reduction factor mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 50...150 Mot.type dep. %
07.94
04.97
P–237 Start calculation, third–party mot. 2.1.3 1.20 0...1 0 Hex
P–238 Motor code number mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 101...425 101 Dec
04.97
07.94
P No.
rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P–239 Start calculation, motor 2 (P–238) 2.1.3 1.20 0...1 0 Dec
(P–240) Speed at the start of the stall torque mot 2 2.1.3 3.1 0...32767 rev/min
P–241 Programmable signal 1 3.3.2 1.20 1...20 2 Dec


P–247 Control word, signal 3.3.2 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex
P–248 Delay time, fault message F–11 4.1 2.00 100...10000 750 ms
P–249 Segment memory location monitor 2.3.5 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex

P–250 Address memory location monitor 2.3.5 1.20 0...FFFF 0 Hex
–
P–251 Value display memory location monitor 2.3.5 1.20 – – Hex

(P–254) Display active function 1 5.1.2 1.20 – – Hex
(P–255) Display active function 2 5.1.2 1.20 – – Hex

P–256 Delay time ”n set = n act ” signal 3.3.2 3.00 0,00...0,50 0,20 s
P–257 Delay time ”Md < Mdx” signal 3.3.2 3.00 0,00...1,00 0,80 s
P–258 Speed for max. useful motor speed mot 2 3.1 1.20 –nmaxMot ... n maxMot n maxMot RPM
P–260 n min for ”n act < n min” signal mot 2 3.3.2 1.20 0...n rated 12 RPM

P–261 Shutdown speed pulse cancellation mot 2 2.2.3 1.20 1...n rated n rated/256 RPM
P–262 n x for ” nact < n x” signal 3.3.2 1.20 0...n maxMot 6000 RPM
P–263 Tolerance bandwidth f.nact= n set ”signal mot 2 3.3.2 1.20 0...n rated/16 20 RPM
P–264 Speed limiting mot 2 2.2.3 1.20 0...n maxMot n maxMot RPM
3,0...120,0
P–265 P gain, speed controller mot 2 4.1 1.20 6.0.l..240.0 fr.FW3.1 32,0 Dec
P–266 Integral action time, speed controller mot 2 4.1 1.20 5...6000 20 ms
HS/6-123
P–267 Changeover speed, motor encoder select. mot 2 2.2.3 1.20 32000 32000 RPM
P–268 Hysteresis, P–267 mot 2 2.2.3 1.20 0...500 50 RPM
P–269 1st torque limit mot 2 2.2.3 1.20 5...300 100 %

HS
HS
HS/6-124

rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P–270 Regenerative limiting Mot 2 2.2.3 1.20 5...100 100 %

P–271 2nd torque limit value Mot 2 2.2.3 1.20 5...100 50 %
P–272 Changeover speed for P–270 Mot 2 2.2.3 1.20 1...nmaxMot 500 RPM
P–273 Hysteresis, P–272 Mot 2 2.2.3 1.20 0...nmaxMot 20 RPM

P–274 Switch–in speed, torque setpoint smooth.Mot 2 4.1 1.20 1...nmaxMot 4000 RPM
P–275 Hysteresis, P–274 Mot 2 4.1 1.20 0...n rated 50 RPM
P–276 Frequency, torque setpoint filter Mot 2 4.1 1.20 50...450 300 Hz
P–277 Quality, torque setpoint filter Mot 2 4.1 1.20 0,10...10,00 1,00 Dec
P–278 Correction P gain, current controller Mot 2 4.2 1.20 –255...255 0 Dec
P–280 Select torque setpoint filter Mot 2 4.1 1.20 0...1 0 Hex
P–281 Type torque setpoint filter Mot 2 4.1 1.20 0...1 0 Hex
P–283 Lower adaptation speed Mot 2 4.1 1.20 0...nmaxMot 1000 RPM
P–284 Upper adaptation speed Mot 2 4.1 1.20 0...nmaxMot 1200 RPM
0,0...120,0
P–285 P gain, upper adaptation speed Mot 2 4.1 1.20 6.0...240.0 fr.FW3.1 24,0 Dec
P–286 Reduction factor, P gain Mot 2 4.1 1.20 1...200 100 %
P–288 Integral action time, upper adapt.speed Mot 2 4.1 1.20 5...6000 80 ms
P–289 Reduction factor, integral action time Mot 2 4.1 1.20 1...200 100 %
P–290 Switching speed fr. M d1 to M d2 Mot 2 2.2.3 1.20 0...nmaxMot 4 nrated RPM

°
P–291 Max. motor temperature Mot 2 2.2.3 1.20 0...170 Mot.type dep. C
P–292 Changeover speed, curr. contr. adapt. Mot 2 4.2 1.20 500...10000 Mot.type dep. RPM
P–293 Control word speed controller adaptation Mot 2 4.1 1.20 0...7 0 Dec
P–294 Inductance of the series reactor Mot 2 2.1.2 3.00 0,000...65,535 0,000 mH
(P–299) Checksum parameter 5.1.3 2.00 – – Hex
P–311 Current for current/Hz control 5.1.7 1.20 0,0...100,0 0,0 %
P–312 Frequency for current/Hz control 5.1.7 1.20 0,0...800,0 0,0 Hz
P–313 Select current/Hz control 5.1.7 1.20 0...1 0 Dec
07.94
04.97
04.97
10.00
07.94
rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(P–316) Display, P gain current controller 4.2 1.20 – – Dec
2
P–317 Reduction factor, max. load duty cycle I t 2.3.7 3.1 25...100 100 %
2
P–318 Reduction factor S6 load duty cycle I t 2.3.7 3.1 25...100 100 %
(P–319) Diagnostics I 2 t power model 2.3.7 3.1 0...FFFF 0 Hex
(P–320) Diagnostics motor encoder zero mark 5.1.3 3.00
(P–321) Diagnostics spindle encoder zero mark 5.1.3 3.00

2 %
(P–322) I t load limiting 2.3.7 3.1 0...100%
(P–330) Inverter clock cycle frequency 5.1.1 3.00 kHz
P–331 Inverter clock cycle frequency 2 4.2 3.00 0...7 4 Hex
P–340 Speed deviation, slip monitoring 2.3.4 2.00 0,1...100,0 10,0 %
P–341 Torque reduction, slip monitoring 2.00 0,0...100,0 50,0

2.3.4 %
P–343 Delay time, slip monitoring 2.3.4 2.00 0...999 200 ms
P–344 Torque reduced velocity slip monitoring 2.3.4 2.00 0,01...100,00 0,50 %/ms
P–345 Torque reduced velocity slip monitoring 2.3.4 2.00 0,01...100,00 0,10 %/ms
P–346 Hysteresis for P–340 2.3.4 2.00 0,0...100,0 0,00 %

(P–347) Speed deviation, actual slip monitoring 2.3.4 2.00

HS/6-125
HS
07.94
Space for notes
HS

10.00
Index
Index F
Fault, HS/5-92
acknowledgement, HS/5-87
display, HS/5-87
A suppression, HS/5-87
Address, RAM variable, HS/6-112 Filter, HS/4-74
Analog output Firmware version, HS/2-26
fine normalization, HS/3-68 Flux adaptation, HS/2-52
M/Mrated display, HS/3-68
nact display, HS/3-68
P/Pmax display, HS/3-68 G
parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2, HS/3-67
Gearbox stage, HS/2-25
B H
Bit, HS/1-6
Hexadecimal numbers, HS/1-6
Built–in motors, HS/6-102
I
C
I2t limiting (from FW 3.1), HS/2-54
C axis, HS/2-25, HS/2-31, HS/3-59
Initialization
Code numbers for power modules and standard
special motors, HS/2-17
motors, HS/6-99
standard motors, HS/2-15
Connection overview
star/delta motors, HS/2-21 HS
connection diagram, HS/6-104
Input terminals, HS/3-58
relay terminals, HS/6-106
Inverter clock cycle frequency, HS/4-76
star/delta changeover, HS/6-107
Inverter clock frequency, HS/3-59
terminals, HS/6-105
Connections, HS/1-13
Connector assignment
for Bero, HS/6-109
M
motor encoder signal output, HS/6-110 M19, HS/2-25, HS/2-30
spindle encoder, HS/6-109 Master/slave operation, HS/2-44
Current controller, HS/4-75 Maximum current limiting (from FW 3.1), HS/2-54
Current de–rating for inverter clock cycle frequen- Measured value displays, HS/5-77
cies > 3.2 kHz, HS/1-11 Minimum speed, HS/3-57
Mode, HS/2-25
Module ID, HS/2-26
D Motor code number, HS/6-99
Motor data set, HS/2-18, HS/2-22
DAU, HS/3-67
Motor temperature monitoring, HS/2-29
Diagnostic parameters, HS/5-81
Diagnostics, HS/5-77
Display, HS/2-25, HS/5-87
Display parameter, HS/2-25
O
Display parameters, HS/5-77 Open–loop torque controlled mode, HS/2-44
function description, HS/2-44
master drive, HS/2-44
E slave drive, HS/2-44, HS/2-45
torque setpoint, HS/2-44, HS/2-45
Encoder phase error correction, HS/2-27

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition HS/i-1
07.94
Index
Operating display, HS/2-25 Speed setpoint interface, HS/3-55

Operator control and display elements, HS/1-8 channel selection, HS/3-55
Orientated spindle stop, HS/2-30 minimum speed, HS/3-57
Oscillation mode, HS/2-29 normalization, HS/3-56
Output terminals, HS/3-61 smoothing, HS/3-59
unipolar input, HS/3-56
Speed setpoint smoothing, HS/4-69
P Speed setting value, HS/2-27
Spindle positioning, HS/2-31
Parameter list, HS/6-113
brief commissioning, HS/2-43
Parameters
diagnostic parameters, HS/2-42
attributes, HS/1-5
function description, HS/2-31
gearbox–stage dependent, HS/1-8
position controller, HS/2-37
list, HS/1-5
Position reference value, HS/2-34
number, HS/1-5, HS/1-8 position reference value, HS/2-33, HS/2-35,
setting range, HS/1-5, HS/1-6
HS/2-41, HS/2-42, HS/3-59
sub–parameter number, HS/1-8
relay signal, HS/2-34
transferring into the FEPROM, HS/1-9
search speed, HS/2-32, HS/2-33, HS/2-39,
value, HS/1-8
HS/2-41
write protection, HS/1-9
zero mark, HS/2-32, HS/2-34, HS/2-35,
write–protection, HS/1-6
HS/2-36, HS/2-39, HS/2-42, HS/3-59
Power module code number, HS/6-99
zero pulse, HS/2-33, HS/2-38, HS/2-43
Standard applications, HS/2-25, HS/2-27
Standard motors, initialization, HS/2-15
R Star/delta motors, HS/6-101
HS RAM variables, HS/6-112 flux setpoint characteristic, HS/2-23
Ramp–function generator, HS/4-70 initialization, HS/2-21
Re–initializing the drive converter, HS/1-7 main field inductance-characteristic, HS/2-23
Relay functions, HS/2-25 motor changeover, HS/2-24
control word, signals, HS/3-63 motor data set, HS/2-22
freely–programmable, HS/3-61 Start–up
permanently–wired, HS/3-61 instructions, HS/1-7
signals which can be parameterized, HS/3-63 possibilities, HS/1-7
variable, HS/3-64 Status display
Replacing components, HS/1-7 active terminal function, HS/5-79, HS/5-80
Replacing firmware, HS/1-7 digital inputs, HS/5-78
Replacing modules, HS/1-7 Sub–parameter number, HS/1-8
S T
Series machines, HS/1-7 Terminal function
Setting and monitoring data, HS/6-113 assignment, HS/3-59
Setting data, HS/1-12 freely–programmable, HS/3-59
Slip monitoring, HS/2-46, HS/3-59 permanently–wired, HS/3-58
Smoothing Test sockets, HS/5-82
speed actual value, HS/4-70, HS/4-76 Torque limit value, HS/2-28
speed setpoint, HS/3-59, HS/4-69 Torque setpoint smoothing, HS/4-73
torque setpoint, HS/4-73 Transient recorder function, HS/5-84
Special motors
flux setpoint characteristic, HS/2-19
initialization, HS/2-17 U
main field inductance-characteristic, HS/2-19
Uncontrolled infeed, HS/2-16
motor data set, HS/2-18
Unit status, HS/2-25
Speed actual value smoothing, HS/4-70
Speed controller
adaptation, HS/4-72
gain, HS/4-71
W
integral action time, HS/4-71 Water–cooled motors, HS/6-101

HS/i-2 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
Induction Motor Modules (AM)
1 First Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/1-3

1.1 Start–up guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/1-4
1.2 Start–up instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/1-7
1.3 Operator and display elements, control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/1-9
1.4 Overview, setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/1-13
1.5 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/1-14
2 Determining and Setting the System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/2-15
2.1 Motor and drive converter data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/2-15
2.2 Standard applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/2-22
2.2.1 Operating display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/2-22
2.2.2 Firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/2-23
2.2.3 Setting parameters for standard applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/2-23
2.3 Multi–motor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/2-27
2.3.1 Parallel operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/2-27
2.3.2 Parameter set changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/2-32
2.3.3 Motor changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/2-32
2.4 Operating motors with maximum speeds > 32000 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . AM/2-34
2.5 Monitor function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/2-36 AM
3 Parameterizing the Drive Converter Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/3-37
3.1 Speed setpoint interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/3-37
3.2 Input terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/3-40
3.2.1 Permanently–connected terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/3-40
3.2.2 Freely–programmable terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/3-41
3.3 Output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/3-43
3.3.1 Permanently–connected relay functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/3-43
3.3.2 Freely–programmable relay functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/3-44
3.3.3 Variable relay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/3-47
3.3.4 Analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/3-48
4 Controller Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/4-51
4.1 Speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/4-54
4.2 Current controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/4-57
4.3 Field controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/4-60
4.4 Optimization, open–loop controlled range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/4-61
4.5 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/4-62
4.6 Special speeds and speed range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/4-63
4.7 Manual optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/4-65

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition AM–i
10.00
07.94
5 Diagnostics and Fault Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/5-75

5.1 Diagnostic resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/5-75
5.1.1 Measured value displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/5-75
5.1.2 Status displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/5-76
5.1.3 Diagnostic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/5-79
5.1.4 Test sockets X1, X2, IR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/5-80
5.1.5 Minimum/maximum value memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/5-83
5.1.6 Transient recorder function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/5-84
5.1.7 Current/Hz control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/5-86
5.2 Fault analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/5-87
5.2.1 Fault display, fault acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/5-87
5.2.2 Fault message list ......................................... AM/5-88
6 Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/6-91
6.1 Flowchart when commissioning systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/6-92
6.2 Power module code numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/6-102
6.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/6-103
6.4 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/6-107
6.4.1 X432 connector assignment for BERO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/6-107
6.4.2 X412 connector assignment for motor temperature sensor . . . . . . . . AM/6-107
6.4.3 X411 serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/6-107
6.5 RAM variable addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/6-108
6.6 Setting and monitoring data (parameter list) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/6-109

AM–ii SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
04.97
07.94 Induction Motor Modules (AM)
1 First Steps
First Steps 1
Warning
! Perfect and safe operation of this equipment assumes that it has been
professionally transported, stored, installed and mounted as well as careful
operator control and service/maintenance.
Severe bodily injury or material damage can occur if this warning information is
not observed.
The modules contain components which can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge.
Please observe the ESD instructions in the foreword.
Note
The board, Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1122–0BA11–0AA1 can only be operated
with firmware, from 3.00.
The following board Order Nos. [MLFB]:
6SN1122–0BA11–0AA0
6SN1122–0BA12–0AA0 AM
can only be operated up to firmware 2.xx.
Note
Start–up software is available to commission induction motor control systems
with an analog setpoint interface.
Ordering data for the software:
Refer to Catalog NC 60 (Order No.: E86060–K4460–A101–A8
Ordering data for the documentation:
Start–up software for main spindle and induction motor modules
Order No. 6SN1197–0AA30–0AP1
Note
Motor definition
Standard motor: Motors which are included in the Siemens Catalog.
Third–party motor: Third–party motor manufacturers.
Special motor: Motor manufactured by Siemens to customer
specifications.

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition AM/1-3
Induction Motor Modules (AM) 07.94
Structure of the The Start–up Guide is structured in the sequence of the actual start–up steps.
Start–up Guide
To start–up (commission) standard applications, where the drive converter inter-
faces (Section 1.5) and controller optimization settings are generally adequate
when supplied, only the start–up steps in bold are of significance.
3 Drive converter 4 Controller optimiza-

1 First steps 2 System configuration interfaces tion
Start–up Motor and drive Speed setpoint interface Speed controller

guidelines converter data sets
Input terminals Current controller
Start–up info/ Standard
instructions applications – permanently–wired Field controller
terminal functions
Operator control Multi–motor operation
– freely–programmable
Open–loop controlled
and display range
– parallel operation terminal functions
elements, control
parameters – parameter set Output terminals
Limits
Overviews, settting
changeover Special speeds
data – motor changeover and speed ranges
Connections Monitor function Manual optimization
AM 5 Diagnostics, fault analysis
Diagnostic resources Fault analysis
6 Attachment
Flowdiagram Addresses, RAM variables
Connection overviews Setting and monitoring data
Fig. 1-1 Start–up steps

AM/1-4 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
04.97
Parameter lists
Warning
! The setting values of parameters, which are not listed in the parameter list
(refer to Section 6.6), may not be changed.
The parameter descriptions are structured as information units in the form of

tables.
The sequence of the parameters in these tables represents the procedure when
parameterizing the equipment.
Table 1-1 Example of a parameter list
effective
P–024 Online 4 Value range Parameter designation

P–014.M Dimensions Brief parameter description
P–039.G After 10 FW x.xx
P–114.F initialization
(P–001)
Parameter
attributes Number
– P–024
AM
generally valid parameter
– P–014.M
motor–dependent parameter
sub–parameters P–014.1...P–014.4
– P–039.G
gearbox stage–dependent parameter
– P–114.F
fixed setpoint–dependent parameter
– (P–001)
display parameter; value cannot be changed.

12.94
07.94
Change effective
– online
Change is immediately effective.
– after initialization
Initialization is initialized by setting P–097 to 1H.
P–051
Write protection parameters
Write protection is removed by entering 04H, or
removing the special write protection by entering 0010H.
Setting range For several control words, the functions are activated by setting bits of a binary
number, and entering these in a hexadecimal form.
Example:
BIT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bin 0040H

Bit 7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bin 0080H
A combination of several functions is entered by adding the binary or hexa-

decimal values.
Example:
BIT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AM Bit 6+Bit 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bin 00C0H
Description
FW x.xx
Firmware–dependent identification of function and parameter extensions.
The extension is available from the specified firmware release.

04.97
12.94
Start–up Using
Operator control and display elements (refer to Section 1.3)

RS232C interface with an IBM AT–compatible computer and start–up
software (refer to foreword).
Re–initializing the If an already initialized drive converter is to be re–initialized, then the following
drive converter procedure must be followed:
(if required) If required, save the setting data (parameters).
Remove the write protection: Set P–051 to 4H.
Start initialization: Set P–097 to 0H.
Overwrite the parameters in the drive–machine data memory:
Set P–052 to 1H and wait until P–052 resets itself back to 0H.
Power–on reset:
power–up the unit again:
P–095 or P–096 must be displayed.
Initialize (Section 2.1).
Replacing the firm- From version V2.00, the firmware can be replaced using the user–prompted
ware (if required) start–up software for main spindle and induction motor modules.
Inter–dependency between the firmware release and board AM
Firmware release Board
Before FW 3.00 6SN1122–0BA1–0AA0
From FW 3.00 6SN1122–0BA11–0AA1
Procedure:
Save the setting data (parameters).
Replace the firmware using the start–up program.
Initialize with the pulses and controller inhibited (Section 2.1).
Re–load the setting data which has been saved.
Adjust the power offset.
(refer to Table 4–1, from FW 3.00, not required)
Save the setting data in the drive–machine data memory (Section 1.3).

Starting–up The drive converter setting data (parameters) can be saved on floppy disk using
series machines, the start–up software.
replacing modules, The following procedure must be maintained for the series start–up of additional
replacing drive converters:
components 1. Initialize.
– activate pulse and controller inhibit.

– enter P–095 power module code in accordance with Table 6–1.
Note:
Power modules with Order No. [MLFB] 6SN112–1A0–A1, are,
from FW 3.00, automatically recognized. It is then no longer possible/
necessary to make an entry in P–095.
– Start initialization.
2. Load the setting data from the floppy disk.
3. Adjust the power offset according to Table 4–1.
Note:
This is not necessary from FW 3.00.
4. Save.
AM

Operator and The following operator and display elements are provided on the front panel to
display elements start–up and parameterize SIMODRIVE 611–A IM modules:
3 operator keys ( + , P and – )
6–character LCD display

Gearbox stage–dependent parameters and the fixed setpoint–dependent
P–114 are shown with 8 sub–parameter numbers (e. g. P–039.1 to P–039.8).
Motor–dependent parameters are shown with 4 sub–parameter numbers
(e.g. P–014.1 to P–014.4).
The functions of the operator elements are shown using as an example
parameter P–039.
<< – P + P >>
< – + >
Parameter number
– P + AM
Sub–parameter number
P P
Parameter value
< – + >
<< – P + P >>

Control
parameters
Note
If the data save (P–052) is interrupted due to power failure or power–down,
then the values which have been changed are lost, and the drive converter
outputs fault message “F–07” when it is powered–up again (refer to
Section 5.2.2). The parameter values can be re–set after fault message “F–07”
has been acknowledged.
effective
P–051 Online – 0...FFFF hex Write protection

P–151 Write protection is removed by entering 4H.
Special write protection is removed by entering 10H.
P–052 Online 4 0...1 dec Parameter transfer into the FEPROM
P–152 By setting to 1, parameters are transferred into the
non–volatile drive–machine data memory. The
parameters are automatically reset after transfer.
P–053 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Control word
Bit Value
0000H Ready relay pulls–in if there is no
fault and the pulses and controller
are enabled
AM 0 0001H Ready relay pulls–in if there is no

fault.
Motor parameter set is changed–
0000H over after another motor has been
selected and subsequent pulse
cancellation (motor changeover).
1 0002H The motor parameter set is
immediately changed–over after
another motor has been selected
(parameter set changeover)
0000H For ramp–function generator fast
stop (terminal 81) the pulses are not
canceled when absolute speed value
nmin (P–022) is fallen below.
2 0004H For ramp–function generator fast
stop (terminal 81) the pulses are
canceled when the absolute speed
value nmin (P–022) is fallen below.
0000H The ramp–function generator is not
tracked.
3 0008H The ramp–function generator is
tracked.
For a ramp–function generator which
is set too fast, the ramp–function
generator tracking immediately
responds to an opposing setpoint
change.

04.97
effective

Bit Value
0000H Faults are not influenced by the
controller inhibit at terminal 65.
5 0020H Faults can be acknowledged using
the controller inhibit at terminal 65.
0000H The speed actual value is searched
for starting from the speed setpoint.
Optimum run–up is not guaranteed
when the pulses are enabled for a
stationary motor or a motor rotating
in the opposite direction.
7 0080H The speed actual value is searched
for starting from 0. When the pulses
are enabled for a rotating motor, this
is first braked, and is then accelera-
ted to the speed setpoint from the
open–loop controlled speed range.
0000H Integral component of the field
controller is deleted when the voltage
is limited. The voltage limiting might
even be able to be left again.
8 0100H Integral component of the field
controller is not influenced for
voltage limiting. However, voltage
limiting cannot be automatically left, AM
as the field–generating current
continually increases.
0000H KTY84 motor temperature sensor
according to IEC 134
13 2000H PTC motor temperature sensor
according to IEC 134; from FW 3.00
0000H The parameter number is cyclically
displayed on the LCD display
15 8000H The parameter number is not
cyclically displayed on the LCD
display; from FW 3.00
Bit Value
0000H Parameter display, hexidecimal for-
mat
Caution!
Parameter setting limits in the he-
xidecimal format are not effective!
0 0001H Parameter display, decimal formal or
hex format

12.94
07.94
effective
0000H Adaptation of field–weakening speed

and stall torque to the DC link voltage
specified at P–061 is inhibited.
2 0004H The adaptation of the field–
weakening speed and stall torque at
the DC link voltage, specified by
P–061, is enabled (from FW 2.00).
0000H Speed controller clock cycle,
standard
3 0008H Speed controller clock cycle, fast
When bit 3 is changed it only
becomes effective after saving in
the FEPROM and line supply off/on;
from FW 3.00
P–153 Online 10 –1...1 dec Calculate motor data/controller data
Parameters are changed when calculating
+1 calculate equivalent circuit diagram data
–1 calculate controller data
After the calculation, the parameters are
automatically reset.
AM

Fig. 1-2
1.4
12.94
07.94
Motor temperature sensing Multi–motor operation
X412
P–063, P–064, P–065, P–053 bit 13 from FW 3.00 Parameter set changeover Motor changeover
Parallel oper.
M M P–160, P–161, P–053, P–056 M M P–053, P–056
Setting data
Max. speed monitoring with BERO P–163, P–178
Overview, setting data

X432
P–131, P–132 from FW 3.00
X421 Speed setpoint channel 1 Initial rounding–off Speed controller Torque limiting
56 P–014, P–015, P–024 P–018 P–039, P–041, P–050
Analog Speed setpoint channel 2 P gain, integral action time
14 setpoint P–014, P–019, P–025 P–031, P–032
Field contr. Current controller
24 Fixed setpoints Ramp–f. Max. Adaptation
8 Channel P–114, P–119 generator speed P–195, P–196, P–197, P gain,
select. P gain
Mot. pot. function P–198, P–199, P–203 integral act. time
P–113 P–016, P–017 P–029, P–174 P–034, P–035
P–114 P–115, P–116
X431
E1 P–081 Oscill. gen. Stop without Initialization
E2 reverse rotation
P–082
E3 P–154, P–155, P–022
P–083 P–156, P–157, P–113 Version 1 Version 2
E4 P–084 Free–prog.
E5 P–085 terminal General control parameters P–095, Initialization P–095, Initialization
E6 functions P–097 parameters P–097 parameters
P–086 P–051, P–052, P–053, P–090, P–151, P–152
E7 P–087
E8 P–088 ? ! Monitor function P–018, P–036, Motor data P–018, P–036, Motor data
P–249, P–250, P–251 P–158, P–159, P–158, P–159,
E9 P–089 P–160, P–161, P–160, P–161,
X441 P–162, P–163, P–162, P–163,
P–164, P–174, P–164, P–174,
A11 P–241 Free–prog. Relay control thresholds P–175, P–178 P–175, P–178
A21 P–242 relay P–021, P–023, P–027, P–047 P–219 P–219

functions Relay
A31 P–243
Equivalent circuit diagr. data
functions P–166, P–167,
1.4 Overview, setting data

P–153 Calculate
A41 P–244 Variable relay function equivalent P–168, P–169,
circuit diagram data P–170, P–171
A51 P–245 P–185, P–186, P–187,
P–188, P–189, P–190, controller data
A61 P–246 P–191, P–192, P–193, P–153 Calculate
Invert relay function P–247 P–194 controller data
X451
P–204, P–205 Optimization
A91 A Analog outputs Diagnostic functions P–204, P–205 Optimization
? !
D P–012, P–013, Min/Max P–052 Save data
A92 P–066, P–067, P–068 P–179, P–181 set P–052 Save data
P–069, P–078, P–079
Transient recorder function set
AM/1-13
X1 A Test sockets P–206 to P–218

D P–072, P–073, P–074, Current/Hz control
X2 P–076, P–077, P–080 P–057, P–058, P–172
AM
07.94
1.5 Connections
1.5 Connections
X432 X412
input input
BERO temperature sensor
from FW motor from FW 3.00 3)
3.003)
Test sockets
DAU 3 X1 X2 DAU 4
IR M
X421 56 X451 A91

n1 DAU 12)
14 M
24 A92
n22) DAU 22)
8 M
Inputs Outputs
X431 663 IF X441 289 Signals, center contact
65 RF A11 nact = nset1)
81 HSS A21 Md < Mdx1)
E1 2. Md limit value1) A31 nact < nmin1)
E2 TH = 01) A41 nact < nx1)
E3 RESET 1) A51 I2t pre–alarm1)
E4 Fixed setpoint, bit 01) A61 Ramp–up completed1)
E5 Fixed setpoint, bit 11) 672
E6 Fixed setpoint, bit 21) 673 Ready/fault
E7 Gear. stage, bit 01) 674
E8 Gear. stage, bit 11)
E9 Gear. stage, bit 21) AS1 Signaling contact
AM 9 Enable voltage AS2 start inhibit
X411 RS232C
interface
LCD display
+ P –
P 600
DC link
M 600
Rating plate
Product status
Motor terminals U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2
Fig. 1-3 Connections
1) Freely–programmable terminals and relay function when supplied

2) Function not possible for Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1122–0BA11–0AA0
3) Only for Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1122–0BA11–0AA1. For boards with Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1121–0BA1–0AA0
this input may not be assigned


Determining and Setting the System

Configuration 2
Warning
! Incorrect setting values in P–159 to P–176 can cause the motor to accelerate
up to inadmissibly high speeds and terminal 64 (NE: Central drive
inhibit) and terminal 65 (controller inhibit) are ineffective.
In this case, only terminal 63 “open” (NE: Central pulse inhibit) and terminal 663
“open” (axis–specific pulse inhibit) are effective.
AM
Overview
Initialization
Sensing the DC link voltage
Motor data set
Speed ranges

07.94
Initialization
Table 2-1 Initialization
effective
P–095 After initia- – 1...13 dec Power module code number

lization Default: 7 from FW 3.0 pre–setting: 31)
Power module code number input
(refer to Section 6.2)
P–096.M After initia- – 0...7 dec Motor code number
lization Default: 0 (do not change)
P–097 Online – 0...1 hex Initialization
“SEtUP” is displayed
Selected power module data set is loaded
into the drive–machine data memory
“P–000” operating display is displayed after a

successful initialization
Sensing the
DC link voltage
Table 2-2 Sensing the DC link voltage

AM Parameter attributes
effective
P–061 Online 4 0...700 V Fixed DC link voltage

0 The DC link voltage is sensed via
the NE and equipment bus
Recognizable at: P–061 = 0
Parameter (P–006) indicates the
DC link voltage.
1...700 Enters the value of the actual DC link
voltage when using a monitoring
module without voltage
sensing.
1) With/from FW 3.00, power modules with Order No. [MLFB] 6SN112–1A0–A1 are automatically recognized.

Motor data set For special motors, the motor data must be entered. The controllers can then be
optimized with the self–tuning routine in accordance with Section 4.
Table 2-3 Motor data set
effective
P–158.M Online 4 0.000...65.000 mH Series reactor inductance

Used for motors with fmax > 150 Hz
P–159.M Online 4 0.0...6535.5 gm2 Moment of inertia, motor and external
Application–specific
Total moment of inertia referred to the motor shaft
Motor moment of inertia calculated using P–153 = +1
Total moment of inertia adjusted using
P–204 =5 and P–205 = +
P–219.M Online 4 0...15 kgm2 Additional moment of inertia
The parameterized value is internally added to
P–159.M. It is only necessary to enter in P–219.M,
when the setting range of P–159.M is exceeded.
(from FW 2.00)
P–160.M Online 4 0.00...650.00 kW Rated motor output 1)
Rated output for S1 operation
For forced–cooled motors, refer to the following
information
P–161.M Online 4 0.00...650.00 A Rated motor current 1)
Rated current for S1 duty

or ∆
P–162.M Online 4 0.00...650.00 V Rated motor voltage
Rating plate data1)
Circuit type or ∆ AM
P–163.M Online 4 0...65000 RPM Rated motor speed 1)
Non–synchronous speed at rated frequency and
rated load nrated < (frated ⋅ 60 s/min)/p
P–164.M Online 4 0...1200.0 Hz Rated motor frequency 1)
frated > nrated ⋅ p/(60 s/min)
P–166.M Online 4 0...Irated LT No–load motor current Equivalent circuit
diagram value
Calculated using P–153 = +1
Adjusted using P–204 = 3 and P–205 = +1
P–167.M Online 4 0.000...65.000 Ω Motor stator resistance, cold Equivalent circuit
diagram value
P–168.M Online 4 0.000...65.000 Ω Motor rotor resistance, cold Equivalent circuit
diagram value
P–169.M Online 4 0.000...65.000 Ω Stator leakage reactance Equivalent circuit
diagram value
P–170.M Online 4 0.000...65.000 Ω Rotor leakage reactance Equivalent circuit
diagram value
1) Manufacturer’s data according to VDE 0530, Part 1

07.94
effective
P–171.M Online 4 0.00...650.00 Ω Magnetizing reactance Equivalent circuit

diagram value
P–172.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Changeover speed, closed–loop/open–loop
control
P–173.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Speed at the start of field weakening
For operation with an uncontrolled infeed and
FW<2.00, the determined value should be multiplied
by the factor (Vsupply/500V) (this corresponds to 0.8
for Vsupply=400V).
From FW2.00, the control algorithm automatically
adapts itself to the DC link voltage (P–006).
The automatic adaptation can be disabled by resetting
bit 2 in P–090.
P–174.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Max. motor speed 1)
For no–load current optimization, enter
nmax (frated 60 s/min)/p, otherwise “F–60”
(p=pole pair number)
P–175.M Online 4 0.0...500.0 min Thermal motor time constant 1) 2)
P–176.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Speed at the start of stall torque
For operation with an uncontrolled infeed and
FW<2.00, the determined value should be multiplied
by the factor (Vsupply/500V) (this corresponds to 0.64
for Vsupply=400V).
AM From FW2.00, the control algorithm automatically
adapts itself to the DC link voltage (P–006).
The automatic adaptation can be disabled by resetting
bit 2 in P–090.
P–178.M Online 4 0.000...1.000 Power factor cos ϕ 1)
P–018.M Online 4 4.00...100.00 ms Initial rounding–off
For motors with deep–bar squirrel–cage rotors:
Increase this parameter to approx. 30 ms
P–036.M Online 4 0...7 hex Inverter clock cycle frequency
If the clock cycle frequency is increased, the current
controller dynamic response is improved, but the
permissible continuous current load capacity is
reduced. Espcially for high–speed motors, the clock
cycle frequency should be selected as high as
possible, however, the specified power de–rating
(reduction) should be kept.
If the clock cycle frequency is changed, then the
current controller must be re–optimized.

2) Only when using the motor temperature tracking function for relay function 5 (I2t pre–alarm)

effective
P–153 Online 4 –1...1 dec Calculating the equivalent circuit diagram data of
the actual motor
Enter +1 for pulse inhibit, terminal 63 or terminal 663.
The calculations are started for the entered special
motor.
P–153 Online 4 –1...1 dec Calculating the control data of the actual motor
Enter –1 for pulse inhibit, terminal 63 or terminal 663
The calculations are started for the entered special
motor.
For high–speed motors, increase the speed limiting P–029 = 6000 RPM to the max. speed.
Note
The motor circuit configuration should be selected so that neither the required
terminal voltage exceeds the maximum drive converter output voltage, nor the
IM module is operated with Irated motor < 0.1 Icont. module (refer to examples 1
and 2).
Example 1
If a motor with Vrated 230 V /400 V is operated from an uncontrolled infeed
module in the , the motor does not achieve the same
output as when operated from a controlled I/R module with VDC link = 600V / 625 AM
V. The reason for this is the reduced speed for the start of field weakening
(P–173) and the reduced speed at the start of the stall torque (P–176).
If the motor is switched into a delta configuration, this reaches the full rated
output for a drive converter dimensioned for Irated motor .
Example 2
If a motor is operated with a rated current in the circuit configuration
Irated motor < 0.1 Icont. module , then this can be adapted to the I/M module using
the circuit, if the following is valid:
Irated motor 0.1 Icont. module

Note
If only values for S6 duty are available as rating plate data, then these must be
converted to S1 duty for parameterization, and the limits must be increased
after optimization. For force–cooled motors, the rating plate data must be
converted to data for S1 duty of a non–ventilated motor of the same frame
size for parameterization, and the limits must be increased after optimization.
Converting the rating plate data
Determine the no–load current I0, refer to Section 4

Determine the rated current for S1 duty: Irated S1 = (2...2.5) I0
Irated S1
Determine the rated output for S1 duty: Prated S1 = Prated S6
Irated S6
Commission (start–up) with S1 values and optimization with limits 100 %

The limits are increased for S6 duty and for force–cooled operation.
AM

Speed ranges
Table 2-4 Speed ranges
effective

control
Start of the controlled speed range
Above this speed and the hysteresis, the speed is
controlled according to the calculated speed actual
value.
Start of the field weakening range
Above this speed, the drive converter output voltage
and frequency are no longer set proportional to one
another.
P–176.M Online 4 0...65535 RPM Speed at the start of stall torque
Start of de–rating
Above this speed, the power in the field–weakening
range is reduced in order to prevent the motor stalling.
P P Power characteristic
U Voltage characteristic
Y Flux characteristic
FP Prated M Torque characteristic
num Changeover speed, closed–loop/
U open–loop control
nrated Rated speed
nstall Speed at the stall torque
Ψrated nFS Speed at the start of
field weakening
Ψ nmax Max. motor speed AM
FM Mrated
M
nFS nstall nmax Motor speed n

0 F
num nnenn ⋅ FP
M
The torque and power limits can be changed using factor FM (parameters P–039, P–041 ) or FP (P–060).
The following speed ranges are obtained:
0 |n| num Open–loop controlled speed range
num |n| nrated FP/FM Range with constant torque
nrated FP/FM < |n| nstall Range with constant power
|n| > nFS Field–weakening range
nstall < |n| < nmax Stall power range, range of maximum output voltage

07.94

2.2.1 Operating display
The actual operating display of the drive converter is shown in parameters
P–000 and P–100.
Table 2-5 Operating display
Display
Function group
Motor number Relay function Operating mode Unit status Setpoint source Gearbox stage
Free–prog. re- Drive not Pulse enable at Analog setpoint Gearbox stage
Motor 1
lay function 1, enabled: the NE module Ch.1 P-113=1 1 is selected
is selected
terminal A11 Continue con- missing (term.63 Ch. 2 P-113=2
P–241 dition, refer to / term.48) Ch.1+2 P-113=3
nact = nset1) the “Unit sta-
Analog setpoint + Gearbox stage
tus” column
Motor 2 Axis–specific fixed setpoint 2 is selected
is selected Free–progr. re- Ch. 1 + freely–
pulse enable
lay function 2, All enable prog. terminal
missing
terminal A21 signals function 17, 18,
(term.663)
P–242 present: 19, 24 P–113=9
|Md| < Mdx1) Open–loop or Setpoint Gearbox stage
Motor 3 Controller
closed–loop enable at the zero P–113=0 3 is selected
is selected
speed control- NE module P–113=7
Free–progr. re- led operation P–113=8
lay function 3, missing
terminal A31 (term.64) and/
P–243 or controller Gearbox stage
enable at the IM Fixed set-
Motor 4 |nact| < nmin1) ... 4 is selected
module missing point 1...7
is selected
(term.65)
AM Free–progr. RFG enable Fixed set-
Gearbox stage
relay function 4, missing ... point 8...15
Motor selection terminal A41 (term.81) 5 is selected
1...4 P–244 Selected via freely–
Selected via freely |nact| < nx1) prog. terminal fct.
programmable–ter- Setpoint P–081...P–089
minal function enable =17, 18, 19, 24
missing speed setting with Gearbox stage
P–081...P–089 Free–progr. relay
(select P–114.1...7, 6 is selected
=20, 21 function 5,
terminal A51 terminal fct. P–119.1...8
P–245 No. 16)
Setpoint from the
I2t pre–alarm1)
Mode display for an motorized pot. fct.
enabled motor: P-113=6 Gearbox stage
Free–progr. relay P-114.8 speed or 7 is selected
function 6, P-081...P-089
Motor
terminal A61 =14. 15
operation
P–246
Setpoint from the
ramp–up en-
ded1) oscillation genera- Gearbox stage
Generator tor
operation 8 is selected
P-113=4 or
Ready/ P-081...P-089=2
fault, P-154, P-155
Gearbox stage
terminals 672 to speeds P-156,
1...8
674 P–053 Speed control- P-157
Selected via
ready1) ler clock cycle, times
freely–program-
fast. Clock
cycle is active Setpoint from the mable terminal
The segment is software for auto– function
controlled, if the optimization P–081...P–089
appropriate relay P-204=1...6 =9, 10, 11
has pulled–in. P-205=1
1) As supplied

2.2.2 Firmware version
Table 2-6 Firmware version
effective
(P–099) – – 0.00...99.99 Firmware release

Indicates the version of the loaded firmware.
2.2.3 Setting parameters for standard applications
Overview
Speed setting values
Max. speed monitoring via BERO
Torque limit value
Motor temperature monitoring
Motor temperature simulation
Oscillation operation
AM
Speed setting
values
Table 2-7 Speed setting values
effective
P–022.M Online 4 2...16000 RPM Shutdown speed, pulse cancellation

The drive switched into a no–current condition if the
controller is inhibited and this speed is fallen below
(shutdown so that it does not rotate backwards).
P–029.G Online 4 0...32000 RPM Speed limiting
The speed of the actual motor is limited to the
limit the actual gearbox stage.
Selected with freely–programmable terminal
function 9, 10, 11.
Max. speed A BERO switch can be connected via X432 to monitor the maximum speed.
monitoring via When the shutdown threshold is exceeded, the pulses are canceled and fault
BERO message F–90 is output (from FW 3.00).

07.94
Cable breakage If no BERO pulses are received for a calculated speed of greater than 1200
monitoring RPM/pulse number, then a cable breakage is assumed. F–90 is also output.
Table 2-8 Cable breakage monitoring
effective
P–131.M Online 4 0...10 RPM Pulse number, BERO speed monitoring

For a value of zero, the speed monitoring is inactive.
P–132.M Online 4 0...65535 RPM Shutdown speed, speed monitoring BERO
Torque limit values
effective
P–039.G Online 4 0...399 % 1st torque limit value

The torque is limited to the selected percentage of
the rated torque of the actual motor.
P–041.G Online 4 0...399 % 2nd torque limit value
The torque is limited to the selected percentage of
the rated torque of the actual motor. The 2nd torque
AM limit is selected using the freely–programmable
terminal with terminal function 1 and speed greater
than P–050 switching speed Md1 to Md2
Motor temperature A motor temperature sensor can be connected via X412.

monitoring (from FW 3.00)
Temperature sensor types

One of the two can be selected
KTY84: The measured resistance is converted into a temperature.
The maximum permissible temperature can be parameterized.
PTC: Resistances which are measured to be less than 1330 Ohm are
considered to be reliable, resistances greater than 1330 Ohm are
interpreted as an overtemperature condition.
Pre–alarm and shutdown behavior
After approx. 1s: “Pre–alarm motor overtemperature” relay
After the time in P–065: Pulse cancellation and fault message F–14
Sensor cable interruption and short–circuit
KTY84: Measured temperatures under approx. 0 degrees C or above
approx. 200 degrees C result in pulse cancellation and fault message F–19
PTC: Sensor cable interruption and short–circuit are not recognized.

Table 2-10 Motor temperature monitoring
effective
P–053.M Online 4 0...FFFFhex Control word

Bit Value
13 0000H Type, motor temperature sensor KTY84
2000H Type, motor temperature sensor PTC
P–063.M Online 4 0...170 degrees C Max. motor temperature
Only effective for KTY84. The shutdown threshold
cannot be parameterized for PTC.
P–064.M Online 4 0...170 degrees C Fixed temperature
The motor temperature monitoring is activated by
entering a value of zero.
P–065.M Online 4 0...600s Timer stage, motor temperature alarm
Motor temperature
emulation
Table 2-11 Motor temperature emulation
effective
P–175.M Online 4 0.0...500 min Thermal motor time constant

For free–programmable relay function 5,
I2t monitoring AM
Note
A dedicated temperature model is computed for each of the motor parameter
sets.
However, quantities such as the effect of the fan and air intake temperature
cannot be taken into account. This is the reason that it is preferable if the
temperature is monitored using a motor temperature sensor.

Oscillation
operation
Table 2-12 Oscillation operation
effective
P–154 Online 4 –32000...32000 Oscillation setpoint 1

RPM
P–155 Online 4 –32000...32000 Oscillation setpoint 2
RPM
P–156 Online 4 0.002...60 s Oscillation interval time 1
P–157 Online 4 0.002...60 s Oscillation interval time 2
Selected using a freely–programmable terminal
function 2 or P–113=4
Speed [RPM]
P–154
P–155
P–156 P–157
Time [s]
AM

2.3 Multi–motor operation

The following applications can be combined with one another:
Parallel operation
Parameter set changeover
Motor changeover
Motor selection
Table 2-13 Motor selection
effective
P–056 Online 4 0...4 Motor selection

Select actual motor
0 Selected via freely–programmable
terminal function 20, 21.
1...4 Motor 1...4 active
Note
The parameter set is only changed–over after the pulses have been canceled if
P–053 bit 1 = 0.
AM
2.3.1 Parallel operation
Several motors can be simultaneously operated from an IM module. The motors

are supplied with the same voltage and same frequency due to the parallel
circuit configuration. This means that the motors must have the same voltage–
frequency characteristic, i. e. the ratios of the rated voltage and rated frequency
of the individual motors must be the same. For different motor types, the ratio of
the outputs should not exceed 1 : 10.
If the motors connected in parallel have the same pole pair number, they rotate
with approximately the same speed.
Warning
! For different loads, the speeds differ by the difference of the slip speeds, i.e. an
individual motor deviates from the calculated speed of the complete system,
and can then exceed a selected speed limit.

The drives have a stronger tendency to stall when operated in a parallel circuit
configuration compared to individual operation. In order to be able to better
compensate load surges, we recommend that the current limit P–059 should be
set to 150 % of the summed current. If a steady–state rated torque is deman-
ded in the lower speed range, then P–057 (current in the open–loop controlled
range) should also be increased. The induction motor module should be dimen-
sioned for this current rating, and it should be ensured that the motors are ade-
quately cooled.
When operated in parallel, only the total current can be sensed which is then
distributed to the individual motors depending on the load. This means that
these should be externally and individually thermally monitored. If the
monitoring function responds, it is not permissible to interrupt the power cables
without first canceling the pulses.
For high–speed special–purpose motors (fmax > 150 Hz), we recommend that a
reactor is located between the induction motor module and the motor group.

induction motor module
ϑ>
Pulse enable T.663
U2 V2 W2
1)
AM
ϑ M1 ϑ M2 ϑ M3 ϑ M8
3~ 3~ 3~ 3∼
Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor 3 Motor 8
1) Only required for high–speed special motors
Fig. 2-1 Parallel operation from a SIMODRIVE 611 analog induction motor module

03.96
The motor data must be entered as follows for parallel operation:
Table 2-14 Parallel operation
effective
P–158.M Online 4 0.000...65.000 mH Series reactor inductance

Used for motors with fmax > 150 Hz.
P–160.M Online 4 0.00...650.00 kW Rated motor output 1)
Sum of the rated outputs for S1 duty
∑ Prated i = Prated tot
P–161.M Online 4 0.00...650.00 A Rated motor current 1)
Sum of the rated currents for S1 duty
∑ Irated i
Circuit type Y or ∆
P–162.M Online 4 0.00...650.00 V Rated motor voltage 1)
Rated voltage of the common V/Hz characteristic
Circuit type Y or ∆
Output–weighted average value of the rated speed
∑ Prated i nrated i
Prated tot
Non–synchronous speed at rated frequency and

rated load nrated < (frated ⋅ 60 s/min)/p
P–164.M Online 4 0...1200,0 Hz Rated motor frequency 1)
Rated frequency of the common V/Hz characteristic
frated > nrated ⋅ p/(60 s/min)
P–174.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Max. motor speed Manufacturer’s data AM
Lowest maximum speed of the motor group, reduced
by the maximum slip difference. To optimize, enter
the no–load nrated i load current
nmax (frated 60 s/min)/p, otherwise “F–60”
(p=pole pair number)
P–178.M Online 4 0.000...1.000 Power factor cos ϕ 1)
Current–weighted avg. value of the power factor
Irated i
∑ cos i
Irated tot.
P–018.M Online 4 4.0...100.00 ms Initial rounding–off Application–specific

For motors with deep–bar squirrel–cage rotors:
Increase parameter to approx. 30 ms
The current controller dynamic response is improved
by increasing the switching frequency, however the
reduced. Especially for high–speed motors, the
switching frequency should be selected as high as
possible, but the specified power de–rating must be
maintained. If the switching frequency is changed,
the current controller must be re–optimized.

effective

Application–specific
Sum of the total moment of inertia referred to the
motor shaft, the motor moment of inertia is calculated
using P–153 = +1
Total moment of inertia is adjusted using P–204 = 5
and P–205 = +1
P–219.M Online 4 0...15 kgm2 Supplementary moment of inertia
P159.M. It is only necessary to make an entry in
P–219.M, when the setting range of P–159.M is ex-
ceeded
P–166.M Online 4 0...Irated LT No–load motor current
Equivalent circuit diagram value
P–167.M Online 4 0.000...65.000 Ω Motor stator resistance, cold
P–168.M Online 4 0.000...65.000 Ω Motor rotor resistance, cold
P–169.M Online 4 0.000...65.000 Ω Stator leakage reactance
P–170.M Online 4 0.000...65.000 Ω Leakage rotor reactance
AM Equivalent circuit diagram value
P–171.M Online 4 0.00...650.00 Ω Magnetizing reactance
Adjusted using P–204 = 4 and P – 205 = +1
P–175.M Online 4 0.0...500.0 min Thermal motor time constant
Manufacturer data
Lowest time constant of the motor group
An external individual monitoring is recommended.
Refer to Section 2.2.3
P–172.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Changeover speed, cl.–loop/open–loop control

12.94
effective

When operated from an uncontrolled supply and
FW<2.00 the determined value must be multiplied
by the factor (Vsupply/500V) (corresponds to 0.8 for
Vsupply=400V).
From FW2.00, the control algorithm is automatically
adapted to the DC link voltage (P–006).
The automatic adaptation can be disabled by
resetting bit 2in P–090.
P–176.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Speed at the start of the stall torque
When operated from an uncontrolled supply and
FW<2.00 the determined value must be multiplied
by the factor (Vsupply/500V) (corresponds to 0.64
for Vsupply=400V).
From FW2.00, the control algorithm is automatically
adapted to the DC link voltage (P–006).
The automatic adaptation can be disabled by
resetting bit 2in P–090.
AM

2.3.2 Parameter set changeover
The induction motor module allows four complete motor data sets to be
simultaneously saved. The actual data set can be selected using
freely–programmable terminals (refer to Section 3.3.2) or using parameter
P–056. If you wish to load various parameter sets into the induction motor
module, then you can use these functions to changeover the parameter set.
The currently valid motor data set is displayed in the first position at the left in
the operating display (P–000, P–100).
If bit 1 = 1 in parameter P–053, then the motor data sets are also changed–over
even when the pulses are enabled. This capability can be used to adapt the
motor and controller data.
2.3.3 Motor changeover
The induction motor module allows four complete motor data sets to be
simultaneously saved. The actual data set can be selected via
freely–programmable terminals (refer to Section 3.3.2) or using parameter
P–056. Freely–programmable relay functions are available for the four motor
data sets (refer to Section 3.3.1), which indicate which of the data sets is active.
This function can be used to changeover the motor if you wish to operate
various motors from the induction motor module one after the other.
In this case, bit 1 in parameter P–053 must be set to 0. This means, that after a
request to changeover the motor, the motor data are only changed–over, if the
induction motor module pulses are inhibited (refer to Section 1.3). The user can
decide which enable terminals are used to inhibit the pulses. The pulse inhibit is
interlocked for approx. 20 ms during changeover.
AM The interlock is then removed, and the “Motor ... active” relay of the newly
loaded motor pulls–in. This relay signal can be used to control a contactor to
changeover the motor. The currently valid motor data set is displayed at the first
position to the left in the operating display (P–000, P–100).
A recommended circuit for the contactor control to changeover the motor is
shown in the following diagram. The freely–programmable terminals Em with
terminal function 20 “Motor selection bit 0” and En with the terminal function 21
“Motor selection bit 1” and the freely–programmable relay outputs Aw, Ax, Ay,
Az, with relay functions 11, 12, 13, 14 are assigned “Motor 1, 2, 3, 4 active” .
The relays are mutually interlocked using the induction motor module software.
However, the recommended contactor interlocking ensures that even for
parameterizing errors, not more than one motor is connected to the drive
converter at any one time.

SIMODRIVE 611
Pulse enable analog
K1 IM module
K2 T.663
K3
K4 P–053 bit 1 = 0
Relay outputs
Select terminal
Motor selection 1 2 3 4 input Aw
Em Ax
Bit 0 0 1 0 1
En Ay
Bit 1 0 0 1 1 Az
U2 V2 W2
1) K1H K2H K3H K4H
K1 K2 K3 K4
K1H K2H K3H K4H

M1 M2 M3 M4
3∼ 3∼ 3∼ 3∼
K1 K1
K2 K1 K2
K3 K3 K2
K4 K3
K4 K4
Motor 3 Motor 4
Motor 1 Motor 2
AM
1) Only required for high–speed special motors
Fig. 2-2 Motor changeover

07.94
2.4 Operating motors with maximum speeds > 32000 RPM
Warning
! All parameters, which physically represent a speed with the units RPM, as well
Pulse number P131 as BERO pulse number P131 are entered or displayed lower by the following
factors:
Max. motor speed Factor

32000...64000 RPM 1/2
> 64000 RPM 1/3
Parameter In order to be able to operate motors with a maximum motor speed > 32000
settings RPM, the settings, shown in Table 2–13, must be made.
AM

03.96
Table 2-15 Operating motors with maximum speeds >32000 RPM
effective

Non–synchronous speed at rated frequency and rated load
nrated < (frated ⋅ 60 s/min)/p
Max. motor speed Input
32000...64000 RPM Rated motor speed / 2
> 64000 RPM Rated motor speed / 3
P–174.M Online 4 0...64000 RPM Max. motor speed 1)
Max. motor speed Input
32000...64000 RPM Max. motor speed / 2
> 64000 RPM Max. motor speed / 3
P–153 Online 4 –1 ... 1 dec Calculating the equivalent circuit diagram of the actual
motor
+1 is entered for pulse inhibit, terminal 63 or terminal 663
The calculations for the entered special motor are started.
The following equivalent circuit diagram data are calculated:
Max. motor speed Equivalent circuit diagram data
32000...64000 RPM P–159: Moment of inertia, motor
and external
4
> 64000 RPM P–159: Moment of inertia, motor
and external
9
P–153 Online 4 –1 ... 1 dec Calculating the controller data of the actual motor
–1 is entered for pulse inhibit, terminal 63 or terminal 663
The calculations for the entered special motor are started.
The following controller data are calculated: AM
Max. motor speed Controller data
32000...64000 RPM P–114: Speed for
max. motor useful speed
1/2
P–029: Speed limiting
1/2
P–172: Changeover speed,
open–loop/closed–loop control
1/2
P–173:
Speed at the start of field weak.
1/2
P–176:
Speed at the start of stall torque
1/2
> 64000 RPM P–114: Speed for
max. motor useful speed
1/3
P–029: Speed limiting
1/3
P–172: Changeover speed,
open–loop/closed–loop control
1/3
P–173:
Speed at the start of field weak.
1/3
P–176:
Speed at the stall torque
1/3
If speed setting values are manually entered with the units RPM, all of the
values must be multiplied by the factors 1/2 and 1/3.

2.5 Monitor function
2.5 Monitor function

The address contents (data in the RAM area) of the induction motor module can
be read via parameters P–249 to P–251.
Note
addresses is provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
Table 2-16 Monitor function
effective
P–249 Online 10 0...FFFF hex Segment, memory location monitor

Segment address of a RAM location
P–250 Online 10 0...FFFF hex Address, memory location monitor
Offset address of a RAM location
(P–251) – – 0...FFFF hex Value display, memory location monitor
Contents of a RAM location
AM

12.94
3.1 Speed setpoint interfaces
Parameterizing the Drive Converter

Interfaces 3
Overview
Speed setpoint channel selection
Normalization, analog speed setpoint
Fixed setpoints/motorized potentiometer setpoint
Setpoint priority
Speed setpoint
channel selection
Table 3-1 Speed setpoint channel selection
Number Change P–051 Setting range Description AM
effective
P–113 Online 4 0...9 hex Channel selection, speed setpoint

0H: digital setpoint 0
1H: analog setpoint, channel 1, terminal 56/14
2H: analog setpoint, channel 2, terminal 24/8
3H: analog setpoint, sum channel 1 + channel 2,
terminal 56/14 + terminal 24/8
4H: digital setpoint from the oscillation generator
6H: digital setpoint from the electronic mot. pot.
9H: sum, analog setpoint + fixed setpoint,
channel 1 + fixed setpoint from the freely–
programmable terminal function 17, 18, 19, 24
(10)H: digital setpoint; internally entered by the
firmware during auto–optimization

07.94
Normalization, analog
speed setpoint
Table 3-2 Normalization, analog speed setpoint
effective
P–014.M Online 4 –32000...32000 Speed for max. useful motor speed

RPM Speed, which should be achieved with the analog
input voltage in P–024 (channel 1 active) and in
P–025 (channel 2 active).
P–014 > 0 = clockwise rotating field for
a positive speed setpoint
P–014 < 0 = counter–clockwise rotating field for
a positive speed setpoint
P–024 Online 4 2...10 V Normalization, setpoint channel 1
Analog speed setpoint voltage for P–014
P–015 Online 4 E000...2000 hex Offset correction, setpoint channel 1
e. g. pos. offset correction: 002FH
neg. offset correction: FF00H
P–025 Online 4 2...10 V Normalization, setpoint channel 2
Analog speed setpoint voltage for P–014
P–019 Online 4 E000...2000 hex Offset correction, setpoint channel 2
e. g. pos. offset correction: 002FH
neg. offset correction: FF00H
Fixed setpoints,
motorized potentiometer setpoint
AM Table 3-3 Fixed setpoints, motorized potentiometer setpoint
effective
P–114.F Online 4 –32000...32000 Fixed setpoints, 1 to 7

RPM Permanently set speed setpoint
Selected via the freely–programmable terminal
function 17, 18, 19 (refer to Section 3.2.2).
P–119.F Online 4 –32000...32000 Fixed setpoints, 8 to 15
RPM Permanently set speed setpoint
function 17, 18, 19, 24 (refer to Section 3.2.2)
from FW 2.00
P–114.8 Online 4 –32000...32000 Motorized potentiometer setpoint
RPM Adjustable speed setpoint
function 14, 15 (refer to Section 3.2.2).

04.97
12.94
Setpoint priority
Table 3-4 Setpoint priority
Priority Setpoint Setpoint source

Effect
Selected by Designation
High Imot = 0 T.63 or Open Pulse enable Motor coasts down in a no–current condition
T.663 inhibited
n=0 T.81 Open Fast ramp–function Braking without ramp–down time,
generator stop pulse enable or pulse inhibit
n=0 T.64 or Open Controller enable Braking with ramp–down time, pulse inhibit
T.65 inhibited
n=0 T. fct. 16 Open Setpoint enable Braking with ramp–down time, pulse enable
inhibited
n ≥ nmin P–030 Value Steady–state Min. speed, also for lower setpoints, lower
entry minimum speed priority
n n P–054 Value Speed range No steady–state operation in the suppressed
P–055 entry suppression speed range
n = +n/–n T. fct. 12 Activa- Clockwise/counter– Only one direction of rotation possible
ted clockwise rotating
field
n = P–114.8 P–113 = 6 Value Motorized potentio- Increase/decrease setpoint
entry meter function
n1 = P–154 T. fct. 2 Control- Oscillation Oscillation mode
n2 = P–155 led
n1 = P–114.1 T. fct. 17 Control- Fixed setpoint Selected fixed speed
to T. fct. 18 led
n7 = P114.7 T. fct. 19
n8 = P–119.1 T. fct. 24
to
n15 =P–119.8
AM
Low Standard P–113 Value Standard setpoint Parameterized standard setpoint
setpoint entry
source

3.2 Input terminals
3.2 Input terminals
3.2.1 Permanently–connected terminal functions
Warning
! When the motor pulses are canceled, there is no longer any information about
the motor speed. The calculated speed actual value is then set to 0. This
means that all of the speed actual value signals, speed actual value messages
and relay signals, which monitor the speed (|nact| < nmin, ramp–up completed,
nact < nx, |nact| = nset) no longer provide any meaningful information when the
motor pulses are canceled. The motor pulses can be canceled by withdrawing
enable signals or as a result of fault messages.
Warning
! If a drive is shutdown using a fast ramp–function generator stop (terminal 81
open), and is kept at zero speed for a longer period of time with the inverter
enabled, it should be ensured that the motor is adequately cooled, as a current
is impressed which is in the order of a magnitude of the rated current (percen-
tage in P–057).
Caution for self–ventilated motors.
Table 3-5 Permanently–connected terminal function

AM Terminal function Description Terminal
number
Axis–specific The inverter is enabled (motor control) if the enable voltage is connected to
pulse enable terminal 663 (axis–specific pulse enable) and terminal 65 (controller enable).
If terminal 663 (axis–specific pulse enable) is de–energized while the motor is 663
rotating, the inverter is inhibited after 20 ms and the motor coasts down in a no–
current condition.
Controller enable If terminal 65 (controller enable) is de–energized while the motor is rotating, the
drive brakes along the ramp–function generator ramp. 65
When the nmin threshold (P–022) is fallen below (absolute value), the inverter is
inhibited and the motor is shutdown so that it does not rotate backwards.
Fast ramp–function If terminal 81 (fast ramp–function generator stop) is energized, the speed
generator stop setpoint is enabled. If the input is open–circuit, a speed setpoint of zero (digital)
is entered.
If terminal 81 is de–energized while the motor is rotating, the motor brakes
without ramp–function generator along the effective limit (current limiting 81
P–057...P–059, torque limiting P–039, P–041, power limiting P–060).
When zero speed is reached, the current from P–057 is still impressed. If bit 2
is set in P–053, then after the speed in P–022 is fallen below, the pulses are
inhibited and the motor is switched–into a no–current condition.
Note
When starting a motor, the enable signals must be entered step–by–step in the
sequence of their priority (refer to Table 3-5).

12.94
3.2 Input terminals
3.2.2 Freely–programmable terminal functions
Warning
! Terminal function parameters P–081 to P–089 may only be programmed when
the pulses are canceled (terminal 63 or terminal 663 open circuit).
Overview
Terminal function assignment
Terminal functions
Terminal function
assignment
Table 3-6 Terminal function assignment
effective
P–081 Online 4 1...24 dec Terminal function assignment E1 to E9

bis Functions 1 to 24 are assigned to terminals E1 to
P–089 E9 by entering the function number. The factory
setting should be taken from the following table.
AM

03.96
07.94
3.2 Input terminals
Terminal
functions
Terminal Description Fct. Assignment

function No. after initiali-
zation
2nd torque limit If this function is selected, the 2nd torque limit in P–041 becomes active if the 1 P–081 (E1)
changeover speed from P–050 is exceeded.
Oscillation If this function is selected, then the speed setpoint of the oscillation generator 2
from P–154 to P–157 becomes active.
Reset fault me- If this function is selected, with the controller inhibited (terminal 65 or terminal 3 P–083 (E3)
mory (R) fault 663 open–circuit), a fault message, when available, is acknowledged.
acknowledge-
ment
Ramp–up If this function is selected, the internal ramp–function generator is bypassed. 7 P–082 (E2)
time=0
Gearbox stage 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A total of 8 binary–coded parameter sets for setpoint
Bit 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 normalization, speed monitoring, controller setting, 9 P–087 (E7)
torque limiting and torque monitoring can be
Bit 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 selected. 10 P–088 (E8)
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 11 P–089 (E9)
Clockwise/ If this function is activated, only positive setpoints are permitted; negative 12
counter clock- setpoints result in speed n=0. If the appropriate terminal is energized, only
wise counter–clockwise direction of rotation is output, otherwise only the clockwise
rotating field.
Ramp–function If this function is selected, the 2nd parameter set P–042 and P–043 of the 13
generator 2 internal ramp–function generator is activated.
Increase Motorized potentiometer function P–113=6 14
setpoint If one of these terminals is energized, the digital speed setpoint P–114.8 of the
AM motorized potentiometer function is increased or decreased corresponding to
the ramp–up or ramp–down times of ramp–function generator 2 (with the
Decrease exception TH=0). If both are simultaneously controlled, the setpoint is 15
setpoint changed towards 0.
Setpoint enable If this function is activated, the appropriate terminal must be energized in order 16
to move the drive. If the terminal is opened, the drive brakes with the appro-
priate ramp–down time and comes to a standstill under current.
Fixed setpoint A total of 15 binary
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
selection coded fixed values
P–114.1 to P–114.7
Bit 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 and P–119.1 to 17 P–084 (E4)
P–119.8 are selected
Bit 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 using this terminal. If 18 P–085 (E5)
all of the terminals re-
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 main open–circuit, the 19 P–086 (E6)
Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 setpoint, defined in 24

P–113, is valid.
Motor selection 1 2 3 4
Bit 0 0 1 0 1 A total of 4 binary–coded motor data sets, motor 1 to 20

motor 4 can be selected using these terminals.
Bit 1 0 0 1 1 21

10.00
Warning
! When the motor pulses are canceled, there is no longer any information about
the motor speed. The calculated speed actual value is then set to 0. This
means that all of the speed actual value signals, speed actual value messages
and relay signals, which monitor the speed (|nact| < nmin, ramp–up completed,
nact < nx, |nact| = nset) no longer provide any meaningful information when the
motor pulses are canceled. The motor pulses can be canceled by withdrawing
enable signals or as a result of fault messages.
Caution
! All of the relays drop–out when the electronics power supply fails or is
powered–down.
3.3.1 Permanently–connected relay functions
Table 3-8 Permanently–connected relay functions
Terminal Terminal
Description
function number
AM
The relay function can be changed–over using P–053:
Bit Value
Ready/no 0000H The relay pulls–in if there is no fault 672
fault, axis– and the pulses and controller are 673
specific 0 enabled. 674
0001H The relay pulls–in if there is no fault
present.
Feedback
The relay (NC contact) pulls–in if the enable voltage is AS1
signal, start
connected to terminal 663, axis–specific pulse enable. AS2
inhibit

07.94
3.3.2 Freely–programmable relay functions
Warning
! Relays (P–241 to P–247) may only be programmed when the pulses are
inhibited (terminal 63 or terminal 663 open–circuit).
Overview
Message assignment
Relay functions
Messages which can be parameterized
Control word, messages
Note
The relay signals are updated with 20 ms for the standard speed controller
clock cycle.
For a faster speed controller clock cycle, they are updated with 10 ms (refer to
P–090, bit 3, FW 3.00).
Message
AM assignment
Table 3-9 Message assignment
effective
P–241 Online 4 1...20 dec Programmable messages 1 to 6

to Functions 1 to 20 are assigned to relay outputs A11
P–246 to A61 by entering the function number.
The factory setting can be taken from the following
table.

04.97
Relay functions
Relay function Description Funct. Relay output,

No. when supplied
|nact|< nmin The relay pulls–in if the calculated speed falls below the actual value set in 1 A31 (P–243)
P–021.1 to P–021.8.
Ramp–up The relay pulls–in if, after the setpoint step, the calculated speed actual 2 A61 (P–246)
completed value is within the actual tolerance bandwidth around the new setpoint, and
has remained for at least 200 ms in this tolerance bandwidth.
The “Ramp–up completed” relay remains inactive if the tolerance
bandwidth is left again before the 200ms has expired.
The tolerance bandwidth is set using P–027.1 to P–027.8.
The signal stays in the active position until the speed setpoint changes.
If the tolerance bandwidth is left again after 200 ms, the signal remains
active, unless, in the meantime, the setpoint has changed.
Speed fluctuations caused by load changes do not cause the relay to
drop–out.
|Md|< Mdx The relay pulls–in, if the torque falls below the actual limit value. 3 A21 (P–242)
The limit value is set using P–047.1 to P–047.8.
If relay nact=nset drop–out when the speed setpoint changes, the
|Md|< Mdx relay can only drop–out 800 ms after relay nact =nset has
pulled–in again.
|nact|< nx The relay pulls–in, if the speed falls below the nx threshold. 4 A41 (P–244)
nx is set using P–023.1 to P–023.8.
I2t pre–alarm The relay drops–out if the actual thermal motor model is overloaded. The 5 A51 (P–245)
thermal time constants are separately set for each motor in P–175.1 to
P–175.4.
The user can define how he responds to this pre–alarm.
Fan function and air intake temperature are not taken into account. Thus,
it is preferable to use a temperature sensor.
Drive converter The relay drops–out if the main heatsink temperature monitoring responds. 6 –
overtemp. If the overtemperature condition continues, the drive converter is
pre–alarm powered–down after approx. 20 s with the fault message F–15.
AM
Variable 7 –
relay function 1 Refer to the description of the “Variable relay functions”.
Variable Set using P–185 to P–189 and using P–190 to P–194. 8 –
relay function 2
Reserved 9 –
Reserved 10 –
Motor 1 active One of these relays pulls–in if the appropriate motor data set is active. 11 –
Using this relay function, the external auxiliary contactor can be controlled
Motor 2 active 12 –
to changeover the motor.
Motor 3 active We recommend a mutual contactor interlocking and an interlocking with 13 –
the pulse enable.
Motor The relay drops–out when the motor develops an overtemperature 16 –
overtemp. condition. If the fault condition continues, the drive converter is
pre–alarm powered–down with fault message F–14 after a time set in P–065.
(from FW 3.00)
nact =nset The relay pulls–in if the calculated speed actual value enters the tolerance 20 A11 (P–241)
bandwidth around the setpoint before the RFG and remains for at least 200
ms in this tolerance bandwidth
P–027.1 to P027.8 are used to set this tolerance bandwidth.
If the tolerance bandwidth is left, relay “nact =nset” immediately drops–out.
The relay drops–out as a result of speed fluctuations caused by load
changes.

Parameterizable
signals
Table 3-11 Parameterizable signals
effective
P–021.G Online 4 2...16000 RPM nmin for “nact < nmin” signal
Response value for freely–programmable relay
signal 1 “|nact| < nmin”
P–023.G Online 4 0...32000 RPM nx for “nact < nx” signal
Response value for freely–programmable relay
signal 4 “|nact| < nx”
P–027.G Online 4 0...29000 RPM Tolerance bandwidth for “nset = nact” signal
Tolerance value for freely–programmable relay signal
1 “Ramp–up completed” and for the freely–program-
mable relay signal 20 “nset = nact”
P–047.G Online 4 0...100 % Mdx for “Md < Mdx” signal
Response value for the freely–programmable relay
signal 3 “Md < Mdx”
The setting refers to the actual torque limiting.
Control word,
signals
Table 3-12 Control word, signals

AM
effective
P–247 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Control word, signals

Each of the relay signals can be individually and in-
dependently inverted by setting the appropriate bit.
Bit Value
0 0001H Relay function terminal A11 is
inverted
inverted
inverted
inverted
inverted
inverted

12.94
3.3.3 Variable relay function
Table 3-13 Variable relay function
effective
P–185 – – – Variable relay function 1

to
P–189
P–185 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address for monitoring 1
P–186 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Threshold for monitoring 1
P–187 Online 4 0.00...10.00 s Pull–in delay, monitoring 1
P–188 Online 4 0.00...10.00 s Drop–out delay, monitoring 1
P–189 Online 4 0...7FFF hex Hysteresis, monitoring 1
Hysteresis for threshold P–186
P–190 – – – Variable relay function 2
to
P–194
P–190 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address for monitoring 2
P–191 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Threshold for monitoring 2
P–192 Online 4 0.00...10.00 s Pull–in delay, monitoring 2
P–193 Online 4 0.00...10.00 s Drop–out delay, monitoring 2
P–194 Online 4 0...7FFF hex Hysteresis, monitoring 2
Hysteresis for threshold P–191
P–247 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Control word, signals
Bit Value
0000H Variable relay function 1 with AM
sign interrogation
8
sign interrogation
9
12 test.
The threshold (P–186) is AND’ed
with the RAM variable (P–185) to
be monitored.
13
test
Note
A list of the important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses
are provided in the Attachment (Section 6.5).

07.94
3.3.4 Analog outputs
Note
Analog outputs are not possible with Order No. [MLFB]
6SN1122–0BA11–0AA0.
Overview
Function
Technical data
Parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2
Connection for analog displays
Function Analog output of RAM variables for measurement purposes using two 8–bit D/A
converters.
Note
A list of the important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses
are provided in the Attachment (Section 6.5).
AM
Technical data
2 output channels at terminal A91 (DAU 1) and terminal A92 (DAU 2)
± 10 V voltage range
Coarse and fine normalization, offset compensation
Polarity of the output voltage can be set using the fine normalization
(± 1000 %)

Parameterization
DAU 1, DAU 2
Table 3-14 Parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2
effective
P–066 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address, DAU 1

output at DAU 1
Default:
11B6H absolute calculated speed actual value
P–067 Online 4 0...F hex Shift factor, DAU 1
Coarse normalization of the selected data value by
shifting the binary number to the left.
Shift to the left by 1 = multiplication by 2
Max. gain: 32768
P–012 Online 4 –1000.0...1000.0 % Normalization, DAU 1
Fine normaliization of the selected data value
P–078 Online 4 –127...127 dec Offset, DAU 1
Compensation of a possibly existing offset for DAU
1
Default: 11B8H utilization
P–013 Online 4 –1000.0...1000.0 % Normalization, DAU 2
AM
Output voltage [V]

+10,0
–10,0
Hex numerical value


Connection for
analog displays
Application: The following DAU assignment is intended to connect unipolar
display instruments and the operating range is therefore limited to 0...+10 V
without overflow.
Table 3-15 Connection for analog displays
effective
P–012 Online 4 –1000.0...1000.0 Normalization, DAU 1

P–066 = 11B6H |nact| display
For P–012 = 100 % and P–067 = 0H, the following
is valid:
Standstill = 0 V
Max. speed (minimum from P–029,
P–174) = +10 V
1 V corresponds to 10 %
P–013 Online 4 –1000.0...1000.0 Normalization, DAU 2
P–068 = 11B8H utilization
Displays the utilization in the ranges
constant torque: Md/Mdmax
constant power: P/Pmax
(takes into account the actual torque limits P–039,
P–041 and the current and power limits P–059 and
P–060)
For P–013 = 100 % and P–069 = 0H, the following
is valid:
No load = 0 V
Max. torque and power = + 10 V
1 V corresponds to 10 %
AM
Output voltage [V]
No overflow
+10,0
–10,0
Hex numerical value


04.97
12.94
4 Controller optimization
Controller Optimization 4
Automatic functions can be selected to adjust important motor parameters. The
drive must be enabled.
Warning
! With these automatic optimization runs, the motor is connected to a voltage
and it operates at speeds up to the maximum speed. The optimization runs
involved are identified by the symbol.
Note
When using an UE module, in order to reduce the regenerative power, the
ramp–down time P–017 and P–043 must be increased until the drive can
brake from the maximum motor speed down to 0 without a fault message
being output (DC link overvoltage).
AM
Table 4-1 Controller optimization
effective
Optimizing the controller data of the actual motor with the drive enabled
Current controller optimization, refer to Section 4.2

P–204 Online 10 0...8 dec Enter 1 selection: Current controller optimization
P–205 Online 0...1 dec Enter 1 start optimization
Adjust power offset 1)

P–204 Online 10 0...8 dec Enter 2 selection: Adjust power offset
P–205 Online 0...1 dec Enter 1 start adjustment
Speed controller optimization,

refer to Sections 4.1 and 4.7
P–031 Online 4 0.0...255.9 P gain, speed controller
P–032 Online 4 10.0...6000.0 ms Integral action time, speed controller
1) No longer necessary from FW 3.0

07.94
Tabelle 4-1 Controller optimization
effective
Field controller optimization, refer to Section 4.3

P–034 Online 4 0,0...600,0 A/V s P gain, field controller
P–035 Online 4 5.0...600.0 ms Integral action time, field controller
Adjust no–load current
P–204 Online 10 0...8 dec Enter 3 selection: Adjust no–load current

Adjust magnetizing reactance
P–204 Online 10 0...8 dec Enter 4 selection: Adjust the magnetizing reactance
Adjustment, field–weakening speed

(from FW 2.00)
P–204 Online 10 0...8 dec Enter 8 selection: Adjust the field–weakening speed
Adjustment, total moment of inertia
P–204 Online 10 0...8 dec Enter 5 selection: Adjust the total moment of inertia
Adjust rotor resistance

AM (not applicable for motors with
deep–bar squirrel–cage rotors)
P–204 Online 10 0...8 dec Enter 6 selection: Adjust rotor resistance
Calculate speed controller setting

(from FW 2.00)
Not applicable, if the speed controller was optimized
(refer to the previous text)
P–204 Online 10 0...8 dec Enter 7 selection: Calculate the speed controller
setting
P–205 Online 0...1 dec Enter 1 start calculation
P–052 Online 4 0...1 hex Transfer parameters into the FEPROM

04.97
12.94
Note
If the no–load current adjustment is interrupted with F–60, then a possibly
effective speed limit must be increased above the no–load speed.
If the adjustment was interrupted with F–60 due to voltage limiting, the
operation can be repeated with a lower task value in P–166, or the DC link
voltage can be increased to 625 V (refer to the NE module).
Note
In order to adjust the total moment of inertia, the ramp–up time P–016 and
P–042 must be set to the lowest possible value (preferably to zero).
If the speed controller requires an integral action time P–032 > 250 ms, the
total moment of inertia should be adjusted manually according to Section 4.7.
The ramp–down time P–017 and P–043 can be increased to reduce the
regenerative power in combination with an UE module.
Note
If the motor shaft rotates while the current controller is being optimized, then the
optimization point must be repeated and a speed setpoint of zero must be
entered (e.g. using terminal 81 HSS).
AM

07.94
4.1 Speed controller
Overview
Ramp–function generator
Gain, integral action time
Speed controller adaptation
Speed controller clock cycle
Total moment of inertia
Ramp–function ge-
nerator
Table 4-2 Ramp–function generator
effective
P–016.M Online 4 0.00...320.00 s Ramp–up time, ramp–function generator 1

(from n = 0 to nmax → P–174)
P–017.M Online 4 0.00...320.00 s Ramp–down time, ramp–function generator 1
(from nmax → P–174 to n = 0)
P–042.M Online 4 0.00...320.00 s Ramp–up time, ramp–function generator 2
(from n = 0 to nmax → P–174)
AM P–043.M Online 4 0.00...320.00 s Ramp–down time, ramp–function generator 2
(from nmax → P–174 to n = 0)
P–018.M Online 4 4.00...100.00 ms Initial rounding–off
Torque setpoint smoothing
Bit Value
0000H The ramp–function generator is
not tracked
0008H The ramp–function generator is
3 tracked
Speed Ramp–function Speed Ramp–function

generator output Speed
setpoint generator output
Speed
setpoint
Speed actual value Speed actual value
Time [s] Time [s]

Without ramp–function generator tracking With ramp–function generator tracking

12.94
Gain,
integral action
time
effective
P–031.M Online 4 0.0...255.9 P gain, speed controller

P–032.M Online 4 10...6000 ms Integral action time, speed controller
When calculating the controller data P–153 = –1, among other things, the speed
controller parameters are determined.
In some cases, the control behavior can still be improved
(refer to Section 4.7).
Speed controller If another speed controller P gain is required in the upper speed range, the
adaptation speed controller adaptation can be activated.
Table 4-4 Speed controller adaptation
effective
P–195.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Lower adaptation speed

AM
P–196.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Upper adaptation speed
P–197.M Online 4 0.0...255.9 dec P gain, lower adaptation speed
P–198.M Online 4 0.0...255.9 dec P gain, upper adaptation speed
P–199.M Online 4 1...150 % P gain, reduction factor
(the P gain characteristic is multiplied over the com-
plete speed range)
P–203.M Online 4 0...1 hex Select speed controller adaptation
0: No adaptation P–031 effective
1: Speed contr. adapt. active P–031 ineffective
P gain [dec]
P–197 ⋅ P–199
P–198 P–199
Speed [RPM]
0 P–195 P–196

07.94
Speed controller
clock cycle
Table 4-5 Speed controller clock cycle
Setting range
Number Change P–051 Description
effective
P–090 4 0...FFFFhex Control word

Bit Word
3 0000H Sp. ctrl. clock cycle, standard
0008H Sp. ctrl. clock cycle, fast
If bit 3 is changed, it only
becomes effective after saving
to FEPROM and power on/off.
Total moment of
inertia
Table 4-6 Total moment of inertia
effective

Sum of the motor moment of inertia + external moment
AM of inertia referred to the motor shaft
P–219.M Online 4 0...15 kgm2 Additional moment of inertia
P–159.M. It is only necessary to enter in P–219.M if
the setting range of P–159.M is exceeded
(from FW 2.00)

10.00
04.97
03.96
4.2 Current controller
Overview
Curent controller optimization
No–load motor current
Current controller
Warning
! The module can be destroyed if the current controller P gain P–115 or P–116 is
set too high.
If the inverter clock cycle frequency is increased, then the de–rating, specified
in Table 4–8 must be maintained.
Table 4-7 Current controller optimization
effective

If the clock cycle frequency is increased, the current
controller dynamic response is improved, but the
reduced due to the switching losses.
The clock cycle frequency–dependent current limit is
displayed in parameter P–049 and represents the
maximum drive converter current as a percentage
regarding the instantaneous current.
If the clock cycle frequency is changed, the current AM
controller must be re–optimized.
Inverter clock cycle frequency
0 3.2 kHz 4 2.8 kHz
1 4.7 kHz 5 3.9 kHz
2 6.3 kHz 6 5.0 kHz
3 7.8 kHz 7 5.9 kHz
(P–037) – – 2.8...7.8 kHz Displays the actual inverter clock cycle frequency
(P–049) – – 0...399 % Current limiting with de–rating

07.94
Table 4-8 Currents as a function of the inverter clock cycle frequency, IM analog fT
In / Is6 / Imax In / Is6 / Imax In / Is6 / Imax In / Is6 / Imax
module
type 6SN1123–1AA0–
6SN1123–1AA0– Code fT:3.2kHz fT:4.7kHz fT:6.3kHz fT:7.8kHz
6SN1123–1AA0– No.
8A –0HA 1 3/3/3 2.5 / 2.5 / 2.5 2/2/2 1.6 / 1.6 / 1.6

15A –0AA 2 5/5/8 4.2 / 4.2 / 6.8 3.4 / 3.4 / 5.4 2.6 / 2.6 / 4.2
25A –0BA 4 8 / 10 / 16 6.9 / 8.6 / 13.8 5.7 / 7.1 / 11.4 4.6 / 5.7 / 9.1
50A –0CA 6 24 / 32 / 32 20 / 26 / 26 15 / 20 / 20 10 / 14 / 14
80A –0DA 7 30 / 40 / 51 26 / 34 / 44 21 / 28 / 36 17 / 23 / 29
108A –0LA 13 45 / 60 / 76 39 / 52 / 65 32 / 43 / 54 26 / 34 / 43
120A –0GA 8 45 / 60 / 76 39 / 52 / 65 32 / 43 / 54 26 / 34 / 43
160A –0EA 9 60 / 80 / 102 51 / 68 / 86 41 / 54 / 69 31 / 42 / 53
200A –0FA 10 85 / 110 / 127 73 / 95 / 109 60 / 78 / 90 48 / 63 / 72
300A –0JA 11 120 / 150 / 193 101 / 127 / 163 81 / 102 / 131 62 / 78 / 101
400A –0KA 12 200 / 250 / 257 169 / 211 / 217 135 / 169 / 174 104 / 130 / 134
In / Is6 / Imax In / Is6 / Imax In / Is6 / Imax In / Is6 / Imax

module
type 6SN1123–1AA0–
AM 6SN1123–1AA0–
6SN1123–1AA0–
Code fT: 2.8kHz fT: 3.9kHz fT: 5.0kHz fT: 5.9kHz
No.
From FW 3.00
8A –0HA 1 3/3/3 2.8 / 2.8 / 2.8 2.4 / 2.4 / 2.4 2.2 / 2.2 / 2.2
15A –0AA 2 5/5/8 4.6 / 4.6 / 7.4 4.1 / 4.1 / 6.5 3.6 / 3.6 / 5.8
25A –0BA 4 8 / 10 / 16 7.5 / 9.3 / 15 6.7 / 8.3 / 13.3 6 / 7.5 / 12
50A –0CA 6 24 / 32 / 32 22 / 29 / 29 19 / 25 / 25 16 / 21 / 21
80A –0DA 7 30 / 40 / 51 28 / 37 / 48 25 / 33 / 42 22 / 30 / 38
108A –0LA 13 45 / 60 / 76 42 / 56 / 71 37 / 50 / 63 34 / 45 / 57
120A –0GA 8 45 / 60 / 76 42 / 56 / 71 37 / 50 / 63 34 / 45 / 57
160A –0EA 9 60 / 80 / 102 56 / 74 / 95 49 / 65 / 83 43 / 58 / 73
200A –0FA 10 85 / 110 / 127 79 / 103 / 119 71 / 91 / 106 63 / 82 / 95
300A –0JA 11 120 / 150 / 193 111 / 139 / 179 98 / 122 / 157 86 / 108 / 139
400A –0KA 12 200 / 250 / 257 185 / 232 / 238 163 / 203 / 209 144 / 180 / 185
P–115.M Online 4 0...255 dec P gain, controller controller, base speed range
P–116.M Online 4 0...300 dec P gain, current controller, field–weakening range
P116.M 255–(255–P115.M) P173.M

P174.M

No–load motor
current
Table 4-9 No–load motor current
effective
P–166.M Online 4 0.00...Irated LT No–load motor current

Motor rotating without any connected load
AM

4.3 Field controller
4.3 Field controller
Gain,
integral action
time
effective
P–034.M Online 4 0.0...600,0 P gain, field controller

100 A/Vs
P–035.M Online 4 5.0...600.0 ms Integral action time, field controller
When calculating the controller data P–153 = –1, among other things, the field
controller parameters are determined.
In several cases, the control behavior can be further improved (refer to
Section 4.7)
AM

4.4 Optimization, open–loop controlled range
4.4 Optimization, open–loop controlled range
Warning
! If a drive is operated for a longer period of time in the open–loop speed
controlled range, adequate motor cooling must be guaranteed, as a current is
impressed in the motor which is approximately the same as the rated current
(percentage in P–057).
Table 4-11 Optimization, open–loop controlled range
effective
P–057.M Online 4 0...150 % Current setpoint for the open–loop controlled

range
Percentage of the rated motor current
Current setpoint for the current–Hz open–loop
control
P–058.M Online 4 0...399 % Accelerating torque in the open–loop controlled
range
Percentage of the rated motor torque
P–172.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Changeover speed, open–loop/closed–loop
control
The changeover is realized with a hysteresis
of 200 RPM. AM
Note
If the maximum available drive converter current is limited in the acceleration
phase, the torque–generating component is also reduced.
In this case, the ramp–up time is shortened by reducing the current in P–057.

4.5 Limits
4.5 Limits
Table 4-12 Limits
effective
P–174.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Max. motor speed

Highest permissible motor speed
P–059.M Online 4 0...399 % Current limiting
P–060.M Online 4 0...399 % Power limiting
Percentage of the rated motor power
P–029.G Online 4 0...32000 RPM Speed limiting
Highest required motor speed
P–039.G Online 4 0...399 % 1st torque limit value
P–041.G Online 4 0...399 % 2nd torque limit value
Selected using the freely–programmable terminal
function 1.
Changeover, if the actual switching speed from Md1
to Md2 P–050 is exceeded.
P–050.G Online 4 0...32000 RPM Switching speed, from Md1 to Md2
Switching condition for the limit value changeover
AM Note
If a drive is to be operated in the overload range, the limits may only be
increased after the controller has been optimized.
The various limits are always simultaneously taken into account.
If an overload condition is to be permitted, then generally, more than one limit
has to be increased.
If the ramp–up time (acceleration time) is to be shortened, then it is practical to
also change the open–loop controlled range.

4.6 Special speeds and speed range
Overview
Steady–state minimum speed
Speed range suppression
Shutdown without reverse rotation
Steady–state
minimum speed
Table 4-13 Steady–state minimum speed
effective
P–030.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Steady–state minimum speed

No steady–state operation in the speed range
around zero.
The range is passed through with the actual ramp–
up or ramp–down times if the speed setpoint
exceeds the steady–state minimum speed in the
opposite direction of rotation.
Zero speed can only be forced by inhibiting the
permanently–connected enable signals or the
freely–programmable terminal function 16, setpoint
enable.
AM
200
Steady–state min. speed
(P–030 < 200 RPM)
200
Entered setpoint [RPM]
Steady–state min. speed

(P–030 > 200 RPM) 200

200

Speed
range
suppression
Table 4-14 Speed range suppression
effective
P–054.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Range suppression, lower speed

P–055.M Online 4 0...32000 RPM Range suppression, upper speed
No steady–state operation in the suppressed speed
range.
The range is passed through with the actual ramp–
up or ramp–down times if the speed setpoint violates
the other transition (corner) speed.
P–055 upper speed

Suppressed range
P–054 lower speed
Suppressed
range
AM
Shutdown without
reverse rotation
Table 4-15 Shutdown without reverse rotation
effective
P–022.M Online 4 2...32000 RPM Shutdown speed, pulse cancellation

Shutdown without reverse rotation
With the controller inhibited, when the shutdown
speed is fallen below, the motor is switched into a
no–current condition in order to prevent it over-
shooting when approaching zero speed.

12.94
4.7 Manual optimization
Overview
Current controller
Speed controller
Field controller
No–load motor current
Magnetizing reactance
Moment of inertia, motor and external
Motor rotor resistance
If the system has to be manually optimized, the specified signals must be
plotted using a storage oscilloscope at the appropriate test points, and the
parameters set so that the required signal characteristics and behavior are
obtained. The operation can be triggered using the first specified signals.
For several adjustments, the settling behavior after setpoint steps is evaluated
(using the ramp–up time P–016 and P–042 = 0) (step response). These can be
entered using the oscillation generator (refer to Section 2.2.3). The braking
energy can be regenerated into the line supply when an I/O module is used.
When UE modules are used, this energy is converted into heat.
The ramp–down time P–017 and P–043 can be increased to reduce the braking
power.
AM
Current controller P–115, P gain, current controller, base speed range
P–116, P gain, current controller, field–weakening range
Table 4-16 Test socket parameterization
Signal name Test point Parameterization

Address Shift factor, e. g.
Phase current IR test socket – –

Setting with the drive enabled and speed n = 0

Parameter P–115 is increased from the pre–set value until the characteristic
remains stable. If oscillations develop, reduce the value until the characteristic
stabilizes again.
Phase current Phase current Phase current
P–115 too low t [s] P–115 correct t [s] P–115 too high t [s]
Fig. 4-1 Current controller optimization, base speed range
P gain
300
Max. value
255
P–116 = 300
200
AM
P–116 = 200
P–115 = 75
75
Base speed
range Field–weakening range
Speed [RPM]
0 P–173 P–174
Fig. 4-2 Current controller optimization, field–weakening range
Above the field–weakening speed P–173, the current controller gain is linearly
increased and reaches, at the maximum speed P–174, the value of P–116; the
maximum value is 255.
If a value > 255 is entered in P–116, then the current controller gain already
reaches the maximum value at speeds < P–174.
P116.M 255–(255–P115.M) P173.M

P174.M

In some cases, the response can be further improved with a somewhat higher
value.
Table 4-17 P gain, current controller base speed range
P–115 P gain, current controller base speed range

Increase value for Decrease value for
No. Fault profile No. Fault profile
F–11 Low current controller dynamic re- F–11 Increased current ripple, whistlling
sponse noises, other related noises
Table 4-18 P gain, current controller field–weakening range
P–116 P gain, current controller field–weakening range

– Uneven running under no–load F–11 Spontaneous stalling
conditions in the upper speed
range, torque surges
AM

Speed controller P–031, P gain, speed controller

P–032, integral action time, speed controller
Table 4-19 Parameterization, test socket

Torque–generating X1 test socket P–076 = 10D2H P–077 = 0H
current
Speed actual value X2 test socket P–072 = 1110H P–073 = 4H
The enabled drive is adjusted in oscillation operation:

Enter low setpoint steps in the upper speed range using the oscillation
generator.
Using P–031 and P–032, set the required settling characteristics of the speed
actual value after the actual limiting is exited.
If different controller settings are required for various speeds, then the speed
controller adaptation can be activated (refer to Section 4.1).
Torque– Torque– Torque–

generating current generating current generating current
AM
t [ms] t [ms] t [ms]
Speed actual value Speed actual value Speed actual value
P–031 too low P–031 correct P–031 too high
Fig. 4-3 Speed controller optimization

Table 4-20 P gain, speed controller
P–031 P gain, speed controller

No Fault profile No Fault profile
. .
– Long rise time – Speed oscillations with low period
Overshoot with large period duration duration for speed steps
for speed steps
Table 4-21 Integral action time, speed controller
P–032 integral action time, speed controller

No Fault profile No Fault profile
. .
– Tendency to oscillate for elastic – Slow corrective behavior for speed
couplings with large external changes
moments of inertia
AM

Field controller P–034, P gain, field controller

P–035, integral action time, field controller

Field–generating cur- X2 test socket P–072 = 10CAH P–073 = 2H
rent
Adjustment with the drive enabled in oscillation operation

Using the oscillation generator and ramp–function generator, brake from
maximum speed down to below the changeover speed P–172 along a ramp.
Increase parameter P–034 from the calculated value, until the field–generating
current remains stable. If oscillations develop, reduce the value, or increase
P–035, until the characteristics re–stabilizes.
Check:
Setpoint steps in the field–weakening range

Increase P–034 if there is a tendency to stall (F–11).
No–load behavior over the total speed range

For uneven no–load running with torque surges up to stalling (F–11), reduce
P–034.

AM

Field–generating Field–generating Field–generating
current current current

Fig. 4-4 Field controller optimization

Table 4-23 P gain, field controller
P–034 P gain, field controller

F–11 Stalling, especially in the field– F–11 Tendency to oscillate, field–
weakening range for speed steps generating current
Speed ripple
Torque surges
Stalling under no–load conditions
P–166
no–load motor
Note
current
If the value of parameter P–166 is changed, the magnetizing reactance P–171
must be re–adjusted.

Phase current IR test socket – –
Motor current (P–007) display – –
Voltage actual value (P–010) display – –
Table 4-25 Settings
Settings with the drive enabled and de–coupled load AM

Parameter Procedure
P–172 Changeover speed, closed–loop/open–loop control
Set P–172 > P–164 ⋅ 60/p s/min Document the original value
P–057 Current setpoint for the open–loop controlled range
Set P–057 = 50 % Document the original value
Speed set- Adjust, so that
VA
point (P–005) =
(P–162/P–164) + 2π √3 ⋅ P–158 ⋅ P–161
with VA output voltage IM module
VA 400 V for VDC link = 600 V
VA 420 V for VDC link = 625 V
VA 0.8 ⋅ Vsupply for VDC link,non–controlled
Adjust, so that (P–010) = VA
P–166 No–load motor current
Set P–166 = P–161 ⋅ P–057/100 %
P–172 Changeover speed, closed–loop/open–loop control
Enter the original value
Enter the original value

P–171
magnetizing
Note
reactance
If the value of parameter P–171 is changed, then the no–load motor current
P–166 must also be re–adjusted.

Integral component, X1 test socket P–076 = 116A P–077 = 2
field controller
Adjustment with drive enabled for the field–weakening speed P–173.

Adjust the integral component, field controller to zero using parameter P–171.
Integral component, Integral component, Integral component,

field controller field controller field controller
AM 0
t [ms]
0
t [ms]
0
t [ms]
Fig. 4-5 Optimization, magnetizing reactance

12.94
P–159
moment of inertia,
motor and external
P–219
additional moment
of inertia
Parameterization
Signal name Test point
Integral component,
X2 test socket P–072 = 117CH P–073 = 2H
speed controller
Adjusting with coupled load with the drive enabled in the oscillation mode
Enter setpoint steps of n = 2 P–172 to nmax using the oscillation generator.
Adjust the integral component of the speed controller using parameter P–159 or
P–219 so that this remains at approximately zero during the acceleration phase.
AM

speed controller speed controller speed controller
Frictional torque
0 0 0
P–159 + P–219 too low P–159 + P–219 correct P–159 + P–219 too high
Fig. 4-6 Optimization, moment of inertia

P–168
motor rotor
resistance
Note
The motor rotor resistance does not have to be adjusted for motors with
deep–bar squirrel–cage rotors.

Integral component, X2 test socket P–072 = 117CH P–073 = 2H
speed controller
Adjustment with the drive enabled in the oscillation mode

Enter setpoint steps in the speed range from n = 2 P–172 to n = nmax using
the oscillation generator.
Adjust the integral component of the speed controller using parameter P–168 so
that an overshoot at the end of the acceleration phase is compensated.
AM

speed controller speed controller speed controller
Frictional torque
Fig. 4-7 Optimization, motor rotor resistance

04.97
12.94
Diagnostics and Fault Analysis 5

5.1.1 Measured value displays
Warning
! If the motor pulses are canceled, there is no longer any information about the
motor speed. The calculated speed actual value is then set to zero.
This means that none of the speed actual value displays provide any info. With
the exception of P–133, speed actual value BERO, if the speed is monitored.
Table 5-1 Measured value displays
AM
effective
(P–001) –32000...32000
– – Speed setpoint
(P–101) RPM
(P–002) –32000...32000
– – Speed actual value
(P–102) RPM
(P–003) – – –399.0...399.0 % Torque–generating current
referred to the rated motor current
(P–004) – – 0.0...100.0 % Utilization
refer to the effective limiting
(P–005) – – –1250...1250 Hz Motor frequency
(P–006) – – 0...700 V DC link voltage
realized via NE or monitoring module or via P–061
(P–007) – – –399.0...399.0 % Motor current
(P–008) – – 0.0...399.0 % Field current components
(P–009) – – 0.0...399.0 % Active power
referred to the rated motor output
(P–010) – – 0...450 Vrms Voltage actual value
(P–110) – – 0...170C Motor temperature
(P–133) – – 0...65535 RPM Speed actual value BERO
(P–037) – – 2.8 kHz...7.8 kHz Inverter clock cycle frequency

5.1.2 Status displays
P–000, P–100 Refer to Section 2.2.1

operating display
P–011
status of the
digital inputs
Table 5-2 P–011 status of the digital inputs
Display
Display
value
Term. 63 Term. E9 Term. E5 Term. E1

–
Central Freely–prog. Freely–prog. Freely–prog.
pulse enable via P–089 via P–085 via P–081
Term. 64 Term. 663 Term. E6 Term. E2

–
Central Axis–specific Freely–prog. Freely–prog.
drive enable pulse enable via P–086 via P–082
AM Term. 112
open
Term. 65 Term. E7 Term. E3
– Setting–up ope-
Axis–specific Freely–prog. Freely–prog.
ration
controller enable via P–087 via P–083
Term. R Term. 81
Term. E8 Term. E4
open
– Central fault Fast ramp–
Freely–prog. Freely–prog.
acknowledge- function
via P–088 via P–084
ment generator stop


P–254
display, active
functions 1
Display
Display
value
– Ramp–function Gearbox stage – 2nd torque limit

generator 2 bit 0
– Increase Gearbox stage – Oscillation

setpoint bit 1
Fct. No. 15 Fct. No. 11 Fct. No. 7 Fct. No. 3
Decrease Gearbox stage Ramp–up time Reset fault

–
setpoint bit 2 TH = 0 memory
(fault acknow-
ledgement)
Setpoint enable Clockwise/ – – AM

– counter–
clockwise
rotating field


07.94
P–255
display, active
functions 2
Display
Display
value

– – –
Motor selection Fixed setpoint
bit 1 bit 0

– – –
Fixed setpoint Fixed setpoint
bit 3 bit 1
Fct. No. 19
– – – –
Fixed setpoint
bit 2
Fct. No. 20
– – – –
Motor selection
AM bit 0


12.94
5.1.3 Diagnostic parameters
P–020
auto–setting
routine
Table 5-5 P–020 auto–setting routine
Display
Display
value
Automatic Automatic
optimization optimization
5 1
– – –
Adjustment, Optimization,
moment of phase current
inertia controller
Automatic Automatic
6 2
– – –
Adjustment, Adjustment,
rotor resistance power offset
Automatic Automatic
optimization optimization AM
7 3
– – –
Calculation, Adjustment, no–
speed controller load current
Automatic Automatic
8 4
– – –
Adjustment, Adjustment,
field weakening magnetizing
speed reactance


07.94
Table 5-6 Diagnostics and checksum parameter
effective
(P–028) – – 0...FFFFH Diagnostics

Bit Value
13 2000H Division interrupt
Error in the calculation routine due
to incorrectly entered data
(P–200) – – 0...FFFFH Checksum parameter
For each data save operation (P–052=1H), the
checksum is generated over the parameter contents.
This means that a change in the drive–machine data
is recognized.
5.1.4 Test sockets X1, X2, IR
Overview
Function
Technical data
Assignment
AM Normalization IR
Parameterization X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4)
Function Analog output of the phase current actual value and RAM variables for
measuring and diagnostics.
Technical data
Phase current actual value at test socket IR
2 output channels at X1 (DAU 3) and X2 (DAU 4)
Voltage range 0...+ 5 V (value 0 corresponds to +2.5 V)
Coarse normalization, offset compensation for X1 and X2 via parameter

03.96
Assignment
X1: Test socket DAU 3

X1 X2 X2: Test socket DAU 4
IR M IR: Current actual value, phase R
M: Reference ground
Fig. 5-1 Assignment, test sockets
Normalization IR
Table 5-7 Normalization IR
Power module code number (P–095) Normalization IR

1 8 A corresponds to 8.25 V
12 400 A corresponds to 8.25 V AM

Parameterization
X1 (DAU 3),
X2 (DAU 4)
Table 5-8 Parameterization X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4)
effective

output at DAU 1.
Default: 1110H calculated speed actual value,
1 V corresponds to 15000 RPM
Coarse normalization of the selected data value by
shifting the binary number to the left.
Shift to the left by 1 = multiplication by 2
max. gain: 32768
Compensation of a possibly existing offset for
DAU 3
Default: 10D2H
Torque–generating current
1 V corresponds to 1.6 Irated motor
AM Output voltage [V]

+5.0
+2.5
0.0

Shift factor = 0
Offset = 0 V Hex numerical value
Note
A list of the most important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their
addresses are listed in the Attachment (Section 6.5).

5.1.5 Minimum/maximum value memory
Function Monitoring RAM variables for minimum and maximum values.
Table 5-9 Minimum/maximum value memory
effective
P–181 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address for min/max memory

(address of the monitored RAM variable)
The value can be saved in the drive–machine data
memory.
P–179 Online 4 0...3 hex Select min/max memory
1H: Start memory function with absolute value
evaluation
2H: Start memory function with bipolar
evaluation
(P–182) – – 0...FFFF hex Minimum value, min/max memory
(P–183) – – 0...FFFF hex Maximum value, min/max memory
Note
addresses are listed in the Attachment (Section 6.5). AM

07.94
5.1.6 Transient recorder function
Function Two RAM variables are simultaneously recorded and output via test sockets X1
and X2.
Technical data
Two 16–bit signals are recorded in parallel
640 words of recording depth
1 ms sampling time (P–090, bit3=0 ) or 0.6ms (P–090, bit3=1, from FW 3.00)
Start and stop conditions (trigger conditions)
Cyclic output via DAUs
Trigger edge for output
Parameterization
effective
P–207 Online 4 0...C hex Transient recorder setting

AM Records two RAM variables over 640 ms with
1 ms sampling.
1H: Start via P–206 without start and stop condition
Start via P–206 = + 1. Stop 640 ms after
input
2H: Start condition via P–208 and P–209, no stop
condition.
Start via P–206 = +1. Stop 640 ms after start
condition.
5H: Stop condition via P–210 and P–211, no start
condition.
Start via P–205 = +1. Records for the last
640 ms before the stop condition
6H: Recording with start and stop condition,
max. 640 ms
4H: Default of the recording memory via
P–217
The parameter is reset to 0 after successful recording.
P–212 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address, signal 1

A list of the most important measured quantities
(RAM variables) and their addresses are listed in the
Attachment (Section 6.5).
P–213 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address, signal 2

effective
P–208 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address for start condition

Addresses of the RAM variables which start the
recording operation.
P–209 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Threshold for start condition
Start condition mask is compared with the RAM
variable in P–208.
P–210 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Address of the stop condition
P–211 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Threshold of the stop condition
P–206 Online 4 0...1 hex Select transient recorder
Start the transient recorder function by setting
P–206 to +1.
The parameter is reset to 0 after successful
recording.
P–215 Online 4 0...15 dec Shift factor, signal 1
Refer to the description, test sockets X1, X2
P–216 Online 4 0...15 dec Shift factor, signal 2
P–217 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Trigger signal 1
Trigger signal amplitude “low” for DAU (D/A
converter) output with 1 ms duration.
When entering various signal levels in P–217 and
P–218, an edge is output, which is then followed by
the traced signal.
P–218 Online 4 0...FFFF hex Trigger signal 2
Trigger signal amplitude “high” for DAU (D/A
converter) output with 1 ms duration.
AM
P–214 Online 4 0...1 hex Start trace output
The traced values are cyclically output at the DAU.
The output is repeated until the parameter is reset to
0.
Trace signal 1 → DAU 3 (X1)
Trace signal 2 → DAU 4 (X2)
The previous DAU assignment is buffered and is
re–set after the output function has been completed.
Note
addresses are listed in the Attachment (Section 6.5).

5.1.7 Current/Hz control
Warning
! If a drive is operated for a longer period of time in the open–loop controlled
speed range, the motor must be adequately cooled, as a current approximately
equal to the rated current is impressed (percentage in P–057).
Function Diagnostics for incorrect parameterization in the closed–loop controlled range.

The motor can be operated open–loop current/Hz controlled for test purposes.
In this case, the speed and field control (closed–loop) are ineffective.
Function The changeover speed between closed–loop control and open–loop control
information P–172 should be set high enough, so that it is not exceeded in test operation.
Above the field weakening speed (P–173), the absolute current should be set
less than the no–load current, as otherwise the voltage limiting would intervene.
This would result in uneven motor running and torque surges.
Table 5-11 Current/Hz control
effective
AM
P–057.M Online 4 0...150 % Current setpoint in the open–loop controlled
range
Current setpoint for current/Hz control
P–058.M Online 4 0...399 % Accelerating torque in the controlled range
(open–loop)
control
This changeover is made with a hysteresis of
200 RPM.

5.2 Fault analysis
5.2 Fault analysis
5.2.1 Fault display, fault acknowledgement
Fault display
Display
1 fault
Inactive
Several faults, changeover with the key
Fault message number (refer to Table 5–12)
= Fault
Fault Using the

acknowledgement P key
Press the P key with the controller inhibit present.

If the fault can be acknowledged, then the system returns to the operator
program.
AM
If the fault cannot acknowledged, e.g. there is a defect, the fault display can
be temporarily suppressed.
Remote acknowledgement
One of the following terminals is energized with the controller inhibited:
– Terminal “R” reset at the NE and monitoring module
– Terminal “Reset fault memory” (freely–programmable terminal function)
at the IM module
– Interrupt terminal “65” controller enable (only if P–053, bit 5 =1)
Powering–down
power–up again.
Fault suppression Using the

– key
The operator program is selected for approx. one minute after

–
pressing the key – however the fault is not acknowledged.

07.94
5.2 Fault analysis
5.2.2 Fault message list
Warning
! When the motor pulses are canceled, there is no information about the motor
speed. The calculated speed actual value is then set to 0.
The motor pulses can be deleted as a result of fault messages.
Fault message Fault Cause
F–04
Fault for If this message is continually repeated, the control board is defective
D/A conversion
All of the enable signals are present, but a motor is not

connected
A motor contactor has not pulled–in.
F–05 Motor current = 0 All of the enable signals are present, but at least one of the
parameters P–160, P–166, P–057, P–059 is equal to zero.
Defective DC link fuse
Interrupted DC link busbars
If the fault message repeatedly occurs during a data save operation,

then the FEPROM is defective.
Data save on the
F–07 FEPROM If the fault message occurred immediately after powering–up the
unsuccessful drive converter, the drive converter was powered–down during a data
AM save operation. This means that the last parameter changes have not
been saved. A new data save must be initiated.
F–08
Irrevocable Defective FEPROM → replace the control board
data loss
Ribbon cable, control board – gating board is defective or is not

connected
Motor is not connected or a phase is missing
Defective power supply of the gating board
Defective DC link fusing
DC link busbars interrupted
Frequency setpoint >
F–11
maximum frequency Motor stalled, as the motor or controller parameters are completely
incorrect
The IM module is connected to a monitoring module without DC link
voltage sensing, and a value was not entered in P–061 for the DC
link voltage
For the gearbox stage changeover, the speed limiting P–029 was
reduced, although the motor is rotating above this limit.
Defective motor
Motor data or controller data completely incorrect
F–13
Field controller is at Entered motor data and circuit configuration type Y/ of the motor
its limit do not match
Motor stalled, as the motor or controller data are completely incorrect

04.97
5.2 Fault analysis
Fault message Fault Cause
Motor overloaded
Motor current too high, e.g. due to incorrect motor data
Motor
F–14
overtemperature Defective temperature sensor (motor)
Defective motor fan
Winding short circuit, motor
Drive converter overloaded

(incorrect motor/converter assignment, incorrect load duty cycle,
clock cycle frequency too high)
Drive converter
Ambient temperature too high
F–15
overtemperature Fan in the IM module failed
Defective temperature sensor in the IM module
After cooling below 50 C 15 K, acknowledgement
is only possible by powering–down and powering–up again
Incorrect code number 3 in P–095 selected (for power modules

without automatic recognition)
Illegal power module
F–16
code number Incorrect code number selected in P–095 (for power modules with
automatic recognition). From FW
3.00
F–17
I0 motor > Irated power Incorrect motor/converter assignment
module
Temperature sensor Defective temperature sensor
motor
Interrupted Connection to the sensor interrupted or short–circuited
F–19
Short–circuit
AM
only KTY 84
Parameterizing error: Rated torque (calculated) from P160.M and P163.M greater than
F–51 650 Nm
Rated torque too high
From FW 2.00
Illegal ratio of P–160.M ⋅ P–164.M

Parameterizing error:
F–52 P–161.M ⋅ P–163.M ⋅ P–171.M
Illegal torque constant
From FW 2.00
Parameterizing error: Ratio between the rated motor current and rated power module current
F–53 Rated motor current too low
too low
Automatic setting routine was interrupted

Automatic setting routine did not provide any useful values
F–60
Error for the automatic Speed limiting (P–029, P–174) effective
setting routine nmax < (frated ⋅ 60 s/min)/p
/ and rated data interchanged
Other causes, refer to Section 4
Max. speed BERO Pulse number P131.M incorrectly parameterized

F–90
exceeded Interrupted cable

5.2 Fault analysis
Faults After
Power ON
Operator display inactive
– minimum of two phases missing (NE/monitoring module)
– minimum of two input fuses have failed (NE/monitoring module)
– defective electronics power supply in the NE/monitoring module
– equipment bus connection (ribbon cable) IM module ↔ NE/monitoring
module not inserted or defective
– defective IM module
– firmware not loaded
Controller enable
Motor rotates counter clockwise, although the IM module outputs a clock-
wise rotating field or vice versa
– motor rotating field incorrect as the feeder cables are interchanged
(interchange 2 phases)

AM

6 Attachments
Attachments 6
AM

6.1 Flowchart when commissioning systems
Warning
! If a fault at the NE module is acknowledged with the IM module enabled, then
the drive accelerates to nset.
Note
If the data save operation is interrupted due to power failure or power–down,
the values which have been changed are lost, and the drive converter outputs
fault message “F–07” when it is powered–up again (refer to
Section 5.2.2). The parameter values can be re–selected after fault message
“F–07” is acknowledged.
START
Before the unit is powered–up:
Check the connections according to the circuit diagram and what has
been engineered/configured.
De–energize or disconnect all of the enable signals at the NE module
(terminal 63, terminal 64) and the IM module (terminals 663, 65, 81).
Determine the power module code number from the module Order No.
[MLFB] (refer to Section 6.2)
AM
Power–up the unit
(power ON)
yes
Does the display Fault
remain dark? (refer to Section 5.2.2)
no
Is there a flashing yes Fault

“F–...” in the display? (refer to Section 5.2.2)
no
Is “P–000”
displayed no
(refer to Section
1.3)
yes
1 2

1 2
Set P–051 to 4H
Set P–097 to 0H
(start initialization)
Set P–052 to 1H
The module was already (write into the FEPROM)
commissioned. In order to
adapt it to a new motor, it Wait until P–052 is set again to 0H
must first be reset into the and them power–down the drive
initial status. converter and 1 s after the
operating display has gone dark,
power–up again.
Display, “P–095” or “P–097”
Enter or check P–095 power

module code number
Set P–097 to 1H
“SEtUP” is
displayed
Wait until the operating display

P–000 is displayed
AM
Set P–051 to 4H
no Is the IM module connected to the equip- ja

ment bus of a monitoring module without Function not possible in
DC link voltage sensing? conjunction with an
uncontrolled DC link voltage
yes
Enter a fixed DC link voltage (V) into

P–061

07.94
Enter the following parameters1)
P–158 Inductance of the series reactor (mH) A 0 must be entered into P–158 if there
P–160 Rated motor output (kW) for S1 duty2) is no reactor between the IM module
P–161 Rated motor current (A) for S1 duty2) and motor.
P–162 Rated motor voltage (V)
P–163 Rated motor speed (RPM)
P–164 Rated motor frequency (Hz) This setting data can be taken from the
P–174 Max. motor speed (RPM) rating plate according to VDE 0530
Part 1 (HA10) of the motor used.
Set P–056 motor selection to the motor

data set to be handled
no yes
Is the motor equivalent circuit
diagram data known?
Enter P–1781) power factor Enter the following parameters1)

cos ϕ 2)
P–166 No–load motor current (A)
P–167 Stator resistance (Ω)
P–168 Rotor resistance (Ω)
Calculate the equivalent P–169 Stator leakage reactance (Ω)
circuit diagram data P–170 Rotor leakage reactance (Ω)
P–171 Magnetizing reactance (Ω)
AM Set P–153 to +1H
no yes
Approximate total moment of
inertia1) known?
Enter P–1591) moment of inertia, motor and exter-

nal (gm2). If the setting value is too low, enter
P–2191) additional moment of inertia (kgm2).
Calculate the controller data

Repeat this procedure
Set P–153 to –1H for all of the modified
motor data sets
1) Setting data for up to four different motors can be entered (sub–parameters 1 to 4)

2) For force–cooled motors, refer to the instructions in Section 2.1

Set P–052 to 1H
Wait until P–052 is again set to 0H. The

entered values are transferred into the
FEPROM.
yes or
no unknown
Motor with deep–bar
squirrel–cage rotor?
Increase P–0181) initial rounding–off

(ms) to approx. 30.00 ms
no yes
Has the drive converter switching
frequency been configured for Observe the de–rating
> 3.3 kHz? (refer to Section 4.2)
Increase P–0361) drive converter

switching frequency (refer to Section
4.2.)
AM
Set P–056 motor selection to the
motor data set to be handled
Enter a speed setpoint of 0 V at

terminals 56 and 14
(display in P–001)
5 10
1) Setting data for up to four different motors can be entered (sub–parameters 1 to 4)

Status of the two center positions of the

5
“P–000” operating display after the switching
operation (refer to Section 2.2.1)
All enable signals are disconnected/

de–energized from/at the NE and IM
module.
The enable voltage is connected to

all enable signals at the NE module.
The enable voltage is connected to

the axis–specific pulse enable term.
663 is connected at the IM module.
Controller enable
Enable voltage is connected to
terminal 65 at the IM module.
Is
no terminal function 16 yes
(setpoint enable)
activated?
Remove the fast ramp–funct.
generator stop. Connect the
enable voltage to terminal 81.
AM Remove the fast ramp–function
generator stop. Connect the
enable voltage to terminal 81.
Connect the enable voltage to

the select terminal, sepoint
enable.
Slightly increase the speed setpoint.
yes Motor starts to move no

F–05
and responds to the speed setpoint refer to Section 5.2.2
F–11
Enter a speed setpoint of 0.

03.96
no yes
Max. motor speed
> 6000 RPM
Increase P–029 speed limiting to the maximum motor

setpoint speed.
Set P–051 to 10H.

(remove the special write protection)
1)
Set P–204 to 1 (set the current controller)
Set P–205 to 1 (start the automatic setting routine)
Wait until P–205 is set to 0
Set P–204 to 2 (adjust the power offset)

Set P–205 to 1 (start the automatic setting routine)
Check, if required, change P–031, P–032 speed

controller setting AM
Check, if required, change P–034, P–035 field

controller setting
Caution!
The drive rotates with the
Set P–204 to 3 (set the no–load current) no–load speed with a
Set P–205 to 1 (start the automatic setting routine) clockwise rotating field.
Note:
To optimize the no–load
current, set P–174 and P–029
to min. the rated synchronous
speed.
no yes
Is fault message F–60 or F–17 Fault (refer to Section 5.2.2)
displayed?
1) No longer necessary from FW 3.00 onwards

07.94
Caution!
Set P–204 to 4 (set the magnetizing reactance) The motor moves with the field–
Set P–205 to 1 (start the automatic setting routine) weakening speed, clockwise
rotating field.
no yes
Is fault message F–60 displayed? Fault (refer to Section 5.2.2)
Caution!
Set P–204 to 8 (set the field–weakening speed) The motor moves in the oscillation
Set P–205 to 1 (start the automatic setting routine) mode up to the maximum speed
Wait until P–205 is set to 0 with clockwise rotating field
(if required, limit).
no yes
Speed controller integral action time
P–032 > 250 ms
Manually adjust the moment of inertia
Caution!
Set P–204 to 5 (set the moment of inertia) The motor moves in the oscillation
Set P–205 to 1 (start the automatic setting routine) mode up to the maximum speed
Wait until P–205 is set to 0 with clockwise rotating field (if re-
AM quired, limit with P–029).
no
yes or unknown
Deep–bar squirrel–cage rotor?
Caution!
Set P–204 to 6 (set the rotor resistance) The motor moves in the
Set P–205 to 1 (start the automatic setting routine) oscillation mode up to the
maximum speed with
clockwise rotating field.
no yes
Is fault message F–60 displayed? Fault (refer to Section 5.2.2)
8a

8a 10
Speed controller settings yes

P–031, P–032 manually optimized
no
Set P–204 to 7
(calculation, speed controller setting P–031, P–032), set P–205
to 1 (start the automatic setting routine)
Inhibit all enable signals
Set P–051 to 4H
Repeat the procedure
for all of the modified
motor data sets
AM

Set P–056 again to 0 H
Check, and if required change the following parameters:

P–015 Offset correction nset
P–016 Ramp–up time, ramp–function generator 1

P–017 Ramp–down time, ramp–function generator 1
P–029 Max. motor speed nmaxmot
P–021 to P–023, Relay response values of the

P–027 speed monitoring
P–039 to P–043 Torque limit values

P–047
P–057 to P–058 Open–loop controlled range
P–059 to P–060 Limits
P–081 to P–089 Freely–programmable

terminal functions
P–113 to P–114 Speed setpoints
P–185 to P–194, Freely–programmable

AM P–241 to P–246 relay functions
11

11
Set P–052 to 1H.

The modified values are transferred into
the FEPROM
Check, and if required, change all of the

parameterized functions
no
Value changed?
yes
Set P–052 to 1H.

The modified values are transferred into
the FEPROM
AM
Set P–051 to 0H.

Enable write protection
After start–up, save the parameter values

in a file or document in a list
End

03.96
07.94
6.2 Power module code numbers
6.2 Power module code numbers
Table 6-1 Power module code numbers
Power Order No. Rated output Peak output Peak output Power module
module 6SN1123–1AA0– current [A] current, current, code number
type 6SN1124–1AA0– briefly briefly
6SN1140–1BA1– S6–40% 10min [A] S6–40% 10s [A] P–095
8A –0HA 3 3 3 1 FW 2.10
15 A –0AA 5 5 8 2 FW 2.10
25 A –0BA 8 10 16 4
50 A –0CA 24 32 32 6
80 A –0DA 30 40 51 7
108 A –0LA 45 60 76 13 FW 2.10
120 A –0GA 45 60 76 8
160 A –0EA 60 80 102 9
200 A –0FA 85 110 127 10
300 A –0JA 120 150 193 11 FW 2.00
400 A –0KA 200 250 257 12 FW 2.00
AM
Order No. entry

(MLFB No.)
Fig. 6-1 Position of the Order No. (MLFB No.)

03.96
6.3 Connections
6.3 Connections
Overview
Connection diagram SIMODRIVE 611 analog system
Terminals
Relay terminals
Warning
! Cable shields and cores in power cables which are not used
(e. g. brake cores) must be connected to PE potential in order to discharge
charging due to capactive coupling.
Hazardous touch voltages could occur if this is not observed.
Note: When using non-PELV circuits at terminals AS1, AS2, the connector must
be prevented from being incorrectly inserted by using the appropriate connector
coding (refer to EN60204–1, Section 6.4)
Order No. of the coding connector, refer to Catalog NC60
AM

03.96
07.94
6.3 Connections
Connecting dia-
gram SIMODRIVE
611 analog system
NE module IM module
X111 X432 X412

74 BERO input3) Motor temperature
sensor3)
Ready 73.2
signal 73.1
X1 X2
72
X121 IR M
Group signal 5.3
I2t, temperature 5.2 X421 X451
monitoring 5.1 56 A91
63 nset1 DAU 12)
Pulse enable 14 M
9 En+
9 24 A92
Drive enable En+ nset22) DAU 22)
64 8 M
19 En– X431 X441
X141 External Internal
7 P24 IF 663 289
45 P15 RF
44 N15 65 A11 Relay 11)
10 HSS 81 Relay 21)
N24 A21
15 M T. 11) E1 A31 Relay 31)
15 M T. 21) E2 A41 Relay 41)
R RESET
X161 T. 31) Relay 51)
En+ E3 A51
9
Setting–up, 112 T. 41) E4 A61 Relay 61)
contactor control 48 T. 51) E5 672
111 T. 61) Ready
Signaling contact 213 E6 673
contactor T. 71) E7 674
Fault
113
X171 T. 81) E8
NS1
NS2 T. 91) E9 AS1 Sign. contact
AM X172
AS1 Sign. contact En+ 9 AS2 start inhibit
AS2 start inhibit X411 X442
SPP 5V RS232C
interface

EXT

UNIT
VDClink>
X181 M500 >
X151
X351
X351
P500 Equipment bus
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1 DC link P 600
2W1 M 600
1W1
X131
U1 V1 W1 PE1 U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2
FN LK
L1 at
M
L2 3
L3 from NC
PE
Warning! If a power contactor is used between the motor and IM module, it must be ensured that
! this contactor is only switched when it is in a no–current condition. (When opening, first
cancel the pulses (terminal 663) and then 40 ms later, the contactor).
Fig. 6-2 Connection diagram
1) Freely–programmable inputs and outputs

2) Function not possible with Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1122–0BA11–0AA0
3) From Order No. [MLFB] 6SN112–1A0–A1

04.97
03.96
6.3 Connections
Terminals
Table 6-2 Terminals
Ter- Location Max. cross–section

Type Typ. voltage/
minal Function 1) limit values
No.
U2
V2 Motor connection O 3–ph. 0...450 V According to the Planning Guide
W2 AC

PE2 Protective conductor O 0V Stud
X151/351 Equipment bus I/O Various Ribbon cable

56 X421 Speed setpoint 1 I 10 V 1.5 mm2
14 X421 (Differential input) I (max. 11 V) 1.5 mm2
24 X421 Speed setpoint 2 I 10 V 1.5 mm2
8 X421 (Differential input) I (max. 11 V) 1.5 mm2
663 X431 Axis–specific pulse enable I +21 V...+33 V 1.5 mm2

65 X431 Controller enable I +13 V...+30 V 1.5 mm2
81 X431 Fast ramp–funct. generator stop I +13 V...+30 V 1.5 mm2
E1 X431 Freely–prog. enable terminal 12) I +13 V...+30 V 1.5 mm2
E8 X431 Freely–prog. enable terminal 82) I +13 V...+30 V 1.5 mm2 AM
94) X431 Enable voltage O +24 V 1.5 mm2
A91 X451 Analog output DAU 13) O 10 V 3 mA 1.5 mm2
M X451 Reference potential for DAU 13) O 0V 1.5 mm2
A92 X451 Analog output DAU 23) O 10 V 3 mA 1.5 mm2
M X451 Reference potential for DAU 23) O 0V 1.5 mm2
IR Test socket O 10 V 3 mA Test socket, 2 mm diameter
M Test socket O 0V Test socket, 2 mm diameter
1) I = Input O = Output
2) Can be freely programmed using operator control parameters
3) Function not possible with Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1122–0BA11–0AA0
4) Refer to Section NE 3.1... 3.2

6.3 Connections
Relay terminals
Table 6-3 Relay terminals
Ter-
Type Typ. voltage/
minal Location Function 1) Max. cross–section
limit values
No.
289 X441 Signals, center contact I 30 V/6.0 A max 1.5 mm2
A11 X441 Freely–prog. relay function 12) NO 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
672 X441 Ready/ NO 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2

673 X441 no fault I 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
674 X441 axis–specific NC 30 V/1.0 A max 1.5 mm2
AS 1 X441 Signaling contact I 250 VAC/2.9 A max 1.5 mm2

AS 2 X441 Start inhibit NC 250 VAC/2.9 A max 1.5 mm2
AM

6.4 Interfaces
6.4 Interfaces
6.4.1 X432 connector assignment for BERO

10 En+ +24V
14 BERO Signal
15 En– Ground
It is not permissible that the other pins are assigned.
6.4.2 X412 connector assignment for motor temperature sensor

PIN No. Signal name
14 +Temp
15 –Temp
It is not permissible that the other pins are assigned.
6.4.3 X411 serial interface

AM
PIN No. Signal name
2 TxD
3 RxD
5 M5
1) I = Input NC = NC contact NO = NO contact

2) Can be freely–programmed using operator control parameters

6.5 RAM variable addresses
6.5 RAM variable addresses

The following is valid for all address data: Segment address P–249 = 0H
Table 6-4 RAM variable addresses
Address Corresponds Cyclic

Variable Value
to update time
Calculated speed actual value 11B6H 7FFFH nmax Speed controller clock cycle
(amount) (P–174/P–029) as parameterized in P–090
Utilization 11B8H 7FFFH Act. torque limit
Actual torque limit 1110H 7FFFH 37499 RPM
Torque setpoint 10ECH 2000H Mdrated
Absolute current (actual value) 10C6H 2000H Imot. rated
Absolute current (setpoint) 10C4H 2000H Imot. rated
Torque–generating current (setpoint) 10D2H 2000H Imot. rated
Field–generating current (setpoint) 10CAH 2000H Imot. rated
Speed setpoint (after the ramp– 0E02H 7FFFH 37499 RPM
function generator)
Field angle (setpoint) 1140H 10000H 2π
Field angle (actual value) 1142H 10000H 2π
Active power (actual value) 1148H 2000H PS rated
Reactive power (actual value) 114AH 2000H PS rated
Integral component, speed controller 117CH 2000H Mdrated
Integral component, field controller 116AH 2000H Imot. rated
AM Magnetizing current (calculated) 10E6H 2000H Imot. rated

10.00

fields with gray background: Entry not possible
Dependent parameters/sub–parameters
No data generally–valid parameters
M motor–dependent parameters
G gearbox stage–dependent parameters
F fixed setpoint–dependent parameters
Table 6-5 Overview of the parameters (search help for the descriptions)
P– Sec. Page P– Sec. Page P– Sec. Page P– Sec. Page P– Sec. Page
000 2.2.1 22 030 4.6 63 060 4.5 62 090 1.3 11 120 – –
001 5.1.1 75 031 4.1 55 061 2.1 16 091 – – 121 – –
4.7 68
002 5.1.1 75 032 4.1 55 062 – – 092 – – 122 – –
4.7 68
003 5.1.1 75 033 – – 063 2.2.3 25 093 – – 123 – –
004 5.1.1 75 034 4.3 60 064 2.2.3 25 094 – – 124 – –
4.7 70
005 5.1.1 75 035 4.3 60 065 2.2.3 25 095 2.1 16 125 – –
4.7 70
006 5.1.1 75 036 4.2 57 066 3.3.4 49 096 2.1 16 126 – –
007 5.1.1 75 037 5.1.1 75 067 3.3.4 49 097 2.1 16 127 – –
008 5.1.1 75 038 – – 068 3.3.4 49 098 – – 128 – –
009 5.1.1 75 039 2.2.3 24 069 3.3.4 49 099 2.2.2 23 129 – –
010 5.1.1 75 040 – – 070 – – 100 2.2.1 22 130 – – AM
011 5.1.2 76 041 2.2.3 24 071 – – 101 5.1.1 75 131 2.2.3 24
012 3.3.4 49 042 4.1 54 072 5.1.4 82 102 5.1.1 75 132 2.2.3 24
013 3.3.4 49 043 4.1 54 073 5.1.4 82 103 – – 133 5.1.1 75
014 3.1 38 044 – – 074 5.1.4 82 104 – – 134 – –
015 3.1 38 045 – – 075 – – 105 – – 135 – –
016 4.1 54 046 – – 076 5.1.4 82 106 – – 136 – –
017 4.1 54 047 3.3.2 46 077 5.1.4 82 107 – – 137 – –
018 4.1 54 048 – – 078 3.3.4 49 108 – – 138 – –
019 3.1 38 049 4.2 57 079 3.3.4 49 109 – – 139 – –
020 5.1.3 79 050 4.5 62 080 5.1.4 82 110 5.1.1 75 140 – –
021 3.3.2 46 051 1.3 10 081 3.2.2 41 111 – – 141 – –
022 2.2.3 23 052 1.3 10 082 3.2.2 41 112 – – 142 – –
023 3.3.2 46 053 1.3 10 083 3.2.2 41 113 3.1 37 143 – –
024 3.1 38 054 4.6 63 084 3.2.2 41 114 3.1 38 144 – –
025 3.1 38 055 4.6 63 085 3.2.2 41 115 4.2 58 145 – –
4.7 65
026 – – 056 2.3 27 086 3.2.2 41 116 4.2 58 146 – –
4.7 65
027 3.3.2 46 057 4.4 61 087 3.2.2 41 117 – – 147 – –
028 5.1.3 80 058 4.4 61 088 3.2.2 41 118 – – 148 – –
029 2.2.3 23 059 4.5 62 089 3.2.2 41 119 3.1 38 149 – –

07.94
Table 6-5 Overview of the parameters (search help for the descriptions), continued
P– Sec. Page P– Sec. Page P– Sec. Page P– Sec. Page P– Sec. Page
150 – – 180 – – 210 5.1.6 85 240 – –
151 1.3 10 181 5.1.5 83 211 5.1.6 85 241 3.3.2 44
152 1.3 10 182 5.1.5 83 212 5.1.6 84 242 3.3.2 44
153 1.3 12 183 5.1.5 83 213 5.1.6 84 243 3.3.2 44
154 2.2.3 26 184 – – 214 5.1.6 85 244 3.3.2 44
155 2.2.3 26 185 3.3.3 47 215 5.1.6 85 245 3.3.2 44
156 2.2.3 26 186 3.3.3 47 216 5.1.6 85 246 3.3.2 44
157 2.2.3 26 187 3.3.3 47 217 5.1.6 85 247 3.3.2 46
158 2.1 17 188 3.3.3 47 218 5.1.6 85 248 – –
2.3 29
159 4.1 56 189 3.3.3 47 219 4.1 65 249 2.5 36
160 2.1 17 190 3.3.3 47 220 – – 250 2.5 36
2.3 29
161 2.1 17 191 3.3.3 47 221 – – 251 2.5 36
2.3 29
162 2.1 17 192 3.3.3 47 222 – – 252 – –
2.3 29
163 2.1 17 193 3.3.3 47 223 – – 253 – –
2.3 29
164 2.1 17 194 3.3.3 47 224 – – 254 5.1.2 77
2.3 29
165 – – 195 4.1 55 225 – – 255 5.1.2 78
166 4.2 59 196 4.1 55 226 – –
167 2.1 17 197 4.1 55 227 – –
2.3 30
AM 168 2.1
2.3
17
30
198 4.1 55 228 – –
4.7 74
169 2.1 17 199 4.1 55 229 – –
2.3 30
170 2.1 17 200 5.1.3 80 230 – –
2.3 30
171 2.1 18 201 – – 231 – –
2.3 30
4.7 72
172 2.1 18 202 – – 232 – –
2.3 30
173 2.1 18 203 4.1 55 233 – –
2.3 31
174 2.1 18 204 4 51 234 – –
2.3 29
175 2.2.3 25 205 4 51 235 – –
176 2.1 18 206 5.1.6 85 236 – –
2.3 31
177 – – 207 5.1.6 84 237 – –
178 2.1 18 208 5.1.6 85 238 – –
2.3 29
179 5.1.5 83 209 5.1.6 85 239 – –

07.94
10.00
Firm- Setting values
P No.
rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(P–000) Operating display 2.2.1 1.10 Special character – –
(P–001) Speed setpoint 5.1.1 1.10 –32000...32000 – RPM
(P–002) Speed actual value 5.1.1 1.10 –32000...32000 – RPM
(P–003) Torque–generating current 5.1.1 1.10 –399,0...399,0 – %
(P–004) Utilization 5.1.1 1.10 0,0...100,0 – %

(P–005) Motor frequency 5.1.1 1.10 –1250...1250 – Hz
(P–006) DC link voltage 5.1.1 1.10 0...700 – V
(P–007) Motor current 5.1.1 1.10 0,0...399,0 – %
(P–008) Field current component 5.1.1 1.10 0,0...399,0 – %

(P–009) Active power 5.1.1 1.10 –399,0...399,0 – %
(P–010) Voltage actual value 5.1.1 1.10 0,0...450,0 – V
(P–011) Status of the digital inputs 5.1.2 1.10 0...FFFF – hex
P–012 Normalization DAU channel 1 3.3.4 1.10 –1000,0...1000,0 100,0 %

P–013 Normalization DAU channel 2 3.3.4 1.10 –1000,0...1000,0 100,0 %
P–014 Speed for max. motor useful speed M 3.1 1.10 –32000...32000 n maxMot RPM
P–015 Offset correction, setpoint channel 1 3.1 1.10 E000...2000 0 hex
P–016 Ramp–up time, ramp–function generator 1 M 4.1 1.10 0,00...320,00 0,00 s
P–017 Ramp–down time, ramp–funct. generator 1 M 4.1 1.10 0,00...320,00 0,00 s
P–018 Initial rounding–off 4,00...100,00 0,00 ms

M 4.1 1.10
P–019 Offset correction, setpoint channel 2 3.1 1.10 E000...2000 0 hex
(P–020) Executed automatic setting routine M 5.1.3 1.10 0...00FF – hex
P–021 n min for ”n act < n min” signal G 3.3.2 1.10 2...16000 10 RPM
P–022 Shutdown speed, pulse cancellation M 2.2.3 1.10 2...16000 8 RPM
P–023 n x for ” n act < n x” signal G 3.3.2 1.10 0...32000 3000 RPM
P–024 Normalization, setpoint channel 1 3.1 1.10 2,0...10,0 10,0 V

AM/6-111
P–025 Normalization, setpoint channel 2 3.1 1.10 2,0...10,0 10,0 V

P–027 Tolerance bandwidth f.”n = n act ” signal G 3.3.2 1.10 0...32000 100 RPM
set
(P–028) Diagnostics 5.1.3 1.10 0...FFFF – hex
AM
AM
Firm– Setting value
AM/6-112

rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P–029 Speed limiting G 2.2.3 1.10 0...32000 6000 RPM
P–030 Steady–state minimum speed M 4.6 1.10 0...32000 0 RPM
P–031 P gain, speed controller M 4.1 1.10 0,0...255,9 50,0 dec
P–032 Integral action time, speed controller M 4.1 1.10 10,0...6000,0 140,0 ms
P–034 P gain, field controller M 4.3 1.10 0,0...600,0 40,0 100 A/Vs
P–035 Integral action time, field controller M 4.3 1.10 5,0...600,0 30,0 ms
P–036 Inverter clock cycle frequency M 4.2 1.10 0...7 0 hex
P–037 Actual inverter clock cycle frequency 5.1.1 3.0 2,8...7,8 – kHz
P–039 1st torque limit value G 2.2.3 1.10 0...399 100 %
P–041 2nd torque limit value G 2.2.3 1.10 0...399 50 %
P–042 Ramp–up time, ramp–function generator 2 M 4.1 1.10 0,00...320,00 5,00 s
P–043 Ramp–down time, ramp–function generator 2 M 4.1 1.10 0,00...320,00 5,00 s
P–047 M dx for ”M d < M dx” signal G 3.3.2 1.10 0,0...100,0 90,0 %

(P–049) Current limiting with de–rating 2.4 3.10 0...399 – %

P–050 Switching speed from Md1 to M d2 G 4.5 1.10 0...32000 6000 RPM
P–051 Write protection 1.3 1.10 0...7FFF 0 hex

P–052 Transfer parameter into FEPROM 1.3 1.10 0...1 0 dec
P–053 Control word 1.3 1.10 0...FFFF 1 hex

P–054 Range suppression, lower speed M 4.6 1.10 0...32000 0 RPM
P–055 Range suppression, upper speed M 4.6 1.10 0...32000 0 RPM
P–056 Motor selection 2.3 1.10 0...4 0 dec

P–057 Current setpoint f. the open–loop contr.range M 4.4 1.10 0...150 90 %
P–058 Acc. torque in the open–loop controlled range M 4.4 1.10 0...399 100 %
P–059 Current limiting M 4.5 1.10 0...399 100 %
P–060 Power limiting M 4.5 1.10 0...399 100 %
P–061 Fixed DC link voltage 2.1 1.10 0...700 0 V

P–063 Max. motor temperature (KTY84) M 2.2.3 3.00 0...170 150 deg. C
07.94
10.00
P–064 Fixed temperature 2.2.3 3.00 0...170 30 deg. C
P–065 Timer stage, motor temperature alarm 2.2.3 3.00 0...600 240 s
07.94
Firm-
10.00
Setting value
rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P–066 Address, DAU 1 3.3.4 1.10 0...FFFF 11B6 hex
P–067 Shift factor, DAU 1 3.3.4 1.10 0...F 0 hex
P–068 Address, DAU 2 3.3.4 1.10 0...FFFF 11B8 hex
P–069 Shift factor, DAU 2 3,3.4 1.10 0...F 0 hex

P–072 Address, DAU 4 5.1.4 1.10 0...FFFF 10D2 hex
P–074 Offset, DAU 4 5.1.4 1.10 –127...127 0 Incr.
P–076 Address, DAU 3 5.1.4 1.10 0...FFFF 1110 hex
P–078 Offset DAU 1 3.3.4 1.10 –127...127 0 Incr.
P–079 Offset DAU 2 3.3.4 1.10 –127...127 0 Incr.

P–080 Offset DAU 3 5.1.4 1.10 –127...127 0 Incr.
P–081 Terminal function assignment E1 3.2.2 1.10 1...21 1 dec



P–090 Control word 1.3 1.10 0...FFFF 000D hex
P–095 Power module code number 2.1 1.10 1...13 3 dec

P–096 Motor code number M 2.1 1.10 0...7 0 dec
P–097 Initialization 2.1 1.10 0...1 0 hex

AM/6-113
(P–099) Firmware release 2.2.2 1.10 0,00...99,99 – dec
(P–100) Operating display 2.2.1 1.10 Special characters – –
(P–101) Speed setpoint 5.1.1 1.10 –32000...32000 – RPM

AM
AM
AM/6-114

Firm- Setting value
P No. 7 8
rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6
(P–102) Speed actual value 5.1.1 1.10 –32000...32000 – RPM
(P–110) Motor temperature 5.1.1 3.00 0...170 deg. C
P–113 Channel selection, speed setpoint 3.1 1.10 0...9 1 dec

P–114 Fixed setpoints 1 to 7 F 3.1 1.10 –32000...32000 0 RPM
P–114 Motorized potentiometer setpoint 3.1 1.10 –32000...32000 0 RPM

P–115 P gain, current controller, base speed range M 4.2 1.10 0...255 2 dec
P–116 P gain, current controller, field–weaken. range M 4.2 1.10 0...300 2 dec
P–119 Fixed setpoints 8 to 15 F 3.1 2.00 –32000 ... 32000 0 RPM
P–131 Pulse number, speed monitoring BERO M 2.2.3 3.00 0...10 0
P–132 Shutdown threshold, speed monitoring BERO M 2.2.3 3.00 0...65535 65535 RPM
(P–133) Absolute speed actual value BERO 5.1.1 3.00 0...65535 RPM
P–151 Write protection 1.3 1.10 0...7FFF 0 hex
P–152 Transfer parameter into FEPROM 1.3 1.10 0...1 0 dec
P–153 Calculate motor data/controller data 1.3 1.10 –1...1 0 dec

P–154 Oscillation setpoint 1 2.2.3 1.10 –32000...32000 0 RPM
P–155 Oscillation setpoint 2 2.2.3 1.10 –32000...32000 0 RPM
P–156 Oscillation interval time 1 2.2.3 1.10 0,002...60,000 1,000 s

P–157 Oscillation interval time 2 2.2.3 1.10 0,002...60,000 1,000 s
P–158 Inductance, series reactor M 2.1 1.10 0,000...65,000 0,000 mH

P–159 Moment of inertia, motor and external M 4.1 1.10 0,0...6535,5 0,0 gm 2
P–160 Rated motor output M 2.1 1.10 0,00...650,00 0,00 kW

P–161 Rated motor current M 2.1 1.10 0,00...650,00 0,00 A
P–162 Rated motor voltage M 2.1 1.10 0,00...650,00 379,00 V

P–163 Rated motor speed M 2.1 1.10 0...65000 1500 RPM
P–164 Rated motor frequency M 2.1 1.10 0,0...1200,0 50,0 Hz
P–166 No–load motor current M 4.2 1.10 0,00...I rated PM 0,00 A
P–167 Stator resistance, cold M 2.1 1.10 0,000...65,000 0,000
07.94
10.00
P–168 Rotor resistance, cold M 2.1 1.10 0,000...65,000 0,000
P–169 Stator leakage reactance M 2.1 1.10 0,000...65,000 0,000

Firm-
07.94
Setting values
10.00
P No. Designation Sec. ware Setting range Default Dim. 7 8
rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6
P–170 Rotor leakage reactance M 2.1 1.10 0,000...65,000 0,000
P–171 Magnetizing reactance M 2.1 1.10 0,00...650,00 0,00
P–172 Changeover speed closed–loop/open–loop ctrl.M 2.1 1.10 0...32000 300 RPM
P–173 Speed at the start of field weakening M 2.1 1.10 0...32000 1500 RPM
P–174 Max. motor speed M 2.1 1.10 0...32000 1500 RPM
P–175 Thermal motor time constant M 2.2.3 1.10 0,0...500,0 1,0 min
P–176 Speed at the start of the stall torque M 2.1 1.10 0...65535 32767 RPM
P–178 Power factor cos M 2.1 1.10 0,000...1,000 0,800 –

P–179 Selection, min/max memory 5.1.5 1.10 0...3 0 hex
P–181 Address for min/max memory 5.1.5 1.10 0...FFFF 1110 hex
(P–182) Min. value, min/max memory 5.1.5 1.10 0...FFFF – hex

(P–183) Max. value, min/max memory 5.1.5 1.10 0...FFFF – hex
P–185 Address for monitoring 1 3.3.3 1.10 0...FFFF 1110 hex
P–186 Threshold for monitoring 1 3.3.3 1.10 0...FFFF 0 hex

P–187 Pull–in delay, monitoring 1 3.3.3 1.10 0,00...10,00 0,00 s
P–189 Hysteresis, monitoring 1 3.3.3 1.10 0...7FFF 1 hex

P–190 Address for monitoring 2 3.3.3 1.10 0...FFFF 1110 hex
P–191 Threshold for monitoring 2 3.3.3 1.10 0...FFFF 0 hex

P–192 Pull–in delay, monitoring 2 3.3.3 1.10 0,00...10,00 0 s

P–193 Drop–out delay, monitoring 2 3.3.3 1.10 0,00...10,00 0 s
P–194 Hysteresis, monitoring 2 3.3.3 1.10 0...7FFF 1 hex

P–195 Lower adaptation speed M 4.1 1.10 0...32000 0 RPM
P–196 Upper adaptation speed M 4.1 1.10 0...32000 0 RPM
P–197 P gain, lower adaptation speed M 4.1 1.10 0,0...255,9 50,0 dec
P–198 P gain, upper adaptation speed M 4.1 1.10 0,0...255,9 10,0 dec
AM/6-115
P–199 P gain, reduction factor M 4.1 1.10 1...150 100 %
(P–200) Checksum parameter 5.13 2.00 0 ... FFFF – hex

P–203 Select adaptation, speed controller M 4.1 1.10 0...1 0 dec
AM
AM
AM/6-116

Firm- Setting value
P No.
rel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P–204 Automatic optimization, function selection 4 1.10 0...7 0 dec

P–205 Start automatic optimization 4 1.10 0...1 0 dec
P–206 Select transient recorder 5.1.6 1.10 0...1 0 hex
P–207 Set transient recorder 5.1.6 1.10 0...C 0 hex
P–208 Address for start condition 5.1.6 1.10 0...FFFF 0 hex
P–209 Threshold for start condition 5.1.6 1.10 0...FFFF 0 hex
P–210 Address for stop condition 5.1.6 1.10 0...FFFF 0 hex

P–211 Threshold for stop condition 5.1.6 1.10 0...FFFF 0 hex
P–212 Address, signal 1 5.1.6 1.10 0...FFFF 1110 hex
P–213 Address, signal 2 5.1.6 1.10 0...FFFF 10D2 hex
P–214 Start output of trace record 5.1.6 1.10 0...1 0 hex
P–215 Shift factor, signal 1 5.1.6 1.10 0...15 0 dec

P–216 Shift factor, signal 2 5.1.6 1.10 0...15 0 dec
P–217 Trigger signal 1 5.1.6 1.10 0...FFFF 0 hex
P–218 Trigger signal 2 5.1.6 1.10 0...FFFF 7FFF hex

P–219 Supplementary moment of inertia M 4.1 2.00 0 ... 15 0 2
kgm
P–241 Programmable message 1 3.3.2 1.10 1...20 20 dec

P–247 Control word message 3.3.2 1.10 0...FFFF 0 hex
P–249 Segment, memory location monitor 2.5 1.10 0...FFFF 0 hex

P–250 Address, memory location monitor 2.5 1.10 0...FFFF 0 hex
(P–251) Value display, memory location monitor 2.5 1.10 0...FFFF
07.94
10.00
(P–254) Display, active functions 1 5.1.2 1.10 0...FFFF – hex
(P–255) Display, active functions 2 5.1.2 1.10 0...FFFF – hex

07.94
Customer: Machine: Date:
10.00
Initialization values and motor type
Parameters No. Value Comment
Power module code number P–095 IM module: / / A
Motor code number P–096 0 Motor type: 2p = Deep bar squirrel–cage rotor yes/no
Motor selection P–056 Motor parameter set: Changeover with/without pulse cancellation
Firmware release P–099
Motor data Rating plate
Parameters No. data Unit Comment
Rated motor output P–160 kW
Rated motor current P–161 A
Rated motor voltage P–162 V
Rated motor speed P–163 RPM
Rated motor frequency P–164 Hz
Max. motor speed P–174 RPM
Power factor cos ö P–178 dec
Circuit configuration / Jumpers in the terminal box
Equivalent circuit diagram data Calculated value Self–optimized value Post–optimized value
Parameters No. P–153 = +1 P–204 = Unit Comment
No–load motor current P–166 3 A
Stator resistance, cold P–167
Rotor resistance, cold P–168 6

Stator leakage reactance P–169
Rotor leakage reactance P–170
Magnetizing reactance P–171 4
Changeover speed, closed–loop/open–loop control P–172 RPM
Speed at the start of field weakening P–173 8 RPM
Speed at the start of stall torque P–176 8 RPM
Controller data Calculated value Self–optimized value Post–optimized value
Parameters No. P–153 = –1 P–204 = Unit Comment
P gain, speed controller P–031 7 dec

Integral action time, speed controller P–032 140 7 ms
P gain, field controller P–034 100 A/Vs
Integral action time, field controller P–035 ms
P gain, current controller, base speed range P–115 1 dec
P gain, current controller, field–weakening range P–116 1 dec
Moment of inertia, motor and external P–159 5 gm 2
Additional moment of inertia P–219 5 kgm 2
Offset, active power P–250 = (P–251) 2 hex
Offset, reactive power P–250 = (P–251) 2 hex
AM/6-117
Special settings
Parameters No. Value Unit Comment
Initial rounding–off P–018 ms
Drive converter switching frequency P–036 hex
Inductance of the series reactor P–158 mH
AM
10.00
07.94
Space for notes
AM

10.00
10.00
07.94 Induction motor modules (AM)
Index
Index Inverter clock cycle frequency, AM/4-57
L
A
Limits, AM/4-62
Analog outputs, AM/3-48
connection for analog displays, AM/3-50
parameterization DAU, AM/3-49
M
Magnetizing reactance, AM/2-18, AM/4-72
C Manual optimization, AM/4-65
Max. speed monitoring, AM/2-23
Changeover speed, AM/2-18, AM/2-21 Measured value displays, AM/5-75
Connections, AM/1-14 Minimum speed, steady–state, AM/4-63
connecting diagram, AM/6-104 Minimum/maximum value memory, AM/5-83
relay terminals, AM/6-106 Moment of inertia, AM/2-17, AM/4-56, AM/6-98
terminals, AM/6-105 Monitor function, AM/2-36
Control parameter, AM/1-10 Motor changeover, AM/2-32
Current controller, AM/4-57 Motor data set, AM/2-17
Current/Hz control, AM/5-86 Motor rotor resistance, AM/4-74
Motor rotor resistance, cold, AM/2-17
Motor temperature emulation, AM/2-25
D Motorized potentiometer, AM/3-37
Multi–motor operation, AM/2-27
DAU, AM/3-48
DC link voltage, AM/2-16
De–rating, AM/4-57
De–rating for inverter clock cycle frequencies > N
3.2 kHz, AM/4-58 No–load current, AM/4-71
Diagnostic parameters, AM/5-79 No–load motor current, AM/4-59, AM/4-71
Diagnostics, AM/5-75
Display, AM/2-22, AM/5-87 AM
Display parameters, AM/2-22
O
Open–loop controlled range, AM/4-61
F Operating display, AM/2-22
Operating mode, AM/2-22
Fault, AM/5-88 Operator and display elements, AM/1-9
acknowledgement, AM/5-87 Optimization, open–loop controlled range,
display, AM/5-87 AM/4-61
suppression, AM/5-87 Oscillation operation, AM/2-26
Fault message, AM/5-88 Output terminals, AM/3-43
Field controller, AM/4-60, AM/4-70
Field weakening range, AM/2-21
Field–weakening range, AM/4-66
Firmware release, AM/2-23 P
Fixed setpoint, AM/3-38 Parallel operation, AM/2-27
Parameter
attributes, AM/1-5
G list, AM/1-5
number, AM/1-9
Gearbox stage, AM/2-22 Parameter list, AM/6-109
Parameter set changeover, AM/2-32
Parameters
I setting range, AM/1-5, AM/1-6
sub–parameter number, AM/1-9
Initialization, AM/2-16, AM/2-21 value, AM/1-9
Input terminals, AM/3-40 write protection, AM/1-6
Interfaces, AM/6-107 Power module code number, AM/2-16

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition AM/i-1
Induction motor modules (AM) 10.00
07.94
Index
R Speed ranges, AM/4-63

Speed setpoint interfaces, AM/3-37
RAM variable, AM/6-108 channel selection, AM/3-37
RAM variable addresses, AM/6-108 setpoint priority, AM/3-39
Ramp–function generator, AM/4-54 Speed setting values, AM/2-23
tracking, AM/4-54 Standard applications, AM/1-4, AM/2-22
Rating plate, AM/1-14 setting parameters, AM/2-23
Re–initializing drive converter, AM/1-7 Standardanwendungen, AM/2-26
Relay function, AM/2-22 Start–up
permanently–connected, AM/3-43 instructions, AM/1-7
Relay functions new start–up, AM/6-92
control word, signals, AM/3-46 possibilities, AM/1-7
freely–programmable, AM/3-44 Status display
parameterizable signals, AM/3-46 active functions 1, AM/5-77
variable, AM/3-47 active functions 2, AM/5-78
Replacing components, AM/1-8 digital inputs, AM/5-76
Replacing modules, AM/1-8 Steady–state minimum speed, AM/4-63
Replacing the firmware, AM/1-7 Sub–parameter number, AM/1-9
RS232C interface, AM/1-7, AM/1-14
T
S
Terminal function
Series machines, AM/1-8 assignment, AM/3-41
Setpoint priority, AM/3-39 freely–programmable, AM/3-41
Setpoint source, AM/2-22 permanently–connected, AM/3-40
Setting and monitoring data, AM/6-109 Test sockets, AM/5-80
Setting data, AM/1-13 Torque limit value, AM/2-24
Shutdown without reverse rotation, AM/4-64 Total moment of inertia, AM/4-56
Shutdown, without reverse rotation, AM/3-40 Transient recorder function, AM/5-84
Speed controller
adaptation, AM/4-55
AM gain, AM/4-55
U
integral action time, AM/4-55
Speed controller clock cycle, AM/4-56 Unit status, AM/2-22
Speed range suppression, AM/4-64

AM/i-2 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
Spare parts (ES)
1 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES/1-3
2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES/2-5
2.1 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES/2-5
2.2 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES/2-6
2.3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES/2-6
2.4 Connecting clamps for cable shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES/2-7
ES

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition ES–i
10.00
07.94
Space for notes
ES

ES–ii SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
07.94 Spare Parts (ES)
1 Components
Components 1
All of the components available in accordance with Catalogs NC60 and NC Z
(motors, modules, control boards, cables, connectors etc.) should be ordered as
spare parts.
Order designation of the documentation:
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802S, C, D
Ordering Documentation
Catalog NC 60
Order No.: E86060–K4460–A101–A8
Order No.: E86060–K4460–A101–A8–7600 (English)
SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE & SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES

Termination System & System Components
Catalog NC Z
Order No.: E86060–K4490–A001–A7
Order No.: E86060–K4490–A001–A7–7600 (English)

ES

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition ES/1-3
Spare Parts (ES) 10.00
07.94
1 Components
Space for notes
ES

ES/1-4 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
03.96
2.1 Connectors
Accessories 2
2.1 Connectors
Customer interface The external signals are available at the individual modules at connectors with
various pins. The position and pin number of the connectors is shown in the
brief references on the modules in Attachment A.
When required, the connectors, listed in Table 2-1 (customer interfaces) can be
ordered as spare parts.
Table 2-1 Connectors
Pin No./connector type Grid pattern Order No. [MLFB]

2 5.08 6SY9433
3 5.08 6SY9906
4 5.08 6SY9432
6 5.08 6SY9896
7 5.08 6SY9898
8 5.08 6SY9897
8 1) 7.60 6SY9900
12 5.08 6SY9901
13 5.08 6SY9903
ES
15 5.08 6SY9902
Power connector,
3 pin 6SY9904
motor connection
Power connector,
3 pin 6SY9905
pulsed resistor connection
BERO connector, temperature sensor

The external radial fan is connected using a connector which comprises the
following AMP components:
Connector housing Mate–N–Lok 350766–1
Crimped contacts 926884–1
1) Only for connector X181 at line supply infeed modules

03.96
07.94
2.3 Fuses
2.2 Cables
Equipment bus cable to adapt the module configuration:
50 mm Order No. 6FC5247–0AA23–0AA0

400 mm Order No. 6SN1161–1AA00–0BA0
Note
Equipment bus cables >50 mm can only be replaced, for mechanical design
reasons, with an equipment bus cable, length 400 mm.
2.3 Fuses
Refer to the Planning Guide for recommended line supply fuses.
References SIMODRIVE 611–A/611–D

Planning Guide Drive Converter (08.98 Edition)
Transistor PWM Converters for AC Feed Drives and
AC Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197–0AA00–0BP4
ES

10.00
03.96
2.4 Connecting clamps for cable shields
Shield plate
Shield connecting rail
Hose clamp for X Order No.
shield 6SN1162–0FA00–0AA0
Fig. 2-1 Cable clamps for cable shields
The cable clamps are defined corresponding to the outer cable shield diameter.
A list of possible hose clamps to connect cable shields is provided below.
Table 2-2 Hose clamps for the shield
Cable cross section Hose clamp for shield

4x 1.5 mm2 Hose clamp DIN 3017–AL–8–16 W1–1
4x 1.5 mm2 + 2 x 1 mm2 ES
4 x 2.5 mm2 + 2x1 mm2 Hose clamp DIN 3017–AL–8–16 W1–1
4 x 4 mm2 Hose clamp DIN 3017–AL–12–20 W1–1
4 x 4 mm2 + 2 x 1 mm2
4 x 6 mm2 + 2 x 1 mm2
4 x 10 mm2 + 2 x 1 mm2
4 x 16 mm2 + 2 x 1 mm2
4 x 25 mm2 + 2 x 1.5 mm2 Hose clamp DIN 3017–AS–25–40 W1–1

03.96
07.94
Space for notes
ES

Setting elements FD and NE Line feed module (NE)
DIL switch S1
DIL switch S1 (supply infeed):
Ready relay 74
ON: OFF:
Ready Pulls–in if there is no fault
VDClink = 625 V1) 1 VDClink = 600 V1)
signal and enable signals 63 and 73.2
Fault signal 2 Ready signal 64 are present 73.1
Regen. feedback off1) 3 Reg. feedback possible1)
Fault si- Pulls–in if there is no fault
Vsupply=480V +6% / –10% 4 Refer to S1.1 gnal 72
Contr. supply inhibited 5 Controlled infeed free2)
Sine current control 6 Squarewave current ctrl. Ɩ 5.3
Relay, group signal for I2t monitoring
5.2
and/or motor overtemperature
5.1
DIL switch (feed module):
Pulse enable 63
10x DIL switch S2: = OFF = ON +24 V 9
+24 V 9 Short Reference Guide
1 Direction of rotation reversal Drive enable 64
Reference ground for all enable signals
for SIMODRIVE 611 analog System
19
Current limit Imax/Ilimit as a % (not connected to ground, terminal 15 ) – Feed module
2 – Rectifier module
P24 +24 V/50 mA 7
3
P15 +15 V/10 mA 45
4
N15 –15 V/10 mA 44
5 –24 V/50 mA 10
N24
100 85 68 61 50 46 41 39 36 34 30 29 26 24 23 15
General reference ground
Example:Feed module 25 A/50 A 15
continuous possible current: Irated = 25 A RESET by connecting with terminal 15 R
brief possible current: Ilimit = 50 A (edge change, high low)
+24 V 9
contacts: 2 = ON, 3 = ON å 61 %
Setting–up operation, if not jumpered 112
selected current limits: Imax = 30.5 A
Start 48
Gain of the current controller Kp(I) 111
213
6 Internal line contactor closed 113
7
8
9
Coil contact, NS1 Associated documentation:
internal line contactor NS2
0.5 1 2 2.5 4 4.5 5.5 6 6.5 7.5 8 9.5 11 11.5 Planning Guide 6SN1197–0AA00–0BPV
Start–up Guide 6SN1197–0AA60–0BPV
OFF: closed–loop speed controlled operation Signaling contact, start inhibit AS1
10 (safe operating stop) AS2
ON: closed–loop current controlled operation
Standard interface: Fault signals:
Setpoint via term. 56 and term. 14
15 V voltage level 5 V voltage level
User–friendly interface: faulted red red faulted
Setpoint via term. 24 and term. 20
Ext. enable sig., term. green yellow Unit
ready, DC link
63 or term. 64 missing pre–charged
1) Only for I/R module DC link overvoltage

Line fault red red
 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved Ausgabe 10.00
User–friendly interface Feed module (FD) with main spindle option Standard interface
Fault messages for feed module with user–friendly interface:
X311 X311 X313 2)
Tach. Signal,
Tach. 102 TH 1:10 Parameter board not inserted
ramp–fun.gen.
Signal cable Rotor position
Rot. pos. encoder 61 C axis Enable term.663 and/or term.65 missing Motor
from the
motor 75 nact PTC resistor encoder
PTC resistor
162 Pact/Iact Module is ready
Speed setpoint nset 56 I2t monitoring, heatsink overtemperature AS1

(Differential input "10 V) 14
110 Iact > Ix Signal contact, start inhibit
Rotor position encoder monitoring AS2
108 663
AS1 Pulse enable
Signaling relay, start inhibit 115 nact < nmin Motor overtemperature
AS2 9 +24 V
114 2)
Pulse enable 663 Tachometer monitoring 56 56
216 nact < nx Speed setpoint nset
+24 V 9 14 14
214 Speed controller at its endstop I2t
Controller enable 65 nact = nset 65 65 Controller enable
127
+24 V 9 Speed controller at its endstop Iact=Iset 9 9 +24 V
126
Select, fixed setpoint 11) 22 22 22 Selection, curr. controlled
Select, fixed setpoint 2 Drift Speed controller at its endstop and Iact = 0
23 9 9 +24 V
Suppl. speed/current setpoint 20 Kp 5 Volt undervoltage
(differential input "10 V) 24 TN
Travel to fixed endstop noff Drift
96
Option board, main spindle functions Tach.
N15 –15 V/10 mA 44
Parameter board Kp
Integrator inhibit 6
TN
Current setpoint, master/slave 258 Drift adjustment: AD
Current actual value Iact 16 Drift
Short–circuit terminals 56 and 14: The motor should not rotate 2)
Signaling relay: 289 Drift
Speed controller 288 Tach. adjustment: Tach.
at its endstop 290 T Normally: The motor reaches nrated at nset = 9 V at term.56/14. Kp
291 max. TN
I2t monitoring
293 Kp Proportional gain Kp and integral action time TN: AD
294 Rotating clockwise increases the controller dynamic response.
Motor overtemperature max.
296 Optimization:
TN Fault messages:
Tach. and rotor position 297
nact 20...40 % corresponds to fault:
monitoring 299 min.
672 AD corresponds to fault:
Ready relay
673
(or fault signal relay) approx. 0.05 nrated 2)
674
t
Test sockets for FD module with user–friendly interface:
ton = 5...10 ms
Test sockets:
Speed actual value
Speed setpoint:
"10 V nrated nact nset Adaptation TN: Iact W T Iset
From term. 56 and 14
of the motor
X R Improves the dynamic response at low speeds. Acti- Ground M X nact
Current act. value: Current setpoint: vated by R34
"10 V Imax Iact W T Iset "10 V Imax
(refer to DIL switch) M NZ (refer to the DIL switch)
Reference ground A suppl. speed setpoint

for test sockets can be entered here
2) Only for two–axis version
1) optional, to change over closed–loop current controlled operation
Setting elements, closed–loop resolver control
= OFF Monitoring logic
= ON Axis 1: DIL switch S5 / contacts 1, 2, 5, 6, 7
Axis 2: DIL switch S5 / contacts 3, 4, 5, 6, 8
Current controller Contacts
ON: OFF:
Axis 2: DIL switch S6 Inhibit integrator n controller 1/3 Integrator n contr. active
Inhibit integrator I contr. 2) 2/4 Integrator I contr. active 2)
Current actual value normalization a/b components [%]
Fault message 5 Ready signal
Contacts Master/slave operation 6 Standard operation
1+2 a/b components
300 ms monitoring, T. 65 7/8 1 s monitoring, T. 65
100 70
Contacts Current controller gain, Q/D axis Position processing

3+7 Axis 2: DIL switch S2
4+8 Short Reference Guide
5+9 Angular incremental encoder interface for SIMODRIVE 611 analog System
6+10
ON: Contacts OFF: – Feed module, closed–loop resolver control
1 2 3 4 5 6 7.5 8.5 9.5 10.5 11.5 12.5 13.5 14.5 16 NC 5 NC
Phase seq., A in front of B 6 Phase seq., B in front of A 1)
1024 pulses/revolution 7 512 pulses/revolution
Current setpoint limiting [%]
Axis 1: DIL switch S12 / contacts 1–4
Axis 2: DIL switch S12 / contacts 5–8 Pole numbers
Contacts Current setpoint limiting Contacts Motor Contacts Resolver

1/5 1 3
2/6 2 4
3/7 2p= 2 4 6 8 2p= 2 4 6 8
4/8
100 75 55 45 25 20 5
Zero offset [mechanical]

Axis 1: DIL switch S1 / contact 8
DIL switch S11 / contacts 1–5
Speed actual value normalization [RPM]
Axis 2: DIL switch S2 / contact 8
DIL switch S11 / contacts 6–10
Total offset = S subsequent partial angle Associated documentation:
Contacts Speed actual value normalization
Contacts Partial angle Planning Guide 6SN1197–0AA00–0BPV
1/5
S 1/2: 8 Start–up guide 6SN1197–0AA60–0BPV
2/6
3/7 S 11: 1/6
2/7
4/8
3/8
2000 3000 3000 6000
4/9
5/10
These normalization settings are valid for standard re-
0 5.625 11.25 22.25 45 90 180
solver pole number 2p = 2.
Normalization settings for special pole numbers
2p = 4, 6, 8 on request.
1) For clockwise rotation  Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved Ausgabe 10.00
2) Only effective when selecting terminal 22
Speed controller optimization Standard interface, resolver control Terminal function
Ang. encod. interf., Ang. enc. interf.,

axis 1 (X391) axis 2 (X392)
Motor encoder, Motor encoder,

axis 1 (X311) axis 2 (X312)
Drift adjustment:
Short–circuit terminal 56 with terminal 14 and terminal 24
with terminal 20: It is not permissible that the motor rotates Drift
Tach.
Kp Axis 1
Tachometer adjustment:
TN Setpoints:
General: The motor reaches nrated f. nset = 9 V at T. 56/14
Speed setpoint nset
(differential input 10 V)
Proportional gain Kp and integral action time TN: Axis 2 Supplementary speed setpoint/current setpoint
Rotating clockwise increases the controller dynamic perfor- (Differential input 10 V)
mance. Optimization: changeover with terminal 22
nact 20...40 % 56.1 56.2
Actual values:
14.1 14.2
24.1 24.2 Speed actual value; 10 V corresponds to nrated
approx. 0.05 nrated Reference ground
20.1 20.2
75.1 75.2 Current actual value; 10 V corresponds to Imax
t
15 15
ton = 5...10 ms
16.1 16.2 Terminal function:
96.1 96.2 Select “Travel to fixed endstop”
9 9 +24 V
Module–specific enable: 22.1 22.2 Select “Closed–loop current controlled operation”
9 9
Pulse enable Axis–specific enable signals:
663 65.1
+24 V
AS1 9
Checkback signal contact, start inhibit Controller enable, axis 1
AS2 65.2
+24 V
Controller enable, axis 2
Terminal assignment for

Ready/fault signal 1–axis version
56.1 9 +24 V
Current setpoint input, terminal 24/termi-
nal 20 of the slave axis with terminal 22 14.1 65.1 Controller enable, axis 1
1)
selected (closed–loop current controlled 24.1 15 Reference voltage (ground) for slave, terminal 20
operation) 20.1 258 Current setpoint for slave, terminal 24
1) Connection is dependent on the required slave axis torque direction

Drive converter interfaces Fault analysis
Terminal function Fct.No. Input Fault

Fault
terminal 1) signal
2nd torque limit value 1 E1 (P–081) F–07 Data save on FEPROM was not successful
Oscillation 2 E6 (P–086) F–08 Irretrievable data loss
Reset fault memory (R) 3 E3 (P–083) F–09 Error, encoder system 1 (motor encoder)
Open–loop torque controlled operation 4 E5 (P–085) F–10 Error, encoder system 2 (spindle encoder)
Star/delta operation 5 – F–11 Speed controller is at its limit, speed actual value missing
M19 operation 6 E4 (P–084) F–14 Overtemperature, motor
Ramp–up time=0 7 E2 (P–082) F–15 Overtemperature, drive converter
Integrator inhibit, speed controller 8 – F–16 Illegal power module code number
Gearbox stage bit 0 9 E7 (P–087) F–17 I0 motor > Irated power module
Gearbox stage bit 1 10 E8 (P–088) F–19 Temperature sensor (interrupted, short–circuit)
Gearbox stage bit 2 11 E9 (P–089) F–61 Max. motor frequency exceeded
Setpoint enable 16 – F–79 Division interrupt Short Reference Guide
Incremental positioning 22 – FP–01 Setpoint (reference value) > encoder pulse number for SIMODRIVE 611 analog System
Position reference values 1...2 23 – FP–02 Zero mark monitoring has responded
C axis 24 – – Main spindle module
FP–03 Zero mark offset > encoder pulse number
Speed setpoint smoothing 25 – FP–04 No valid zero mark
Suppress F–11 26 –
Position reference values 3...4 27 – Faults
after power ON Operating display inactive
Positioning on 28 –
– min. two phases missing (NE module)
Spindle re–synchronization 29 – – min. two input fuses have failed
HPC axis 30 – (NE module)
Slip monitoring 32 – – defective electronics power supply in the NE module
– equipment bus connection, MSD module ³ NE mod-
ule not inserted or defective
– defective MSD module
Relay function Fct.No. Relay 1) – firmware not loaded
output
Controller Motor rotates max. 30 RPM at nset > 30 RPM or motor oscil-
Ramp–up completed 2 A11 (P–241) enable lates for nset < 30 RPM
|Md| < Mdx 3 A21 (P–242) – incorrect motor rotating field, as the feeder cable is
|nact| < nmin 1 A31 (P–243) interchanged (interchange 2 phases)
|n act| < nx 4 A41 (P–244) – excessive motor encoder pulse number entered
Motor overtemperature, pre–alarm 5 A51 (P–245) Motor stationary for a speed setpoint not equal to zero
– oscillation function has been selected
Associated documentation:
Drive converter overtemp., pre–alarm 6 –
Variable relay function 1 7 A61 (P–246) Planning Guide 6SN1197–0AA00–0APV
Fault acknowledgement Start–up Guide 6SN1197–0AA60–0APV
Variable relay function 2 8 –
Parameter key The parameter key is pressed with controller inhibit
In position 1 9 – present. If the fault/error can be acknowledged, the
In position 2 10 – system returns to the operator program.
Relay, star operation 11 – Remote One of the following terminals is energized with
Relay, delta operation 12 – acknowledgement the controller inhibited:
nact = nset (actual) 20 – – terminal “R” at the NE or monitoring module
– terminal “Reset fault memory” at the MSD module
Powering–down Power–down the unit and approx. 2 s after the dis-
play goes dark, power–up again
Changing–over into After pressing the – key, the operator

1) As supplied  Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved Ausgabe 10.00
the operator inter- program is returned to for approx. 1 minute; howe-
face ver, the fault/error is not acknowledged.
First steps System configuration Drive converter interfaces
Operator and display elements Operating display Connections
<< – X432 Spindle encoder, Bero or X412 Motor enco-

P + P >> encoder output at NC der RON
< – + > 350
Parameter number Inactive Relay func- Operating Equipment Operating Gearbox
tion mode status mode stage Test sockets
DAU 3 X1 X2 DAU 4
IR M
T. A11 Wait sta- Enable mis- Star Gearbox
– P + P–241 tus sing at NE– circuit 2) stage 1
m. X421 56 X451 A91
nset1 DAU 1
+ 14 M
– Cl.–loop A92
T. A21 Axis–specific Delta Gearbox 24
P–242
speed
pulse enable circuit 2) stage 2
nset2 DAU 2
contr. op. 8 M
Sub–parameter number missing
P Inputs Outputs
P
Torque–con- X431 663 IF X441 289
T. A31 trolled op. Contr. Digit. Gearbox 65 RF A11 nact = nset1)
P–243 enable filter 2) stage 3
missing 81 HSS A21 Md < Mdx1)
E1 2nd Md limit value1) A31 nact < nmin1)
Parameter value < – + > Torque–contr. E2 TH = 01) A41 nact < nx1)
T. A41 op. w/slip monit. RFG ena- Position 1 3) Gearbox
P–244 ble mis- stage 4 E3 RESET1) A51 Motor overtemperature1)
<< – P + P >> sing E4 M191) A61 Conv. overtemperature1)
E5 Md controlled1) 672
E6 Oscillation1) 673 Ready/fault
T. A51 M19 Setpoint Pos. 2 3) Gearbox
P–245 enable stage 5 E7 G. box stage, bit 01) 674
3) Display in P–100: Only for the spindle positioning mode
Start–up information
4) Display of the torque direction with the motor enabled
missing
E8 G. box stage, bit 11)
E9 G. box stage, bit 21) AS1 Signaling contact
2) Display in P–100: Only for the star/delta mode
Positioniong
Start–up possi- using the 9 Enable voltage AS2 Start inhibit
T. A61 Motoring 4) Pos. 3 3) Gearbox
bilities D Operator control and display element P–246 stage 6
D RS232C interface with an X411 RS232C
IBM/AT–compatible computer C axis interface
Re–initialize D Set P–051 to 4H T. 672/674 Regenerating 4) Pos. 4 3) Gearbox

drive converter D Set P–097 to 0H P–053 stage 7
(if necessary) D Set P–052 to 1H and wait until P–052 HPC axis LCD display
resets itself to 0H 0.5 ms
D Power–down the unit and approx. 2 s after the ( 0.6 ms)
+ P -
display has gone dark, power–up the unit Incr. Pos. 3) Gearbox
again: stage 8
P–095 must be re–displayed X151 Equipment bus X351
Curr./Hz–contr.op.
D Initialize
Replace firmware D Save the setting data (parameters) Firmware version and module expansion
(if required) D Replace the firmware using the start–up P 600
Number Display Description DC link
program
range M 600
D Initialize with the pulses and controller
inhibited (P–099) 0.00 ... 99.00 Firmware release Rating plate
D The saved setting data are re–loaded (P–150) – Board ID
D Save the setting data in the drive–machine Product release
data memory Version coding: U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2
F00H Basic version
200H With additional input for spindle encoder
Motor terminals
300H With output pulse encoder signals for external use
1) Freely–programmable terminals and relay functions when supplied
Drive converter interfaces Fault analysis
Input Fault
Terminal function Fct.No. Fault
terminal 1) message
2nd torque limit 1 E1 (P–081) F–04 Fault, D/A conversion
Oscillation 2 – F–05 Motor current = 0
Reset fault memory (R) F–07 Data save on FEPROM not successful
3 E3 (P–083)
(fault acknowledgement) F–08 Irretrievable data loss
Ramp–up time=0 7 E2 (P–082) F–11 Frequency setpoint > max. frequency
Gearbox stage bit 0 9 E7 (P–087) F–13 Field controller is at its max
bit 1 10 E8 (P–088) F–14 Overtemperature, motor
bit 2 11 E9 (P–089) F–15 Overtemperature, drive converter
Clockwise/counter–clockwise 12 – F–16 Illegal power module code number
Ramp–function generator 2 13 – F–17 I0 motor > Irated power module
Increase setpoint 14 – F–19 Temperature sensor, motor
Decrease setpoint 15 – F–51 Parameterizing error: Rated torque too high
F–52 Parameterizing error: Torque constant illegal
Short Reference Guide
Setpoint enable 16 –
Fixed setpoint selection bit 0 17 E4 (P–084) F–53 Parameterizing error: Rated motor current too low for SIMODRIVE 611 analog System
bit 1 18 E5 (P–085) F–60 Error for the automatic setting routine – Induction motor module
F–90 Max. speed BERO exceeded
bit 2 19 E6 (P–086)
bit 3 24 –
Faults
Motor selection bit 0 20 –
after power ON Operating display inactive
bit 1 21 –
– min. two phases missing (NE module)
– min. two input fuses have blown (NE module)
– defective electronics power supply in the
NE module
– Equipment bus connection, IM module ! NE
module not inserted or defective
– defective IM module
– defectiveEPROM/FEPROM
Relay function Fct.No. Relay 1) – firmware not loaded
output
|nact| < nmin 1 A31 (P–243) Controller enable Motor rotates counter–clockwise although the IM
Ramp–up completed 2 A61 (P–246) module outputs a clockwise rot. field or vice versa
|Md| < Mdx 3 A21 (P–242) – incorrect motor rotating field, as the feeder
|n act| < nx 4 A41 (P–244) cable is interchanged, (interch. 2 ph. conn.)
I2t pre–alarm 5 A51 (P–245) Fault acknowledgement Associated documentation:
Drive converter overtemp. pre–alarm 6 – Parameter key The parameter key is pressed with controller inhibit
Variable relay function 1 7 – present. If the fault/error can be acknowledged, the Planning Guide 6SN1197–0AA00–0BPV
Variable relay function 2 8 – system returns to the operator program. Start–up Guide 6SN1197–0AA60–0BPV
Remote ack- One of the following terminals is energized with
nowledgment the controller inhibited:
Motor 3 active 13 – – terminal “R” at the NE or monitoring module
Motor 4 active 14 – – terminal “Reset fault memory” at the MSD module
nact=nset 20 A11 (P–241)
Powering–down Power–down the unit and approx. 2 s after the dis-
play goes dark, power–up again
Changing–over into After pressing the – key, the operator

the operator inter- program is returned to for approx. 1 minute; howe-
face ver, the fault/error is not acknowledged.  Siemens AG 2000
1) As supplied All Rights Reserved Ausgabe 10.00
First steps System configuration Drive converter interfaces
Operator and display elements Operating display Connections
<< – P + P >> X432 Input X412

BERO3)
< – + >
Parameter number Motor Relay func- Operating mode Equipment Setpoint Gearbox
number tion status source stages Test sockets
Input
DAU 3 X1 X2 DAU 4 temperature
sensor motor3)
IR M
Motor 1 T. A11 Wait status Enable mis- Analog Gearbox
– P + P–241 sing at NE– setpoint stage 1
m. X421 56 X451 A91
n1 DAU 12)
+ 14 M
– T. A21 Axis–specific Analog set- Gearbox 24 A92
Motor 2
P–242
Open–loop
pulse enable point and fi- stage 2 n22) DAU 22)
speed con- 8 M
Sub–parameter number trolled or missing xed setpoint
P Inputs Outputs
P speed–con-
trolled
operation X431 663 IF X441 289 Mess., center contact
Motor 3 T. A31 Contr. Setpoint 0 Gearbox 65 RF A11 nact = nset1)
P–243 enable stage 3
missing 81 HSS A21 |Md| < Mdx1)
E1 2nd Md limit value1) A31 |nact| < nmin1)
Parameter value < – + >
E2 TH = 01) A41 |nact| < nx1)
T. A41 RFG ena- Fixed setpo- Gearbox
Motor 4
P–244 ble mis- ints 1 to 7 stage 4 E3 RESET1) A51 I2t pre–alarm1)
<< – P + P >> sing E4 Fixed setpoint, bit 01) A61 Ramp–up completed1)
E5 Fixed setpoint, bit 11) 672
E6 673 Ready/fault
T. A51 Setpoint Fixed setpo- Gearbox Fixed setpoint, bit 21)
P–245 enable ints 8 to 15 stage 5 E7 Gearbox stage, bit 01) 674
Start–up information missing
E8 Gearbox stage, bit 11)
E9 Gearbox stage, bit 21) AS1 Signaling contact
Start–up possi- using 9 Enable voltage AS2 Start inhibit
T. A61 Gearbox
bilities D Operator control and display elements P–246
Motoring 1) Mot. pot.
stage 6
D RS232C interface with an X411 RS232C
IBM/AT–compatible computer interface
Re–initialize D Set P–051 to 4H T. 672/674 Gearbox
Regenerating 1) Oscillation
drive converter D Set P–097 to 0H P–053 generator stage 7
(if necessary) D Set P–052 to 1H and wait until P–052 LCD display
resets itself to 0H
D Power–down the unit and approx. 2 s after the 1)
+ P –
display has gone dark, power–up the unit Torque direction display
Aut. optimi- Gearbox
again: with the motor enabled zation stage 8
P–095 must be re–displayed
D Initialize
Replace firmware D Save the setting data (parameters) P 600
(if required) D Replace the firmware using the start–up Firmware version and module expansion DC link
program M 600
Number Display Description
D Initialize with the pulses and controller range
inhibited Rating plate
(P–099) 0.00 ... 99.00 Firmware release Product release
D The saved setting data is re–loaded
D Save the setting data in the drive–machine U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2
data memory Motor terminals
1) Freely–programmable terminals and relay functions as supplied
2) Function not possible for Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1122–0BA11–0AA0
3) Only for Order No. [MLFB] 6SN1122–0BA11–0AA1, otherwise assignment is
not permissible
10.00
07.94 Overall Index
Current controller, HS/4-75, AM/4-57

Overall Index Current controller gain, VS/1-5, VR/1-5
Current controller settings, VS/1-4, VR/1-5
Current de–rating for inverter clock cycle
frequencies > 3.2 kHz, HS/1-11
A Current setpoint limiting, VR/3-15
Accessories, ES/2-5 Current/Hz control, AM/5-86
Actual value normalization, VS/1-4
Adaptation tables, VS/1-5, VR/1-5
Address, RAM variable, HS/6-112 D
Analog output
fine normalization, HS/3-68 DAU, HS/3-67, AM/3-48
M/Mrated display, HS/3-68 DC link voltage, AM/2-16
nact display, HS/3-68 De–rating, AM/4-57
P/Pmax display, HS/3-68 De–rating for inverter clock cycle frequencies >
parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2, HS/3-67 3.2 kHz, AM/4-58
Analog outputs, AM/3-48 Diagnostic parameters, HS/5-81, AM/5-79
connection for analog displays, AM/3-50 Diagnostics, VS/8-47, VR/8-27, HS/5-77, AM/5-75
parameterization DAU, AM/3-49 Display, HS/2-25, HS/5-87, AM/2-22, AM/5-87
Display elements, on the monitoring and NE
modules, NE/2-7
Display parameter, HS/2-25
B Display parameters, HS/5-77, AM/2-22
Bit, HS/1-6 Drift compensation, VS/2-23, VR/2-14
Built–in motors, HS/6-102
E
C Electronic weight equalization, VS/3-30, VS/3-32,
C axis, HS/2-25, HS/2-31, HS/3-59 VR/3-17
C–axis operation, VS/5-39 Encoder phase error correction, HS/2-27
Cables, ES/2-6 Equipment bus cable, ES/2-6
Changeover parameter for C–axis operation,
VS/5-39
Changeover speed, AM/2-18, AM/2-21 F
Code numbers for power modules and standard
motors, HS/6-99 Fault, HS/5-92, AM/5-88
Commissioning acknowledgement, HS/5-87, AM/5-87
Commissioning stages, VS/1-3 display, HS/5-87, AM/5-87
Short commissioning, VS/1-3 suppression, HS/5-87, AM/5-87
Standard commissioning, VS/1-3 Fault display, VS/8-48
with the MSD option, VS/5-35 Fault message, VR/3-16, AM/5-88
Component side, VR/3-16, VR/9-30 Field controller, AM/4-60, AM/4-70
Connection overview Field weakening range, AM/2-21
connection diagram, HS/6-104 Field–weakening range, AM/4-66
relay terminals, HS/6-106 Filter, HS/4-74
star/delta changeover, HS/6-107 Firmware release, AM/2-23
terminals, HS/6-105 Firmware version, HS/2-26
Connections, HS/1-13, AM/1-14 Fixed setpoint, AM/3-38
connecting diagram, AM/6-104 Flux adaptation, HS/2-52
relay terminals, AM/6-106 Functions via fixed values, VS/5-38
terminals, AM/6-105
Connector assignment, VR/9-33
for Bero, HS/6-109 G
motor encoder signal output, HS/6-110
spindle encoder, HS/6-109 Gain Kp, VR/2-13
Connectors, ES/2-5 Gain Kp with adaptation, VS/2-22
Control parameter, AM/1-10 Gearbox stage, HS/2-25, AM/2-22
Current actual value normalization, VR/1-5

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition Index-1
Overall Index 10.00
07.94
H Mode of operation
master speed controlled, VR/3-16, VR/3-18
Hexadecimal numbers, HS/1-6 slave current controlled, VR/3-16, VR/3-17,
VR/3-18
Motion of operation, Master speed controlled,
I VR/3-17
Module ID, HS/2-26
I–component limiting, VS/2-23 Moment of inertia, AM/2-17, AM/4-56, AM/6-98
I2t limiting (from FW 3.1), HS/2-54 Monitor function, AM/2-36
Initialization, AM/2-16, AM/2-21 Motor changeover, AM/2-32
special motors, HS/2-17 Motor code number, HS/6-99
standard motors, HS/2-15 Motor data set, HS/2-18, HS/2-22, AM/2-17
star/delta motors, HS/2-21 Motor rotor resistance, AM/4-74
Input terminals, HS/3-58, AM/3-40 Motor rotor resistance, cold, AM/2-17
Integral action time limiting, VR/3-16, VR/3-18 Motor temperature emulation, AM/2-25
Integral action time with adaptation, VS/2-21 Motor temperature monitoring, HS/2-29
Integral action time/Speed controller, VR/2-14 Motorized potentiometer, AM/3-37
Integrator inhibit, VR/3-16 MSD option board, VS/9-53
Interfaces, AM/6-107 Multi–motor operation, AM/2-27
Inverter clock cycle frequency, HS/4-76, AM/4-57
Inverter clock frequency, HS/3-59
N
K No–load current, AM/4-71
No–load motor current, AM/4-59, AM/4-71
Kp gain without adaptation, VS/2-19 Normalization of the M/P display, VS/5-37
L O
Layout diagram MSD option board, VS/9-53 Open–loop controlled range, AM/4-61
Layout diagram, component side, VR/9-30 Open–loop torque controlled mode, HS/2-44
Layout diagram, parameter board, VS/9-54 function description, HS/2-44
Layout diagram, solder side, VR/9-31 master drive, HS/2-44
Layout diagram, speed control loop, VS/9-56 slave drive, HS/2-44, HS/2-45
Layout diagram, standard interface, VS/9-55 torque setpoint, HS/2-44, HS/2-45
LED display, VR/8-27 Operating display, VS/8-47, HS/2-25, AM/2-22
Limit value stages, VS/5-37 Operating mode, AM/2-22
Limits, AM/4-62 Operator and display elements, AM/1-9
Operator control and display elements, HS/1-8
Optimization, open–loop controlled range,
M AM/4-61
Orientated spindle stop, HS/2-30
M19, HS/2-25, HS/2-30 Oscillation mode, HS/2-29
Magnetizing reactance, AM/2-18, AM/4-72 Oscillation operation, AM/2-26
Manual optimization, AM/4-65 Output terminals, HS/3-61, AM/3-43
Master/slave, VS/3-29, VR/3-16, VR/3-17
Master/slave operation, HS/2-44
Max. speed monitoring, AM/2-23
Maximum current limiting (from FW 3.1), HS/2-54 P
Measured value displays, HS/5-77, AM/5-75 Parallel operation, AM/2-27
Minimum speed, HS/3-57
steady–state, AM/4-63
Minimum/maximum value memory, AM/5-83
Mode, HS/2-25

Index-2 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
10.00
07.94 Overall Index
Parameter RS232C interface, AM/1-7, AM/1-14

attributes, AM/1-5 Run–up time, NE/2-11
list, AM/1-5
number, AM/1-9
Parameter board, VS/9-54
Parameter list, HS/6-113, AM/6-109
S
Parameter set changeover, AM/2-32 Series machines, HS/1-7, AM/1-8
Parameters Service and diagnostics, VS/8-47, VR/8-27
attributes, HS/1-5 Setpoint interfaces, VR/4-19
gearbox–stage dependent, HS/1-8 Setpoint priority, AM/3-39
list, HS/1-5 Setpoint source, AM/2-22
number, HS/1-5, HS/1-8 Setting and monitoring data, HS/6-113, AM/6-109
setting range, HS/1-5, HS/1-6, AM/1-5, Setting data, HS/1-12, AM/1-13
AM/1-6 Setting elements
sub–parameter number, HS/1-8, AM/1-9 with standard interface, VS/3-25, VR/4-19,
transferring into the FEPROM, HS/1-9 VR/4-20
value, HS/1-8, AM/1-9 with user–friendly interface, VS/3-29
write protection, HS/1-9, AM/1-6 Setting the integral action time, VR/2-14
write–protection, HS/1-6 Settings via fixed values, VS/5-38
Phase sequence of tracks A, B (WSG), VR/3-15 Shutdown without reverse rotation, AM/4-64
Pin asignment X311 and X313, VS/9-57 Shutdown, without reverse rotation, AM/3-40
Pole numbers, VR/1-3 Slip monitoring, HS/2-46, HS/3-59
Position processing, VR/3-15 Smoothing
Power module code number, HS/6-99, AM/2-16 speed actual value, HS/4-70, HS/4-76
Powering–up, VR/7-25 speed setpoint, HS/3-59, HS/4-69
Proportional gain Kp, VR/2-13 torque setpoint, HS/4-73
Proportional gain Kp with adaptation, VS/2-22 Smoothing functions, VR/3-16
Proportional gain kp without adaptation, VS/2-19 Solder side, VR/3-16, VR/9-31
Pulse number, angular encoder interface, Special motors
VR/3-15 flux setpoint characteristic, HS/2-19
initialization, HS/2-17
R Speed actual value normalization, VR/1-4
RAM variable, AM/6-108 Speed actual value smoothing, HS/4-70
RAM variable addresses, AM/6-108 Speed control loop, VS/9-56
RAM variables, HS/6-112 Speed controller
Ramp–function generator, HS/4-70, AM/4-54 adaptation, HS/4-72, AM/4-55
tracking, AM/4-54 gain, HS/4-71, AM/4-55
Ramp–up time, VS/5-35 integral action time, HS/4-71, AM/4-55
Rating plate, AM/1-14 Speed controller clock cycle, AM/4-56
Re–initializing drive converter, AM/1-7 Speed range suppression, AM/4-64
Re–initializing the drive converter, HS/1-7 Speed ranges, AM/4-63
Relay function, AM/2-22 Speed setpoint interface, HS/3-55
permanently–connected, AM/3-43 channel selection, HS/3-55
Relay functions, HS/2-25 minimum speed, HS/3-57
control word, signals, HS/3-63, AM/3-46 normalization, HS/3-56
freely–programmable, HS/3-61, AM/3-44 smoothing, HS/3-59
parameterizable signals, AM/3-46 unipolar input, HS/3-56
permanently–wired, HS/3-61 Speed setpoint interfaces, AM/3-37
signals which can be parameterized, HS/3-63 channel selection, AM/3-37
variable, HS/3-64, AM/3-47 setpoint priority, AM/3-39
Replacing components, HS/1-7, AM/1-8 Speed setpoint smoothing, HS/4-69
Replacing firmware, HS/1-7 Speed setting value, HS/2-27
Replacing modules, HS/1-7, AM/1-8 Speed setting values, AM/2-23
Replacing the firmware, AM/1-7

SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition Index-3
Overall Index 10.00
07.94
Spindle positioning, HS/2-31 T

brief commissioning, HS/2-43
diagnostic parameters, HS/2-42 Tachometer adaptation, VS/1-4
function description, HS/2-31 Tachometer calibration, VS/2-18, VR/2-12
position controller, HS/2-37 Terminal function
Position reference value, HS/2-34 assignment, HS/3-59, AM/3-41
position reference value, HS/2-33, HS/2-35, freely–programmable, HS/3-59, AM/3-41
HS/2-41, HS/2-42, HS/3-59 permanently–connected, AM/3-40
relay signal, HS/2-34 permanently–wired, HS/3-58
search speed, HS/2-32, HS/2-33, HS/2-39, Terminals, VR/9-29
HS/2-41 Test sockets, VR/8-27, VR/8-28, HS/5-82,
zero mark, HS/2-32, HS/2-34, HS/2-35, AM/5-80
HS/2-36, HS/2-39, HS/2-42, HS/3-59 Test sockets and display elements
zero pulse, HS/2-33, HS/2-38, HS/2-43 standard interface, VS/8-49
Standard applications, HS/2-25, HS/2-27, AM/1-4, user–friendly interface, VS/8-47
AM/2-22, AM/2-26 Timer, VS/3-29, VR/3-16
setting parameters, AM/2-23 TN (integral action time), VR/2-14
Standard commissioning, VS/1-3 Torque limit value, HS/2-28, AM/2-24
Standard interface, VS/1-4, VS/9-55 Torque limiting, VS/5-36
Standard motors, initialization, HS/2-15 Torque setpoint smoothing, HS/4-73
Standard settings, VS/1-3, VR/1-3 Total moment of inertia, AM/4-56
Standard start–up, VR/1-3 Transient recorder function, HS/5-84, AM/5-84
Star/delta motors, HS/6-101 Travel to fixed endstop, VS/3-29
flux setpoint characteristic, HS/2-23 Troubleshooting, VS/8-50
initialization, HS/2-21
motor changeover, HS/2-24 U
Start–up Uncontrolled infeed, HS/2-16
instructions, HS/1-7, AM/1-7 Unit status, HS/2-25, AM/2-22
new start–up, AM/6-92 User–friendly interface, VS/1-4
possibilities, HS/1-7, AM/1-7
short start–up, VR/1-3
standard start–up, VR/1-3 W
start–up stages, VR–ii
Status display Water–cooled motors, HS/6-101
active functions 1, AM/5-77 Weight equalization, VS/3-30
active functions 2, AM/5-78
active terminal function, HS/5-79, HS/5-80
digital inputs, HS/5-78, AM/5-76 Z
Steady–state minimum speed, AM/4-63
Zero offset, VR/3-15
Sub–parameter number, HS/1-8, AM/1-9
Supplementary setpoint, VS/3-29

Index-4 SIMODRIVE 611 analog Start–Up Guide (IAA) – 10.00 Edition
To Recommendations
SIEMENS AG Corrections
A&D MC BMS for documentation:
Postfach 3180
D–91050 Erlangen Transistor PWM Inverters for AC Feed
Drives and AC Main Spindle Drives
(Tel. 0180 / 525 – 8008 / 5009 [Hotline]
Fax 09131 / 98 – 1145
email: [email protected]) Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Start–Up Guide
From
Order No.: 6SN1197–0AA60–0BP5
Name Edition: 10.00
Company address/Dept. If you should come across any printing errors in this
document, please let us know using this form.
Street We would also be grateful for any recommendations
and suggestions.
Postal code: City:
Telephone: /
Telefax: /
Recommendations and/or corrections

Simodrive PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Simodrive PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Simodrive PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIMODRIVE 611 analog

Start–Up Guide 10.2000 Edition

Transistor PWM Inverters for

Planning Guide Planning Guide EMC Guidelines Description Start–up Guide

Equipment series 6SN11–

Edition Order No. Remarks

This Manual is also included in the documentation on CD–ROM (DOCONCD)

You will find additional information in the Internet under:

Order No. 6SN1197–0AA60–0BP5 Siemens–Aktiengesellschaft

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance

Trained in rendering first aid

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

they must not be damaged,

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

Further, all of the relevant national, local and plant/system–specific regula-

All work should be undertaken with the system in a no–voltage condition!

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

ESDS information Electro–static discharge sensitive devices

Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge are individual

Electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary.

Boards may only be placed on conductive surfaces (desk with ESDS

Boards may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or television

Measuring work may only be carried out on the boards, if

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

SINUMERIK and SIMODRIVE

Handling Sophisticated industrial electronics, as are involved here, have to be handled

Observe all of the ESD measures when handling components.

Are there line supply/motor contactors connected to the drive converter?

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

Space for notes

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

1 Permissible Combination of Power Modules and Control Boards . . . . . . . AL/1-3

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

Anal. speed f. setp. mot. pot.

FD resolver control, analog

2–axis, standard interface

MSD control, analog

MSD control, analog

MSD control, analog

Fixed setpoints, motorized pot.

Anal. speed f. setp. mot. pot.

FD resolver control, analog

2–axis, standard interface

MSD control, analog

MSD control, analog

MSD control, analog

Power module, 300A

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

Space for notes

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

Standard Settings, NE Modules (UE and NE

Fig. 1-1 DIL switch S1

 Siemens AG 2000 All rights reserved

Switch S 1.1 : OFF: I/R moduleVsupply =400V10%;